TM01-01-2005-10

AFGHANISTAN FIELD ARTILLERY

TECHNICAL OPERATOR’S
MANUAL

HOWITZER, MEDIUM, TOWED:

122-MM, D-30

01 April 2005
 TM01-01-2005-10

Chapter I INTRODUCTION
A. Introduction to Cannoneer Duties
B. Brief Information about Howitzer Components
1. Barrel
2. Breech Mechanism
3. Trigger Mechanism
4. Cradle
5. Recuperator
6. Buffer/ Recoil Absorber
7. Upper Mount
8. Elevating Gear
9. Steering Gear
10. Balancing Gear
11. Running Gear
12. Wheels
13. Wheel Hoisting Gear
14. Shield
15. Lower Mount
16. Trails
17. Jack
18. Electrical Equipment
19. Sighting Devices

Chapter II BARREL, BREECH MECHANISM, SEMIAUTOMATICS AND

DEFLECTION WITH BLOCKAGE
A. BARREL
1. Barrel
2. Tube
3. Breech
4. Breech Ring
5. Back Clip
6. Front Clip
7. Muzzle Brake
8. Drawbar
9. Barrel Sleeve
B. BREECH MECHANISM AND SEMIAUTOMATICS
1. Locking Mechanism
a. Breech Block
2. Striker Mechanism
a. Cocking Axis
b. Cocking Stopper
3. Extractor Mechanism
a. Mechanism of Repeated Cocking
4. Safety Mechanism
5. Retaining Mechanism

i
 TM01-01-2005-10

6. Semiautomatic Breech Mechanism

a. Opening Mechanism
b. Closing Mechanism
c. Effect of the Semiautomatic Breech Mechanism
7. Barrier with Blocking Mechanism
a. Blocking Mechanism
b. Blocking Gear Performance

Chapter III CRADLE AND RECOIL DEVICE

A. Cradle
B. Counter-Recoil Devices
C. Recoil Absorber
D. Recuperator
1. Recuperator
2. Outside Cylinder
3. Middle Cylinder
4. Principle Cylinder
5. Rod
6. Gland Case
E. Operating of Counter-Recoil Devices

Chapter IV SADDLE, LAYING, MECHANISMS, EQUILIBRATOR, RUNNING

GEAR, WHEELS ELEVATION MECHANISM AND SHIELD
A. Saddle
B. Elevating Gear
1. The housing
2. Worm Wheel
3. Worm Shaft
4. Elevating Gear Drive
5. Elevating Gear Performance
C. STEERING GEAR
1. Housing
2. Eccentric Shaft
3. Worm Shaft
4. Steering Gear Drive
5. Steering Gear Performance
D. Equilibrator
1. Outside Cylinder
2. Sealing Device
3. Inside Cylinder
4. Valve Device

E. Running Gear
1. Cranks
2. Running Gear Performance
3. Wheels

ii
 TM01-01-2005-10

F. Wheels Elevating Gear

1. Supporting Lever
2. Connecting Lever
3. Connecting Rod
4. Connecting Piece
5. Handle
6. Performance of the Wheels Elevating Mechanism
G. Shield
1. Left Shield Piece
2. Right Shield Piece
3. Shield Dismantling

Chapter V SADDLE SUPPORT, TRAILS, JACK AND ELECTRICAL

EQUIPMENT
A. Saddle Support
1. Worm Ring
2. Bushing
3. Pipe
4. Central Branch-Pipe
5. Saddle Support
B. Trails
C. Jack
1. Base Disc
2. Screw
3. Cone-Shaped Pinions
4. Axis-Pinion Tail-Piece
5. Jack Performance
D. Roller
E. Electrical Equipment

Chapter VI AIMING EQUIPMENT

A. Panoramic Sight D726-45
1. Tangent Elevation Mechanism
2. Tangent Elevation Mechanism Performance
3. Angle of Sight Mechanism
4. Angle of Sight Mechanism Performance
5. Rolling Motion Mechanism
6. Rolling Motion Mechanism/Performance
B. Panoramic Sight -1M
1. Reflecting Mechanism
2. Reflector Prism
3. Protractor Mechanism
4. Rotating Device
5. Panorama’s Grid
6. Panorama Installation and Dismantling

iii
 TM01-01-2005-10

C. Telescopic Sight OII4M-45

1. Sight Optical Scheme
2. Design of OII4M-45
a. Aiming Mechanism
b. Aiming Mechanism Performance
c. Aim-Off Mechanism
d. Adjustment Mechanism
3. Illuminating of Sights
a. Battery
b. Sight and Panorama Lighting Device
c. Lighting of Commander’s Position
d. Lighting of Gunner’s Position

Chapter VII SPARE PARTS, TOOLS, ACCESSORIES and SKI FACILITY

A. General Information
B. Field Clinometer
C. Gun Clinometer
D. Air-Hydraulic Pump
1. Preparation to Performance
2. Pump Performance when Pumping Air
3. Pump Performance when Pumping Fluid
E. Ski Skids Equipment
1. Attaching Skis on Gun/ Howitzer
2. Dismantling Skis Off Gun/ Howitzer
3. Storage of Ski Skids
F. Barrel Retracting Instrument

Chapter VIII HOWITZER DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLING

A. General Instructions
B. Disassembly and Assembly of Breech Mechanism with
Semiautomatic Gear and Guard Assembly with Interlocking
Gear
1. Disassembly of Breech Mechanism with Semiautomatic
Gears
a. Order of Partial Disassembly
b. Order of Complete Disassembly
1. Disassemble the Locking Device
2. Disassemble Extracting Mechanism
3. Disassemble Trigger Pressure Arm
4. Disassemble Recocking Cam
5. Disassemble Retainer Cam Plate
6. Disassemble Breechblock Stop
C. Assembly of Breech Mechanism with Semiautomatic Gears
D. Breech Mechanism After Complete Disassembly
1. Assemble Breech in Following Order
a. Assemble Breechblock Stop

iv
 TM01-01-2005-10

b. Assemble Retainer Cam Plate

c. Assemble Interlock Mechanism
d. Assemble Recocking Drive
e. Assemble Trigger Mechanism
f. Install Guard Shield
E. Disassembly and Assembly of Jack
1. Disassembly of Jack
2. Assembly of Jack
F. Adjusting the Jack Handles Used for Fastening the Handles in the
Traveling and Firing Positions

Chapter IX SAFETY PROCEDURES AND GUIDELINES

A. General Provisions
B. Personal Safety Governing Instructions
1. Switching from Traveling Position to Firing Position
2. Shooting Howitzer
3. While on March
C. Guiding Instructions for use of Howitzer in Drills

Chapter X PREPARATION OF HOWITZER TO SHOOT

A. General Directives
B. Howitzer Examination and Testing of Mechanisms Work
C. Check of Recoil Absorber and Recuperator
1. Checking of fluid in recoil absorber
2. Checking of fluid amount in recuperator
3. Measuring Pressure in Recuperator
D. Aiming Equipment Examining
E. Preparation of Howitzer for Aiming Equipment Examination
1. Field Clinometer Examining
2. Checking of Nil Readings
a. Checking of Nil Reading Setting for Д726-45 Sight
b. Checking of Nil Line of Sighting for Д726-45 Sight
c. Checking of Nil Line of Sighting for OII4M-45 Sight

Chapter XI HANDLING OF HOWITZER WHEN SHOOTING

A. Transforming from Traveling to Firing Position
B. Howitzer Shooting Preparations
C. Collimator Use
1. Posting the Collimator
2. Making Collimator Marker
3. Collimator Setting Providing Unified Field Clinometer for
Battery formation
D. Howitzer Indirect Laying Using the Д726-45 Sight
E. Howitzer Direct Laying Using OII4M-45 Sight

v
 TM01-01-2005-10

F. Laying Procedures When Firing at Moving Target

1. Opening Fire
2. Observation of Fire
G. Direct Laying of Howitzer Using the D726-45 Series Sight
H. Designing Target Range using OP4M-45 Series Sight
1. Detecting a Flat Trajectory Range
2. Use of Range Finding Scale for Range Detection
3. Measured Angle Method for Detecting Range
I. Howitzer Loading and Firing
1. To Load a Howitzer
2. To Unload a Howitzer After Firing
3. Surveillance of Howitzer in the Process of Firing
J. Howitzer Faults and Corrections During Firing
1. Faults of Recoil System
2. Faults of Laying Mechanism and Balancing Gear
3. Howitzer Inspection and Maintenance after Firing

Chapter XII HOWITZER MARCH MODE AND TRANSPORTATION

A. Moving Howitzer from Firing position to Traveling
Position
B. Howitzer Pre-March Check List
C. Howitzer Handling During Traveling
D. Interim Fault Handling
E. After-March Inspection
F. Howitzer Transport on Flat Wagons

Chapter XIII MATERIAL INSPECTION AND FAULT HANDLING

A. General Directives
B. Barrel Examination
1. Visual Inspection
2. Bore Examination
C. Examining a Semi-Automatic Breech Mechanism and
Deflector Assembly with a Locking System
D. Inspection of the Cradle and Recoil System
1. Examining the Cradle
2. Inspection of Recoil System
E. Inspection of Saddle, Balancing Gear and Laying
Mechanisms
1. Examining the Saddle
2. Checking Elevating Gear Performance
3. Defining Pressure in the Balancing Gear: Inspection
4. Traversing Gear Inspection
5. Examining Parts of Disassembled Balancing Gear and
Laying Mechanism

vi
 TM01-01-2005-10

F. Examination of Running Gears, Wheels, Wheel-Lifting

Gear, Gun shield, and Electrical Equipment
1. Examining Running Gears
2. Examining Wheel-Lifting Gears
3. Examining Gun Shield
4. Electrical Equipment Inspection
G. Examination of Saddle Support, Trails and Lifting Jack
1. Examining Saddle Support and Trails
2. Examining the Lifting Jack
H. Examination and Check of Sighting Devices
1. Check of Quadrant (Gunner’s Clinometer)
2. Defining Backlashes of Sights
3. Value of Backlash Mechanism and Angles
4. Value of Backlash Bearing Scale
5. Expendable Longitudinal and Lateral Play
a. Expendable Longitudinal Play
b. Expendable Lateral Play
6. Checking Sight Adjustability
a. Check Longitudinal Level Deviation attribute
7. Check of Д726-45 Series Sight Setting on the Howitzer
8. Determine Correction for Discrepancies in Sight
Setting and Angles of Quadrant Elevation
a. Table of Corrections
9. Determining Correction Factor
10. Inspection and Check of OII4M-45 Sight
11. Inspection of Collimator
I. Inspection of Spare Parts, Instruments, Accessories and
Possible Malfunctions of the Air Hydraulic Pump
1. When Air is Pumped
2. When Liquid is Pumped

Chapter XIV. CARE, STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE

HOWITZER
A. General Instructions
1. Current Maintenance
2. Maintenance #1 Operations
3. Maintenance #2 Operations
4. List of Inspections of Howitzer Technical State
5. Seasonal Maintenance
B. Materials and Accessories for Cleaning and Greasing
C. Cleaning and Greasing of the Barrel
D. Chemical Cleaning of the Barrel Bore
E. Bore Lubrication
F. Cleaning and Greasing of Breech-Block
G. Cleaning and Greasing of the Gun Carriage and Barrel Guide
H. Greasing of Hinged Parts of Trails

vii
 TM01-01-2005-10

I. Cleaning and Greasing of Sight System

J. Greasing Table
K. Howitzer Storage
L. Storage of Sights and Collimator
M. Storage of Spare Parts, Instruments and Accessories
N. Safe-Keeping and Maintenance of Air and Hydraulic
Pump
O. Slushing and Deslushing of Howitzer
1. Guidelines
2. Sequence of Deslushing
3. Sequence of Slushing

Chapter XV ARTILLERY ROUNDS GENERAL INFORMATION

A. Purpose and Design of Artillery Rounds

1. Principle Elements
2. Combinations of Compounds
B. Artillery Round Classification
1. Service Rounds
2. Practice Rounds
3. Blank Rounds
4. Drill Rounds
5. Special Rounds
C. Artillery Full Charges
1. Classification of Full Charges and Requirements
a. Types of Shots
b. According to Their Design
c. Variants Used in Variable Full Charges
d. Quantity of Powder Marks
2. General Principles of Full Charge Arrangement
a. Portion of Powder
3. Igniter
4. Desensitizer
5. Flash Reducing Charge
6. Distance (Obturating) Piece
7. Full Charges for QF Rounds
8. Full Charges for Separate QF Fixed Round
9. Full Charges for BL Rounds
D. Cartridge Cases

Chapter XVI KITTING OUT AND EXPLOITATION OF ARTILLERY

ROUNDS
A. Kitting out of Artillery System with Rounds
1. Quantitative Kitting out
2. Qualitative Kitting out
3.

viii
 TM01-01-2005-10

B. Stenciling, Painting, Indexation and Marking of

Ammunition
1. Stenciling
2. Painting of Ammunition
a. Safety Painting
b. Distinguished Painting
3. Ammunition Indexation
a. Complete Index Table
b. Brief Index
4. Marking
a. Projectile Marking
b. Shell and Case Marking
c. Marking on Packing Container
C. Storage and Care of Ammunition
1. Repair of Ammunition
2. Replacement of Defective Cartridges
D. Handling Rounds at the Fire Position

ANNEX 1 PRIMARY SPECIFICATION OF THE 122 MM, D-30 HOWITZER

1. Ballistic
2. Design
3. Dimensions
4. Weight
5. Operation

ANNEX 2 ILLUSTRATED REGISTER OF SPARE PARTS, TOOLS, AND FIXING

1. Instrument
2. Fixings
3. Set of Packings

ANNEX 3 REFERENCE FIGURES RELATING TO ENTIRE MANUAL

ix
 TM01-01-2005-10

Chapter I.

A. Introduction to Cannoneer Duties

Personnel directly working with the gun, are called a gun crew. Personnel in the gun crew
are called Cannoneers. Commands over the gun crew is executed by the Section Chief. He is in
immediate charge over the gun crew and is responsible for the constant combat preparedness of the
gun crew and material required to complete combat missions. Each Cannoneer number is
responsible for certain duties. Quantity of numbers in the gun crew depends of the gun system: the
heavier the system the more members are in the gun crew. The gun crew of the 122 mm howitzer
includes a Chief, Gunner, Assistant Gunner, and 4 Cannoneers. Names of positions of the gun crew
numbers are mainly defined by the contents of their jobs while preparation and conduct of fire.
Composition and names of the gun crew of 122 mm D-30 howitzer are listed below:

• Section Chief -responsible for the training and proficiency of his section, the
operational readiness of his equipment, and the safe firing of the howitzer.
• Gunner -
• Asst. Gunner -
• Cannoneer 1 -
• Cannoneer 2 -
• Cannoneer 3 -
• Cannoneer 4/ Driver -

Guns are towed by prime movers (trucks), before transitioning from a mobile position into a battle
position guns need taken off the prime mover’s pintle. For this the Section Chief gives the
commands: “Prepare to Lift”, “Lift”. All cannoneers are positioned in the back of the prime mover
as in Figure 1-1. On the command “Stop” driver stops the gun prime mover (truck). On the
command “Dismount” all gun crew members jump down and take their positions by the gun as is
shown in Figure 1-3. All formations that are called by the Section Chief for any reason will fall in as
referenced in Figure 1-2. The responsibilities of each gun crew member is different on the
commands “Prepare for Action” and “March Order” which are given in their respective chapter in
this manual. To bring the gun into the battle position the command “Prepare for Action” is given,
and to bring the gun from the battle to mobile position – “March Order”. These commands are
executed in a certain order, both timely and coordinated. To bring the gun into the battle position
means to take off covers, opens trails, and emplace for firing, insert dial sight into the dial sight
socket and fasten it, mount a telescopic sight in a bracket, set zero settings (sight 0, level 30-00,
deflection 30-00, reflector 0-00, bubbles of levels in the middle) i.e. to prepare the gun for firing.
While switching the gun from a mobile position to battle position and from vice versa each gun
crew number executes certain duties. So, for instance, upon the “Prepare for Action” command,
Gunner takes off covers from the sighting devices, installs dial sight into the dial sight socket,
fastens telescopic sight in a bracket, sets zero settings on the sighting devices, opens peepholes in
the shield, if firing during the night pulls out lighting device and mounts it, executes other tasks
given by the Section Chief.

1-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 1-1

Figure 1-2

Figure 1-3

1-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

While firing each gun crew number is responsible for certain duties.
These duties of the Cannoneers while conducting fire are as follows:

• Gunner works at the sighting devices and with the help of steering and lifting gear
conducts laying for elevation and laying for deflection;
• Assistant Gunner (lock) opens and closes breech mechanism: guns with sights not
depending on the gun, executes laying for elevation;
• Cannoneer 1 loads the gun with shells and charges;
• Cannoneer 3 mounts commanded fuse;
• Cannoneer 4 gets shells ready, gathers shot shell cases and puts them into carrying box;
• Cannoneer 2 makes up charges: gathers unused bundles of powder and puts them into
crates.

Actions of the gun crew numbers while firing are defined by commands of the Section Chief.
Approximate order of work of the gun crew numbers while firing is shown above.

While working with the gun it is prohibited:

• to be in the path of the recoiling parts and in front of the loaded gun.
• to be on the side of spring operation while work and alignment of spring
mechanisms.
• to put stones, logs, planks and other solid materials under gun’s sides.
• to fix gun’s wheels with beams from the side of the trails.
• to start firing without removing lubricant from the barrel.

B. BRIEF INFORMATION ABOUT HOWITZER COMPONETS

D-30 Howitzer have the following main parts:

1. Barrel – monoblock, which consists of a tube, breech ring, sleeve, two chargers, and muzzle
brake.

2. Breech Mechanism - vertically operated wedge-type with semiautomatics of mechanical

(copy) type. To facilitate loading and secure from falling out of a shell from the channel of
the barrel during loading under big elevation angles, is the loading trough there is a retaining
pawl which in the end of opening of the breech drowns in and doesn’t prevent expulsion of
the shell case. The shot is done with the help of the trigger mechanism handle, which is
placed on the left of the guard plate.

3. Trigger Mechanism - has a blockage; trigger release can not be executed given the breech
ring is above the trails, when the barrel elevation angle is more than 18°. The deflector with
the blockage is placed on the left of the breech ring.

1-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

4. Cradle - consists of a frame and trunnion charger. Cradle trunnions lie in trunnion
housings of the upper mount and fastened in them by the cap squares. Inside of the cradle
placed recoil absorber and recuperator, piston rods of which are fastened in the cradle
cap. In the cradle are welded brackets for sights and balancing gear. Apart from this, sectors
of the elevating gear are fastened to the cradle.

5. Recuperator - hydro-pneumatic, filled with Steol M (glycerin and ethylalcohol mixture

used as hydraulic fluid) in quantity of 9,77 l, nitrogen or air. Normal pressure in the
recuperator is 46 kg/ cm².

6. Buffer / Recoil Absorber - hydraulic, counter-acting piston type, with spring compensator.
Buffer is filled with 10.3 liters of Steol M. Length of recoil while firing with full charge is
740 – 930 mm. Maximal length of recoil is 940 mm. Cylinders of the recuperator and the
buffer are fixed in the breech ring clip (charger) and recoil together with the barrel.

7. Upper Mount - is placed on the base of the swinging part of the howitzer. In its lower part
there are pipes for motion axis. On the left side of the upper mount elevating gear casing is
fixed.

8. Elevating Gear - sector, provides angles of laying for elevation from -7 up to +70°.

9. Steering Gear - (traversing gear) a worm type. Provides angle of horizontal shelling
(gunfire) 360°. Steering gear is placed on the left of the upper mount. Traversing worm is
mounted in eccentric bushing allowing to turn it off when it is necessary to quickly change
direction of fire.

10. Balancing Gear - pneumatic of thrust type, designed for balancing the swindling part at all
range of barrel elevation angles (cradle with barrel) and facilitating of lifting of the wheels
while bringing the howitzer from mobile into battle position. Balancing gear is placed on the
right side of the howitzer and consists of two cylinders, one going into the other. Upper
movable support of the balancing gear is fixed in the cradle bracket, and supporting arm of
the wheel lifting gear serves as a lower support.

11. Running Gear - has torsion type spring suspension. Motion axis is mounted in the pipes of
upper mount. At a march and in the battle position (with wheels lifted) motion axis is
connecting with unmovable half coupling of the upper mount with the help of movable
coupling of the wheels hoisting mechanism.

12. Wheels - are of the ZIL-150 truck with GK9 tires, 00-20.

13. Wheels Hoisting Gear - provides the transition of howitzer wheels from mobile position to
battle position and back.

1-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

14. Shield - preserves the gun crew from effects of muzzle wave upon the shot, fragments and
bullets. It consists of the right and left halves and lower shield. The right and left halves of
the shield are removable.

15. Lower Mount - cast, to the upper part of the mount welded the warm ring, which goes into
mesh with the warm of the steering gear. To the lower mount fixed are three trails, one of
which is welded and is immovable. Two others are movable and are fastened with the help
of hinges.

16. Trails - box trails of welded construction. Right and left trails are same in their construction.
Plateau with openings for spades are welded to the ends of all trails. In a mobile position
trails are fastened together with the help of tightening device and are connected to the barrel
with the help of frame. In a battle position trails are relieved and fixed with the help of
stoppers.

17. Jack - is designed for hoisting the howitzer while transitioning from mobile position to
battle position and back. It consists of firing platform, two screws, bevel gear, housing,
bearings, cap, brake and two handles.

18. Electrical Equipment - of the howitzer provides lighting signalization at a march, and
consists of clearance lamp and stop signal lamp, and turns on into the electric circuit of a
prime mover with the help of a plug.

19. Sighting Devices - are designed for laying the howitzer for a target. For direct laying fire at
motionless and active targets OP4M-45 optical sight is used. From the indirect fie position –
mechanical panoramic (swindling) sight D726-45 with rocking bar system, which, when
necessary, can be used for direct laying fire. Both sights are placed on the left of cradle and
are fixed at the bracket. During the night firing sighting devices are lit by Luch (Ray) device.

1-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

CHAPTER II
BARREL, BREECH MECHANISM, SEMIAUTOMATICS
AND DEFLECTOR WITH BLOCKAGE

A. BARREL

1. Barrel - is designed to direct the flight of a shell, give it required initial speed and rotating
motion, providing its stability during the flight. Barrel consists of a tube, breech ring, back
clip (charger), front clip (charger), muzzle brake, draw bar, and sleeve (coupling).

2. Tube - a variable cross section. Dimensions of its external diameter decrease starting from
breech end to muzzle end.

3. Breech - part of the tube ends with a collar with key bed. When the collar breech ring is put
on, this from the crank is fastened by a dowel, and from the axis displacement – by sleeve
(coupling). Tube bore has rifling and chamber. In the tube rifling there are 36 cuts of
incremental steepness. Cuts go from left up to the right, if look from the breech part. The
chamber has smooth surface, and inside of it places are case with charge and shell base. The
chamber is connected to the rifling by the chamber cone, against which, during loading, rests
shell’s driving band.

4. Breech Ring - 1 serves as housing for breech mechanism, locking the bore, as well as for
connection of the barrel with recoil systems. In the front part of the breech ring there are
buttress threads for srewing in of the sleeve (coupling) and smooth part for the tube collar.
From behind sides of the breech ring are connected by a connector and form vertical housing
for wedge-type breechblock. There is a deepening in the form of trough in the connector,
which is designed to direct shell and case during the loading. In the right side of the breech
ring there are several openings. In the opening a (fig 5) crankshafts axis is inserted. Opening
b is for the ex-prime mover’s axis. On the clip of the breech ring on the right there is two
openings y for screws fixing the stop plate of the buffer nut. Above the a there are two
threaded housings g for screws fixing handle’s stop. On the top there is opening d for the
breechblock. In the front part of the right side there is opening e for pin of the opening lever
and housing zh, in which pintle of the stop plunger is inserted. On the back butt end of the
clip (charger) of the breech ring there is two housings t for screws fixing the plate, retaining
cylinders of the recoil devices from crank. In the left side of the breech ring (fig 6) figure
groove z is milled, in which retaining lug and retaining pawl cam lever are placed. In the
same groove there is opening i for retaining pawl cam. Into the opening k duplicate cocking
is inserted. On its right there is housing l for a retaining pin stopping duplicate cocking lever,
higher on the breech ring clip – openings f for screws, fixing stopper plate of the recuperator
nut. Four threaded housings m are designed for screws, fixing base of the retaining lug to the
breech ring. Lower there is a shallow housing n, in which there are one opening o for detent
depression and two threaded housings n for bolts, fixing he bush in the housing n. to the left
of the housing n there is opening x for ex-prime mover’s axis. On the back butt end of the
breech ring there is housing r with rifling for screwing in of the hook during artificial recoil.
From below, in the breech ring there are two grooves, in which crankshafts with rollers go.
From above on the breech ring there is clip (charger), in which recoil devices are fastened.

2-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

From above on the left from the breech mortise there is a clinometer plane with marks for
establishing control level during the check of sighting devices. On the right and left sides of
the breech ring in the upper part lengthwise grooves are done for cradle guides.

5. Back Clip 9 (fig 3) represents steel casting, n the outer part of which there are two bosses
with grooves. Into each grooves two removable brass bushes 25 are inserted (as on the front
clip (charger)), which are fixed to the bosses of clips (chargers) by bolts 24 and screws 26.
Bolts and screws are stopped by steel wire 29. Stop 8 served for displacement of a sliding
member of the recoil indicator.

6. Front Clip 11 in its configuration is analogical to the back clip (charger). Both clips
(chargers) from above have openings, in which pins 10 are inserted, which keep the clip
(charger) from turning with regards to tube. For strengthening, constructions of clips
(chargers) have webs, coming from bosses to the cylinder. On the tube of the clip (charger)
fixed with the help of nuts 12 and 20 which are welded to the clips (chargers). By the bushes
of the clips (chargers) the barrel relies on the slipper guides of the cradle.

7. Muzzle Brake 14 serves for absorption of the part of the recoil energy. From each side of
the muzzle brake there are six openings, which are for powder gases to go through during
the fire. Effectiveness of the muzzle brake is about 50%. The Muzzle brake is connected
with the tube with the help of the nut 34 and two split bearings 33.To keep it from crank it’s
being held by the key 28. The key is kept from falling out by a washer 30, which is fixed by
two bolts 27, which are stopped by wire 29.Nut 34 is stopped by a fixer 31, fixed by two
bolts. The latter are stopped by the wire 29. On the front cut of the muzzle brake there are
four mutually perpendicular graduation lines to establish crosshairs while checking the
sighting devices. From below to the muzzle brake the draw bar 15 is fixed by bolts 18. Bolts
18 are stopped by wire 19.

8. Drawbar 15 serves for connection of the howitzer with the prime mover while transporting.
Along the draw bar two handrails 16 are welded to facilitate lifting of the front part of the
howitzer while connecting it to the prime mover. On some howitzers muzzle brake 14 (fig.4)
is screwed on the muzzle part of the tube up to the stop and superimposition of the
graduation lines on the tube and muzzle brake. It’s being kept from the crank by two
stoppers. On howitzer of different type fixing of the draw bar 2 with the muzzle brake 1 is
done with the help of articulated joints. Articulating mechanism of the draw bar is fixed on
axis 6 between the sides of the muzzle brake. The draw bar has two mobile (upper and
lower) and one battle positions. While transportation by AT-P and AT-L prime movers,
draw bar is set in a lower position as is shown on picture 4. While transportation by ZIL-151
and ZIL-157 trucks its set in an upper position. For this it is necessary to take the draw bar
off the muzzle brake, turn it around the longitudinal axis 180° and fix it again in the muzzle
brake. While doing this draw bar ring will lift 170 mm from the ground level. To switch the
draw bar from mobile to battle position and back it is necessary to pull off handle 3 of the
stopper and move it up to the stop into the platform a on the muzzle brake, then turn the
draw bar and return the handle into the previous position up to the stop into the pin 4.

Note: On some howitzers the draw bar has one mobile position and one battle position

2-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

9. Barrel Sleeve 7 (fig. 3) is designed for fastening of the tube with the breech ring. It is a
coreless cylinder, on the outside of which there is a buttress thread. Barrel sleeve put on the
tube is being screwed into the breech ring up to the stop in the tube collar. Barrel sleeve is
fixed by a stopper 23, mounted in the breech ring groove; stopper’s teeth go into cohesion
with barrel sleeve’s teeth (toothing). The stopper is fixed by two screws 22, which are
stopped by wire 21. On the front butt-end of the barrel sleeve there are four splines for a key.

B. BREECH MECHANISM AND SEMIAUTOMATICS

Breech Mechanism (fig. 7 and 15) – vertical, wedge type with falling while opening wedge, and with
semiautomatics of mechanic (copy) type is designed for:

• blocking of the barrel’s channel;

• making a shot;
• expulsion of shot or extraction of charged shell cases in cases of multiple misfire;
• for repeated arming (without opening the wedge) in case of misfire;
• for preservation from a shot when breech mechanism is not completely closed;
• To keep the shell in the chamber of the barrel during loading when big elevation levels.
•
Breech mechanism consists of locking, striker, extractor, safety, and retaining mechanisms, as well as
mechanisms of repeated arming and semiautomatics.

1. LOCKING MECHANISM

Locking Mechanism (fig. 8) is designed for locking the barrel channel when making a shot.
It consists of wedge 68 (fig. 15), breech mechanism, axis 61 (fig. 8) actuating shafts with
cranks 56 and 57, handle 1 for opening the breech mechanism, stop 52, stop’s bush 48 and
stop’s head 49.

a. Breech Block 68 (fig. 15) of the breech mechanism has a form of a tetrahedral prism
with a deepening (loading through) on the top for directing the shell and the case
during the loading. In the lower part of the loading through there is a groove for the
retaining pawl of the shell. In the center of the front face there is an opening for
protrusion of firing pin (striker stud). In the breechblock striker mechanism, details
of mechanism of repeated arming and safety mechanism are housed.
From the both sides of the front face of the breechblock extractors’ cams 1 are fixed
by the screws 2 (fig. 16). In the upper part of the breechblock there are two openings
a (fig. 8) for a handle used for the withdrawal of the breechblock from the
breechblock housing of the breech ring. On the right and left planes of the
breechblock there are figure grooves g, along which actuating shafts rollers slide,
forcing the breechblock to go down when opening or up when closing of the breech
mechanism. Axis 61 of the actuating shafts (fig. 8 and 15) is placed in the opening of
the breech ring. From the axial displacement it’s been held by the nut 58, which is

2-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

stopped. On the splines of actuating shafts axis left 57 and right 56 actuating shafts
are put on. When lifting or sinking of the breechblock actuating shafts rollers slide
along the figure grooves g (fig. 8) of the breechblock. Opening the handle of the
breech mechanism (fig. 9) gives possibility to open the breech mechanism manually.
Inside of the handle there is a catch plunger 69 with spring 70, which retains the slide
72 in the upper position. On the axis 75 lever 74 is fastened and is drew in to the
handle by the spring 76 with the lever retaining lug 73. In order to keep it from
falling out axis 75 is center-popped from both butt-ends. When opening the breech
mechanism manually it is necessary to push plunger 69. Spring 70 will squeeze, and
the slide 72 connected with the plunger by a stud-bolt 71 will fall down, after which
slide’s tooth will drop out of toothing with the stop 14 of the handle (fig. 15). Then it
is necessary to avert the handle 1 into the outermost rear position. Lever 74 (fig. 9)
rotating on the axis 75, under the action of the spring 76, will drop in the segment cut
of the actuating shafts axis. When turning the breech mechanism handle forward up
to the stop, actuating shafts axis will rotate together with the handle and will turn the
actuating shafts, which having pressed by the roller on the verge of the figure groove
of the breechblock, will lower the breechblock. In the end of breechblock’s
movement down extractors cams 1 (fig. 16) will hit the lower lugs b (fig.15) of the
extractors, which after a turn around their axis, by their upper lugs v will jump
behind the cams and will keep the breechblock from closing. At the same time lever
74 (fig. 9) by its upper shoulder will hit the stopper 14 of the handle (fig. 15), and its
lower shoulder will get out of the segment cut in the axis of the actuating shafts; in
such position lever 74 (fig. 9) will not set against the segment cut of the axis of
actuating shaft when closing the breechblock. To limit breechblock’s movement up
in the right side of the breech ring there is a stop 52 of the breechblock (fig. 15) with
a spring 47 and stop’s bush 48. To take the breechblock out, one needs to lower it
with the help of the handle, then with the help of the screwdriver sink breechblock’s
stop and turn it 90°. Breechblock’s stop will remain in the down position (flush with
the plane of the breech ring); breechblock should be taken out by the handle.

2. STRIKER MECHANISM

Striker Mechanism (fig.10 and 16) is designed for making a shot. It’s placed in the
breechblock and consists of striker 12, striker’s main spring 5, cocking 13, cocking axis 15,
cocking stopper 18 with spring 17. Striker 12 on one end has a firing pin for breaking the
primer, on the other end – cylinder housing, in which main spring is placed. Second end of
the spring sets against striker cover 4.

a. Cocking Axis - 15 is inserted into the opening in the breechblock on the right. On
the axis there is a lever, on which actuating shaft tooth presses during opening of the
breech mechanism.

b. Cocking Stopper - 18 is inserted into the opening in the breechblock on the left and
drew in by the spring, ends of which set against breechblock housing and stopper

2-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

collar. In the middle part the stopper has a cut, in which lower shoulder of the striker
cocking is placed. The stopper ends with a cylinder rod, rounded butt-end of which
runs out of the breechblock plane and during the motion of the latter gets sank in the
breech ring. Lower extension k of the catch 22 (fig. 13 and 16) goes into the cut d of
the stopper 18 of the cocking, and keeps the stopper in the jammed position. The
striker cover 4 (fig. 10) draws in the main spring and closes the striker housing in the
breechblock. It is connected with the breechblock by the lugs. Effect of the Striker
Mechanism (fig. 7 and 17). During opening of the breech mechanism right actuating
shaft, turning together with its axis, presses with is tooth on the lever of cocking axis,
on the square end of which the striker cocking is put on. Striker cocking turns, and
having squeezed the main spring, cocks the striker. During the turning of the striker
cocking, cocking stopper under the action of the spring jumps into the cut of the
cocking and stops the cocking and the striker in the cocked position. To make a shot
it is enough to push the cocking stopper. Stopper will depose, give possibility to the
striker cocking to turn, the striker under the action of the main spring will run
forward and hit the primer with its firing pin. Protrusion of firing pin over the front
cut (front face) of the breechblock in the moment of a strike on the primer should be
not less than 2 mm and not more than 2,38 mm. Protrusion of firing pin is checked
with the help of special stencil (A52415-1), available at ZIP.

3. EXTRACTOR MECHANISM

Extractor mechanism serves for expulsion of a case after a shot or for extraction of a
charged case in case of multiple misfire, as well as for retaining the breechblock in the lower
(open) position. Extraction of a charged case is done at the manual opening of the breech
mechanism. Extractor mechanism consists of the right 21 (fig. 11 and 15) and left 22
extractors, axis 20 of the extractors with lever 19 and two caps 54 with springs 53 inserted
into the tube housings. Extractors are placed in the front part of the breechblock housing of
the breech ring and go into the grooves on the breech cut of the tube. Each extractor has
lower lug b turned backwards, upper lug v and guide clip coming tightly to the chamber.
Axis 20 is inserted into the housing of the breech ring from the right side. Extractors put on
the axis are kept from rotating by the dowel 55. From the left side on the end of extractor
axis, running out from the housing, lever is put on, which is held on the axis by a stopper
screw 17, stopped by a washer 18. With case sent in addition upper parts of extractors are
sank into the grooves of the breech cut of the tube, and guide clips are under the case flange.
When opening the breech mechanism breechblock, falling down, hits the lower lugs of
extractors by the extractor cams. Extractors sharply turn and throw away case out of the
chamber by the guide clips. When the breechblock falls down in the outermost lower
position, upper lugs of extractors will jump over the extractor cam lugs and keep the
breechblock in the lower position. When loading the howitzer, case hits its flange on the
extractor guide clips and knocks down their upper lugs from the cams. The breechblock
under the action of the closing spring moves up. The breechblock closes. In order to close
the breech mechanism without loading the howitzer, it is needed to turn the lever 19 down.
At this moment extractors will turn and free the breechblock. The breech mechanism will
close.

2-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

a. Mechanism of repeated cocking – (recocking lever) serves for cocking of

the striker mechanism after misfire without opening the breech mechanism.
Details of the mechanism of repeated cocking of the striker are placed in the
breechblock of the breech mechanism, in the breech ring on the left side and
on the guard plate (fig. 7 and 17). In the breechblock 68 (fig. 15) there is an
axis 16 (fig. 12) of the repeated cocking, in the breech ring there are repeated
cocking 63, spring 64, lever 65 and stopper 62. On the guard plate there are
handle 31 (fig. 18 and 19) of the repeated cocking, rod 41 and lever 19 with a
pin b. To repeatedly cock the striker mechanism, it is necessary to turn up the
handle 31 up to the stop 27. Pin b of the lever 19 will press on lever 65 (fig.
15) and turn the repeated cocking 63, which by its extension will press on the
axis 16 (fig. 16), turn it together with the cocking 13 of the striker and cock
the striker 12.

4. SAFETY MECHANISM

Safety mechanism keeps from making a shot with not completely closed breech mechanism.
Safety mechanism is mounted in the housing of the breechblock of the breech mechanism (fig.
13 and 16) and consists of the catch 22with the spring 21. The catch has extension k, lug c and
cam toe t (fig. 13).By the extension k cocking stopper 18 (fig.16) is kept from and axial
displacement to complete closing of the breech mechanism. Lug c serves for bringing out of the
extension k from the cut d of the stopper 18 of the cocking (fig.10). Cam toe t (fig.13) retains
axis 16 of the repeated cocking from an axial displacement (falling out) (fig.16). Apart from
this, extension k goes into the respective groove of the breechblock and retains the catch 22 from
falling out. Spiral spring 21 of the catch with two projecting ends. One of the ends goes into the
breechblock housing, the other – into the catch opening. When opening of the breech
mechanism, cocking 13 of the striker turns along with the axis 15 of the cocking, on the lever of
which tooth of the right actuating shaft 56 presses on (fig.15).At the same time during the turn
of the left actuating shaft 57 the catch 22 gets free (fig. 16).When the breechblock 68 of the
breech mechanism (fig.15) falls down, under the action of the spring 17 (fig.16) stopper 18 of
the cocking displaces, jumps into the cut of the cocking 13 of the striker and does not allow it to
turn. The striker remains cocked. Extension k of the catch 22, which is under the action of the
spring 21, will jump into the cut d (fig.10) on the stopper 18 of the cocking (fig.16), not
allowing the latter to unlink with the cocking 13 of the striker. In the last moment of closing the
breech mechanism, when the breechblock reaches the upper position, left actuating shaft 57
(fig.15), standing in vertical position, by its tooth presses on the lug c (fig.16) of the catch 22,
turns the catch and brings out the extension k from the cut of the stopper 18 of the cocking,
freeing it. After this it is possible to make a striker detent. This way, safety mechanism allows
making a shot only in case breech mechanism is completely closed.

5. RETAINING MECHANISM

Retaining mechanism is designed for facilitating the loading of the gun, when the fire is
conducted at big angles of barrel elevation. Details of the retaining mechanism are placed in

2-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

the loading through and in the left side of the breech ring. Retaining mechanism consists of
retaining pawl 8 (fig. 14 and 16), retaining pawl axis 6 with the spring 14 and screw 7,
placed inside of the breechblock, as well as cam 44 of the retaining pawl (fig. 15), lever 43,
spring 46, washer 45, and tightening 37, placed in the breech ring. Lever 43 is kept on the
axis by the stopper screw 42, stopped by a washer 41. For softening the strike of the
retaining pawl against the breechblock when opening of the breech mechanism and removal
of the cold-hardening on its bottom surface in the groove of the loading through, rubber
buffer is mounted, consisting of the following details: gaskets 11 of the buffer (fig. 16), stop
10 and plate 9, fixed on the breechblock by screws 19 with spring washers 20. Retaining
pawl 8 is mounted in the loading through on the axis 6. Retaining pawl is squashed up by the
spring 14.

Note: On howitzers of other type retaining pawl is squashed up by the compression spring
with the cap, placed in the breechblock housing.

When opening the breech mechanism, before the expulsion of a case, retaining pawl axis 6
pin e runs over the cam 44 of the retaining pawl (fig. 15). At this time happens the turn of
the cam 44 of the retaining pawl and lever 43, and only after turn of the axis 6 (fig. 16) and
retaining pawl 8. Retaining pawl gets sank in the groove of the breechblock flush with the
loading through, putting no obstacles to the expulsion of the case. When the pin e passes lug
zh (fig. 15) of the cam, the case will be expulsed, and the retaining pawl, when opened
breech mechanism, turned by the spring 14 (fig. 16), again will overflow from the groove of
the loading through. Loading of the howitzer is done as follows: shell is put in the chamber
behind the retaining pawl, in which it sets against by its bottom. After this the shell is sent
additionally into the barrel channel by the rammer, and then the case is sent additionally.
When closing of the breech mechanism pin e of the retaining pawl axis meets again with the
lug zh (fig.15) and turns the cam 44 of the retaining pawl backwards, twisting the spring 46.
Lever 43 steps aside from the cap 16 of the tightening 37, turning along with the cam of the
retaining pawl. When the contact of the pin with the cam is over, lever 43 under the action of
the spring 46 will again come close to the cap 16 of the tightening 37.

6. SEMIAUTOMATIC BREECH MECHANISM

Semiautomatic breech mechanism is placed on the right side of the gun. It is designed for
automatic opening and closing of the breech mechanism. Semiautomatic breech mechanism
consists of opening and closing mechanisms.

a. Opening Mechanism of the semiautomatic breech mechanism is designed for the

automatic opening of the breech mechanism when counter recoil of the barrel. In the
front part of the right side of the breech ring pin 23 is molded and welded (fig. 15), on
which opening lever 2 is fastened by the stop screw 25. On one end of the lever 2 there is
a cam; other end is connected with the closing lever 9 by the rod 8 with the help of axis
11, nuts 10, and screws 12. On the cam axis 45 (fig. 20) by the stop bolt 48 with the nut
46 cam 43 is fixed, which under the action of the spring 39 with the cap 44 is drew in by
its bearing plane to the plank 41, welded to the cradle trunnion.

2-7
 TM01-01-2005-10

b. Closing Mechanism of the semiautomatic breech mechanism is designed for automatic

closing of the breech mechanism after extractors free the breechblock. On the bottom in
the front part of the right side of the breech ring there is housing. Into the housing stop
plunger spindle 3 is inserted (fig. 15) and is stopped by the screw 29. One end of the
plunger has a thread inside, in which regulating nut 4 is screwed in. From the other end
spring cap 7 is inserted, hinged by being connected with the rod 8 of the opening
mechanism. Between the spring cap 7 and nut 4 and washer 5 is inserted for clearing
faults of the spring and unscrewing of the nut when working.

Note: On howitzers of other type there is no washer 5. Regulating nut 4 is stopped by a screw 27
with the split pin 26.

C. Effect of the semiautomatic breech mechanism.

When loading, case flange hits the extractors guide clips, which free the breechblock. Under
the action of the closing spring, spring cap, through the rod 8, turns closing lever 9. The
lever rotates the actuating shafts axis along with actuating shafts. Actuating shafts, acting its
rollers on the surface of the figure grooves of the breechblock, displace the breechblock up.
Lifting of the breechblock is restrained by the stop 52. When recoiling of the barrel, opening
lever lobe 2 runs over the cam 43 (fig. 20), slides along its surface a, and over passing
resistance of the spring 39, turns the cam. As soon as the lobe passes the cam 43, under the
action of the spring 39 with the cap 44 the cam with take its starting position. During the
counter-recoil of the barrel, the lobe of the opening mechanism runs over the plane b of the
cam 43 and slides along its surface. At this time cam upper bearing plane sets against the
plank 41, and the opening lever 2 (fig. 15), turning around its axis, with the help of rod 8
turns closing lever 9, mounted on the hexahedron of the actuating shafts axis. Actuating
shafts, turning along with the axis, will open the breech mechanism.
At the same time with the opening of the breech mechanism takes place compression of the
closing spring 6, in which accumulates energy necessary for closing of the breech
mechanism.

7. BARRIER WITH BLOCKING MECHANISM

Barrier with Blocking Mechanism (fig. 18 and 19) is located on the left of the breech ring,
fixed to the cradle and is a protection for the gun crew during recoil and counter-recoil of the
barrel. Barrier presents a panel 49, along the outer outline of which bent tube 29 is welded.
Removable panel 49 is fixed to the cradle with the help of two brackets 48, 24 and lug 16.
For more harshness of the panel of the barrier to the lower part of the tube 29guide clip 3 is
welded, and bracket 2 – to the breech ring.

Note: On howitzers of other type there are no guide clip 3 and bracket 2.

2-8
 TM01-01-2005-10

On the panel of the barrier mounted details of trigger mechanism and mechanism of detent
blocking, handle 31 of the repeated cocking with rod 41, lever 19 with pin, lever 50 of
resetting the extractor arms, ruler 89 of the recoil indicator with a sliding member 90 and
chart 28 for testing the recuperator. From details of trigger mechanism on the panel of the
barrier mounted handle 30 of manual detent with rod 39, connected with the rod 36 with the
help of the bracket 38 and axis 87. Washer 37, spring 35 are put and nuts 33 and 34 are
screwed on the rod. Other end of the rod 39 is connected with the lever 42 and pressure lever
68. Other details of the trigger mechanism are mounted in the left side of the breech ring.
Handle 30 of the manual detent is put on the welded to the panel axis 56 and fastened there
with the help of washer 55 and split pin 57. For more convenient use, the sphere is screwed
on and stopped by the dowel on the end of the handle. Turn of the handle around its axis is
limited by the cramp 32 welded to the panel. When drawing off the detent handle, rod 39
connected to it by one end draws back with the help of the bracket 38. Rod’s other end is
connected to the lever 42, which turns along with the axis 70 welded to it. Pressure lever 68
is fastened to the axis by a conic dowel 69. End of the lever lifts and presses the detent lever
31 (fig. 7 and 15). Detent lever turns around axis 32 and its end presses on the detent
pressure 35, over passing resistance of the spring 36. Detent pressure 35 weighs on the
cocking stopper 18 (fig. 16), displaces it to the right and frees thereby striker cocking 13.
After freeing handle under the action of the spring 40 (fig. 19) will return in its starting
position and detent pressure 35 (fig. 15) under the action of the spring 36 will take previous
position. Specific feature of the trigger mechanism of howitzer is availability of the detent
blocking, which does not allow to detent the striker with the angle of elevation more than
22°, if the breech ring is placed above one of the trails.

a. Blocking Mechanism consists of lever 45 with roller (fig. 19 and 7), lever with bush 1,
rod 43, cam 20 with slide bar and blocking lever 21. Lever 45 with a roller consists of
levers 4 and 9 fixed on the axis 8: lever 4 is welded to the axis 8, and lever 9fixed on it
by the dowel 72.
Lower end of the lever 4 ends with roller 7, which is fastened on the lever with the help
of axis 6 and dowel 5. Axis 8 is mounted in the brackets of the upper mount. Lever 9
with the help of axis 15, fixed by the split pin 13 with washer 14, and is connected to the
lever 1 with the bush. Lever 1 axis passes through the wall of the upper mount. Second
end of the lever 1 with the help of the axis 12, fixed by a split pin 11 with washer 10, is
connected with rod 43, which in its turn connected with the slide bar of the cam 20.

b. B l o c k i n g g e a r p e r f o r m a n c e. When changing the sector of firing with

quadrant elevation more than 22 degrees, when base cap is placed above the base, the
trigger blocking gear will be enabled. Blocking gear engagement will start from the point
of start of roller 7 to run in along the lug d until its dropping in the collar of the lower
mount. Upon roller dropping in the collar, the crank 45 rotates; its upper arm will turn
the lever 1, which will replace slide bar with cam 20 down using hinge connecting rod
43. Hinge bearing surface a will approach to the blocking lever pin 26 and will prevent
its rotation round the axis pin. In case of pulling of trigger lever while blocking system is
engaged the spring 35 will be compressed until the point of lever to stop at clamp 32;
connecting rod 39 and lever 42 will stay still, but the lever 68 will not transmit power to
the parts of trigger lever and the shot will not occur. When the breech piece is above one

2-9
 TM01-01-2005-10

of the bases, the cam 20 is always in the lower position. Further shooting is only possible
with quadrant elevation of less than 22 degrees. When descending the barrel and cradle
with fence with the blocking pieces ascends and the pin 26 will leave the back plane of
the cam 20 and then the lever 21 can rotate round the axis in case of leading trigger lever
30 away, afterwards the trigger lever mechanism will operate. In case of shooting with
quadrant elevation more than 22 degrees in the direction desired the gun-howitzer should
be rotated using the jack and with breech-piece placed between the bases.

2-10
 TM01-01-2005-10

Chapter III

CRADLE AND COUNTER-RECOIL DEVICES

A. CRADLE

CRADLE (fig.20) is used to guide the barrel within recoil and recuperation modes also for
fixing of counter-recoil device rods. The cradle made of cradle frame with cradle slipper
guides. It has the front lid, trunnion tube, segment, sight bracket and equilibrator bracket.
The П-shaped plate 56 has clinometer plane on its top which is used for fixing of weapon
in horizontal cross level. Horizontal plate 14, right 13 and left 15 cradle slipper guides are
welded to the lower part of the plate. Inside and outside plate stiffening ribs for cradle
rigidity are welded to the plate. In the front part the plate has a lid 77 welded. The lid has
two openings used for fixing of the rods of recoil absorber and run-out speed controller also
two openings for fixing of compensator cylinder and the of compensator valve case. The lid
77 carries the pin76 welded to it and the cap 68 is screwed on the pin (fig.21). In the front
part of the cradle plate the folding jacket 78 (fig.20) is hinged and being kept in closed
position with the bolts 51 carrying spring washers 50. In the front part of the plate there is a
buffer bar welded which carries rubber buffer attached to it with screws 37, nuts32 and
spring washers 33. It absorbs the rigid impact of recoiling parts of the weapon at the end
phase of recuperation. The plate 35 also welded to this bar for purpose of buckling down
arrest of the buffer.

Note. At some models of gun-howitzers the jacket 78 is fixed either with three bolts, or
with one locking device; the later models have two locking devices.

On the right front side of the plate there is a window closed by the lid 55. The window
allows gland compression of recoil absorber and fluid quantity control in the cylinder. On
the left front side of the plate there is a window for cooling of counter-recoil devices closed
by the lid 59. The trunnion tube 28 is an arc-shaped steel casting. On the left side the
trunnion carries welded bracket 4 having upper and lower platforms. A yoke 1 used for
telescopic sight ОП4М-45 installation is attached to the upper platform and the lower
platform has a fork 26 for bar sight Д726-45. The yoke 1 and fork 26 are simultaneously by
four pressed in bolts; the nuts 24 are screwed on the bolts and locked by split pins 21. The
bracket 4 has welded socket bracket 20 for sights lightning. Beside the bracket 4 there is an
axis 65 with ejector claws lever 62 on it; the slots of axis 65 inside the trunnion tube has a
crank 19 having connecting rod 51 (fig.19). The lever 62 (fig.20) is welded to axis 65 and
the crank 19 is fixed on the axis by the nut 17, washer 18 and locked with split pin 16. The
lever 62 returns to initial mode by the spring 67 to the rest 63. On the right side of the
trunnion tube there is welded bracket 7 with welded bush 8 carrying hinged support 12 of
balancing gear secured from turning-through and drop-out with the screw 11. The
balancing gear adjustment is maintained by screwing/unscrewing of a screw 9. The screw is
locked by a nut 10. The trunnion tube has journals on its sides with needle bearings 29
retained by caps 27 screwed in journals and locked with screws 66. The lid has felt rings 30
sealing which fit journal housings of the saddle to prevent needle bearings from dirt. At the
left of trunnion tube bottom there is a bracket welded. It carries segment 69 attached by

3-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

four pressed in bolts 84 with nuts 83 fixed by split pins 82, dowel 68 and two bushes 85
with bolts 70 fixed with wire 71. The semi-automatic cam 43 is placed on cam axis 45,
welded to the right inside of the cradle and retained on the axis by rest bolt 48 with nut 46
and split pin 47. The cam 43 can rotate round the axis 45. Forced by the spring 39 via the
cap 44 placed in the cylinder shaped housing of the trunnion tube, the cam 43 press its
upper plane to the lower cut of the bar 41. The other end of the spring 39 set in the rest 40.
Guiding end of the cam fit the arrester 42 welded to the trunnion tube.

Note. The other models of gun-howitzers have Г-shaped cam 43, the spring and the cap are
placed horizontally, spring compression is adjusted by a screw.

The cradle set and fixed by cap square in the trunnion housing of upper mounting.

B. COUNTER-RECOIL DEVICES

Counter-recoil devices purposed for:

• absorbing of energy of recoiling parts of gun-howitzer, reducing of forces
impacting the mounting and improving gun-howitzer steadiness when
shooting;
• returning (recuperation) of recoiling parts to initial position after shooting and
retaining them as initially regardless any quadrant elevation admissible.

Counter-recoil devices consist of: hydraulic piston type recoil absorber and run-out speed
controller and hydro-pneumatic recuperator. Counter-recoil devices set in the cradle above
barrel.

C. RECOIL ABSORBER

Recoil absorber (fig.21) serve for absorbing of energy of recoiling parts of a gun while
recoiling and recuperating. Recoil absorber consists of cylinder, rod, spindle, gland device
and compensator.

Buffer Cylinder 19 inserted in the right opening of breach piece cylinder (fig.5) until rest
of its collar. The nut 23 (fig.21) is screwed on the cylinder and locked by the bar 63 which
is screwed to the breech piece cylinder by two bolts 62. The bolts tired round with wire 61.
The gland case 16 welded to the front end face of the cylinder; the rear piece of the cylinder
has thread inside purposed screwing back lid 29 in. The inside surface of the cylinder is
polished.
The Recoil Absorber Rod 21 is empty, chromium plated outside. The brass shell 25 put on
the rod head front piece up to its rest to the head collar. Adjusting ring 26 is screwed inside
the head which rest its collar to the brass shell to prevent it from moving. Adjusting ring is
locked with screw 27 which is popped in two points. To let the fluid pass there are six
inclined openings drilled in the rod head. Inside the rod there are three grooves of variable
depth disposed 120 degrees to each other and decreasing to zero at the tail-piece. The

3-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

grooves enable the fluid to pass from behind moderator space during recuperation resulted
in recuperation absorbing. The rod with the shell 25 inserted in the absorber cylinder while
the rod tail-piece come to the cradle-lid opening and fixed in it by the rod nut 38 also the
nut is locked by screw 75 which fixed by locking washer 74. The rod 21 of absorber is
prevented from rotation by locking bar 65 attached to the cradle lid by bolt 64 carrying
spring washer 73. The tail-piece carry connection point 40 screwed in it which have copper
ring sealing 39. The nut 41 with pipe 1 is screwed on the connection point 40 to connect
rod inside cavity with compensator valve. The spindle 24 has variable section. One its
piece is screwed in the rear lid 29 and attached by cone dowel 28 to it. The rear lid with the
spindle screwed in the absorber cylinder 19. There is copper ring sealing 30 set between the
lid and cylinder to maintain leak-proof. On the other side of the spindle there is moderator
jacket 20 fixed, which has eight inclined openings connecting ring cavity between the rod
and spindle with the ring cavity between inner diameter of moderator jacket and front piece
of the spindle. In front the inside cavity of moderator is limited by the moderator valve 32
which placed at the spindle end and compressed by the spring 33. The other piece of the
spring rest to the nut 34 screwed on the front piece of the spindle and locked by split pin
35. Gland Device prevents leakage from the recoil absorber cylinder. It’s assembled in the
gland-box 16 welded to the front end face of cylinder 19 and carry two thrust collars 18,
two intermediate rings 31, three same asbestos rings of staffing-box packing 17 and gland
nut 36 with felt ring 37 and babbitt lining. Intermediate rings 31 placed between the
sections of staffing-box packing, while expanding them; put the packing to outside surface
of the rod and to inside surface of the gland-box tight. Both intermediate rings and thrust
collars have two openings for screwing of eye used to get these rings out while
dismantling. The nut 36 to screw in the gland-box 16 and serve for compression of staffing-
box packing, while its internal surface with babbitt lining serve as rod guide when recoiling
and recuperating. The felt ring 37 placed in the ring channel of the gland nut protect the
gland device from dirt. The compensator provides recoil absorber to work as desired when
gun-howitzer is used within frequent fire. It is placed between recoil absorber cylinders; it
is fixed to the cradle lid by two bolts 71 locked by wire 70. Inside surface of the
compensator cylinder 45 is polished. It has a ring 50 welded to one section with a pipe 53
and a ring 51; the other section of it has a collar with the eyelets 72 and inside thread for
screwing of the pressure nut 44 supplied with oil seal ring 59. The compensator cylinder
45 has a piston which consists of piston body 55, shell 56, collar 47 with under-collar ring
46 and spring 57 compressed to the collar by the nut 60; the nut 60 is locked by locking
ring 58. The collar 47 fit tight to the compensator cylinder inside surface same as to the
piston body. The compensator piston is compressed tight by two springs 48 and 54. There
is a nut 49 set between springs. The rear cut of piston is supplied with spring ring 52. The
pressure nut 44 has a nut 42 with a pipe 69 screwed on it, the other pipe end is welded to
the compensator valve case. Inside the compensator valve 7 cases there is a ball 6 which is
being compressed by the spring 4 via the seat 5 to close central opening in the compensator
valve case. At the rear, the body has a moving plunger 8 with the plunger nut 12. There are
rubber rings 9 between plunger and valve case. The nut 10 locked by locking ring 11
retains plunger 8 within the body 7 preventing its drop-out. The recoil absorber filled with
10.3 L of Steol M fluid.

3-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

Note. The other gun-howitzer models have leather rings 77 installed between the plunger 79
and valve case 78 and compressed by the nut 76. The nut 76 is locked by spring ring 80.

D. RECUPERATOR

Recuperator (fig.22) is hydropneumatic, can be dismantled and used for returning

(recuperation) of recoiling gun-howitzer parts after the shot to the initial position and for
keeping these parts in this position with any quadrant elevation. The recuperator consists of
the following principle parts: outside cylinder, middle cylinder, principle cylinder, rod with
piston and sealing device.
a. The outside Cylinder 15 is closed with rear bottom 29 at its end face, welded to the
cylinder. The rear bottom has an opening for principle cylinder 14 to be screwed in.
In the rear bottom 29 there are two bores (a and б) drilled inside and connected with
the third bore в locked with welding at its exit. The bore a comes to the cylinder
inside cavity through the pipe 50 welded to its rear bottom. The pipe filled with the
fluid provides hydraulic air seal. The valve device consisting of the globe valve 59,
gland casing 60, and leather gasket 61, compressing nut 56 and nut 58. The globe
valve moving along inside thread of the compressing nut 56 until it rest with its cone
end to the shelf to disintegrate the cylinder cavity and bore б. The bore б of the rear
bottom is used for screwing T-joint in. The bores a and б are covered with the caps 55
and 57. The front end face of the outside cylinder 15 has the connecting piece 9 of
cylinder which having an opening for the bush 8, gland casing 44 and thread fitting
the disc 5. The outside cylinder being inserted in the left opening of breech piece
band (fig.5) until it rest with its rear bottom collar. The nut 18 (fig.22) to screw on the
other side of the cylinder is being locked by the locking bar 47, screwed to the
trunnion with two bolts 48. The bolts are locked with wire 49.
b. The middle cylinder 13 has an oval-shaped opening, with branch pipe 39 welded
along its outline. The holder 12 with bushing 8 is welded to the front end face of the
middle cylinder. The holder has four round-shaped openings in its rear piece for
connection of principle and middle cylinder cavities. The bush collar 8 has welded
shell 10 fitting the connecting piece 9 slot of the outside cylinder retaining the middle
cylinder from rotation. The middle cylinder end face has its head 38 welded which
have ring channel fitting the rubber ring 17 which serves as a sealant preventing air
access from the outside cylinder cavity to the middle cylinder cavity.
c. The principle cylinder 14 is inserted into the middle one with the front piece to be
aligned by the holder 12. The principle cylinder is being screwed in the rear bottom
29 of the outside cylinder. To provide leak-proof joint of the principle cylinder there
is a copper sealing ring 37 at the rear bottom. The inside surface of the principle
cylinder is chromium-plated and polished and outside surface is chromium-plated at
the rubber ring 17 section. The lid 31 is screwed in the rear piece of the principle
cylinder. The ring 32 is installed between end-face and the lid 31 of principle
cylinder. The lid 31 is being locked by locking device 54; the cap 35 is winded with
wire and being sealed along with the caps 55 and 57. The copper sealing ring 36 fits
the cap 35 collar. The cap 33 screwed in the lid 31 has an opening covered with the
net 34. The opening allows no obstacle for the air to pass in and out.

3-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

This cap design eliminates vacuum creation behind the piston of principle cylinder
when recoiling, nor any air plug when recuperating.
d. The rod 16 is chromium-plated cylinder-shaped bar with thread on its ends. The rear
piece of the rod has rod head 26 screwed on and locked by cylinder pin 21.The head
has a collar at the middle part and the thread both on front and rear ends. The rod
head has recuperator piston consisting of collars 24, collar rings 20, 22 and 27, two
piston shells 23, nuts 19 and 28 and two spring rings 30. The rod’s front end has a slot
fitting a screw-driver the nut 3 screws on to it. The rod’s front end attached to the
cradle lid with the nut 2 with the pin 1. The nut 3 limits the movement of the rod and
piston powered by pressure inside the recuperator while unscrewing the nut 2.
e. The gland case 44 is a multi-stage cylinder. In the case there is a sealing device
assembled. It consists of two rubber collars 42, two collar rings 41, 43 and the ring
11; all these parts are being retained in the case 44 by locking ring 40. The collars fit
tight to the recuperator rod with their outside surface and to the gland case with their
inside surface. There is gunmetal bush 6 pressed in the gland case for the rod
aligning. The gland device 45 installed in the front neck of casing 44 to protect the
rod and collars from dirt. Upon the gland case installation, the rod 5 with eight bolts 4
evenly placed along rod’s circumference is screwed in the connecting piece 9. Upon
of screwing in the bolts 4, the gland case 44 crimps sealing ring 7. Recuperator is
filled with 9.77 L of “Steol M” fluid and with air (nitrogen) pressurized up to 46 +2
Kg/cm2.

E. OPERATING OF COUNTER-RECOIL DEVICES

In case of recoil. When shot occur, the barrel forced by propellant gases recoils backward
along with recoil absorber cylinder carrying the spindle and recuperator cylinders fixed
within breech piece band.
• The recoil absorber rod and recuperator rod fixed in the cradle lid remain
stationary. The fluid containing in the absorber cylinder between piston and gland
casing (fig.23) passes through six inclined openings in the rod head. When the fluid
has passed these openings, there are two possible ways for it. More fluid will pass
through the ring clearance between adjusting ring and the spindle to the rear part of
recoil absorber cylinder where under pressure occurs. Less fluid will pass between
the spindle and inside rod surface through eight inclined openings then it will reach
moderator cavity and press out moderator valve and fill the rod cavity behind
moderator. The power of recoiling parts being absorbed due hydraulic resistance of
the fluid sprinkled through variable clearance between adjusting ring and the recoil
absorber spindle. The more recoil distance there is the less is ring clearance between
the spindle and adjusting ring decreasing to zero at the end of recoil. Due to this,
smooth recoil absorption is possible.
• Recuperator works simultaneously with the recoil absorber performing as
following: the fluid contained in recuperator principle cylinder between gland
casing and the piston is displaced through the holder opening in the middle
cylinder, then through the opening with branch pipe to the outside cylinder where it

3-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

compress more pressurized air contained in it, thus accumulating the power
necessary for recuperation of gun’s recoiling parts.
• I n case of recuperation. Pressurized air in the recuperator outside cylinder
expanding, press the fluid which transmits pressure to the rod piston and sealing
device inside the gland casing. As the rod and piston are fixed, so due to fluid
pressure on the sealing device, recuperator cylinders along with the barrel and
absorption cylinder will return to the initial position. The fluid containing in the
absorber cylinder behind the piston will flow into the front piece of the cylinder
through variable ring clearance between the spindle and adjusting ring. The
moderator valve will cut moderator cavity due to pressure of valve spring and a part
of fluid which run out behind the moderator space sprinkles only through the
clearances shaped by the grooves of variable depth between inside rod surface and
the moderator jacket outside surface. Fluid resistance to being sprinkled through
variable clearance between the rod and moderator jacket enables recuperation
absorption. Recuperation smoothness becomes possible due to the grooves
decreasing to zero at the end of recuperation.
• When shooting frequently the fluid temperature will rise, considerably increasing
fluid value. It may result in barrel failure to run out. To avoid this, the recuperation
absorber supplied with compensator which reserve excess fluid. The compensator
work as following: 9-11mm prior to the end of recuperation the gland casing collar
will press the nut 12 (fig.21) and move the plunger forward; the latter presses out
the ball to open ring opening in the valve case. Excess fluid from the cavity behind
the moderator will be displaced to the compensator cylinder through the opening in
the valve casing and connecting hoses while pressing the compensator piston which
is pressed by springs.
• After each shot more fluid temperature will be, more excessive fluid will fill the
compensator reservoir. At the recoil beginning (9-11mm) the fluid quantity
displaced from compensator to the space behind the moderator will be insufficient.
If recoil distance is more than 9-11mm, the plunger and the ball will move back
under spring’s pressure resulted in disintegration of the compensator cavity and the
space behind the moderator of recoil. When shooting slower and fluid in the recoil
cylinder cooling down, filling up the fluid in recoil absorber to run out from
compensator. The compensator piston suffering constant spring pressure will
displace the fluid excess back to the space behind the moderator, then to the recoil
absorber cylinder.

3-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

Chapter IV

SADDLE, LAYING MECHANISMS, EQUILIBRATOR, RUNNING GEAR, WEELS

ELEVATION MECHANISM AND SHIELD

A. SADDLE

The saddle (fig.24 and 25) is the base of swinging part of gun-howitzer. There are cradle,
elevating, rotation mechanisms, equilibrator and shield. The saddle is cast; it rests on
saddle support and connected with it by bushing enabling horizontally rotation. It is
protected by clasp from being capsized while shooting. At the front piece of the saddle
there are trunnion housing for cradle trunnions closed by the clamps 8 fixed on cotter-
pins 10 with nuts 11. The cotter-pins are welded and nuts are locked by split-pins. The
left shelf of the saddle’s wall has a welded side-piece 37 to fix elevator mechanism
housing on. The side-piece 37 has an eccentric bushing 4 adjusting pinion mesh of
elevator and cradle arc.

Note. The other models of gun-howitzers have no eccentric bushing 4.

To the left beside the saddle base the rotation mechanism housing is fixed. In the middle
beside the base in the left and right saddle walls there are branch pipes for fixing of
running part axis. The right branch pipe has welded half-coupling 50 always meshing
with wheels elevation connecting piece. In the saddle’s front piece there are two cylinder
shaped lugs with vertical openings carrying two hollow metal sleeves 31. The lug
openings carry ball-bearing races 33 with rollers 25 and disc-springs 30.

Note. Some other models of gun-howitzer have only two front rollers.

In the saddle’s rear piece the third roller is placed. The saddle has welded boss 69
carrying a bracket 17 with the roller which is fixed by four bolts 55 locked with wire 54.
When the gun is rotated horizontally, two front rollers accept the load of overweight of
the rotating part with quadrant elevation up to 50 degrees and the rear roller accept the
load of overweight of the rotating part with quadrant elevation from 50-70 degrees. Thus
the rollers while rotating the upper end-face of saddle-support make steering gear work
easily. Spring nuts 1 adjust the clearance between the bearing surface of the saddle and
saddle-support. Upon adjustment of clearance between the bearing surface of the saddle
and saddle-support the spring nuts should be locked by the rings 32. The brackets 41 and
43 also pins 38 and 51 serve for shield mounting. The left wall of the base above the
branch pipe for fixing of running part has the locking device 7 welded. It carries lock 14
with a spring. The other piece of locking device carries a tag 13 locked by a pin 15; the
other piece of the locking device reaches the inside cavity of the saddle and prevent the
barrel position from quadrant elevation more than 30 degrees while the trials are met
together. When the quadrant elevation equals 30 degrees, the bolt head 84 (fig.20) rests
its edge г to the lock’s end 14 (fig.25). Upon wheels elevating the tag 13 rotates
counterclockwise and the lock 14 recesses flush with the inside left plane of the saddle.
The boss and two mounts a are used for fixing of parts blocking.

4-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

At the right front wall of the saddle the mount 49 is welded purposed for wheels elevation
mechanism with equilibrator. The mount has two trunnion housing for wheels elevation
mechanism arm, closed with caps 47 and 48 fixed by screws 46. The screws are fixed by
wire. The saddle with the help of casing 7 (fig.37), bush 18, pipe 17 and nut 13 adjusted
with the saddle support in a way that small clearance between bearing surfaces exists.
Such a clearance is provided by degree of compression of the disc-springs 30 and 58
(fig.25) of rollers. When the shot occur, the disc-springs will compress clearance slack
and the bearing surface of the saddle lay to the bearing surface of saddle support.

Note. The other gun-howitzer models linking of the saddle with saddle support is as following:
central opening of the saddle has a welded bush with inside thread where the nut 83 screwed in
purposed for preliminary adjusting of clearance between the saddle and saddle support. Final
adjusting is maintained by the nut 79.

The rear jacket 23 and right side jacket 45 attached to the saddle base to prevent the
worm ring of rotation mechanism from dirt. There are rubber gaskets between the jacket
and saddle. At the bottom the jacket is closed with bars 40 and 71, screwed with screws
73. The rubber gaskets 72 and 39 are installed between the bars and the jacket.

Note. The rear jacket 23 of the other gun-howitzer models has additional fastening consisting of
the locking bar 86 and two screws 22 with spring washers.

At the front piece of the saddle base there is a window closed with the lid 76 for greasing
the pins of hinges of moving trial.

B. ELEVATING GEAR

The elevating gear (fig. 26 and 27) is used for turning howitzer’s barrel the total
elevation from –7 to +70 degrees. The elevation mechanism is of segment type. It
consists of housing, shaft with pinion, worm shaft and drive.

1. The housing 66 with the lid 67 form a box were the shaft 60 with pinion, the
worm wheel 62 and the worm shaft 20 are assembled. The housing is attached to a
saddle bracket with the bolts 1 and 63 nuts 65 and spring washers 64. The shaft 60
with pinion installed in housing laying on two cone roller bearings 58 and 69.
Bearings compression is maintained by the lid 70. The shaft with pinion meets
mesh with cradle arc. There is a worm wheel 62 on the shaft slots secured with
the nut 68.

2. Worm wheel 62 consists of the hub 56 and brass band 54 fixed with the cylinder
shaped pins 55.

3. Worm shaft 20 is installed in housing 66; with its front piece the shaft match the
brass bush 21, rear piece via the brass bush 15 rest to guiding bush 13. It has also
two thrust bearings 2 and 3 fixed with the help of the bush 14 and the nut 6 on its
rear piece. The nut 6 is locked with a screw 5; the worm shaft has linked with the
shaft 23 of the drive with the spider 9.

4-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

4. Elevating gear drive consists of a pair of cone pinions placed on the ball
bearings inside the guiding casing 37; the shaft with pinion 32 and flywheel 43
with lever; the drive assembled with the elevating gear to the housing by the bolts
11 with nuts 4. The cone pinion 27 assembled with the shaft by key 48 and nut 30
with washer 28; the nut 30 is fixed with the split pin 29, the shaft 23 assembled on
ball bearings 7 and 49. To avoid the ball bearings’ axial shift, there is a bush 50.
The shaft with pinion 32 assembled with ball bearings 34 and 47 inside the casing
36 and fixed with nut 45. The casing 36 is screwed inside the drive box 37 and
locked by the bolt 72 with locking washer 73 after adjusting of cone pinions
mesh. The flywheel 43 with the drive lever assembled with the tail piece of the
shaft 32 with key 40, the nut 41 and split pin 42.

5. Elevating gear performance. Elevating gear flywheel rotation being transmitted

by the cone pair and the spider 9 to the worm shaft 20; from the worm shaft to the
worm wheel 62; the shaft 60 with the pinion meshes with the cradle arc and forces
the cradle to rotate around the trunnions. When the flywheel rotates
counterclockwise, the barrel will descend and it will ascend when rotating
clockwise.

Note: When the system wheeled and the trials are met together it is strictly prohibited to place
the barrel with quadrant elevation more than 30 degrees.

C. STEERING GEAR

Steering gear (figs.28, 29 and 30) purposed for aiming gun-howitzer in horizontal plane
and provides rotating part to turn to 360 degrees angle. Steering gear consists of housing,
eccentric shaft, worm shaft and drive with flywheel.

1. Housing 64 (fig.28 and 29) needed for fixing of rotating mechanism on the
saddle. The housing assembled with the saddle by two dowels 7, two bolts 9 and
the bolt 4. Inside the housing there is an eccentric shaft 63 installed. The housing
has a gasket adhered to it for dust and moisture access protection.

2. The eccentric shaft 63 purposed for disengaging of rotating mechanism when

gun-howitzer rotating part should be turned on considerable angle, also for
disengaging of worm of rotating mechanism from the worm ring of saddle support
when the howitzer is to be transformed in travelling position. It has also a welded
pipe 49, which rear piece has the drive with flywheel fixed on. The eccentric shaft
installed in the front piece of the housing 64. The eccentric shaft rests with its lug
on the front piece in the housing lug; the projectile groove in eccentric shaft rear
piece has two shells 56 retained from drop-out with the lid 55; the lid attached to
eccentric shaft by screws 53 with spring washers 54. When in firing position
worm is meshed with worm ring of saddle support, the eccentric shaft is retained
by the lever 12, the catch 77 fitting the bracket slot 83. The bracket attached to the
drive casing with the bolts 79 locked by wire 78. The lever fixed to the pipe 49
with the bolt 85, nut 76, split pin 86 and locked with screw 84 on it. The screw
locked with the wire. The pipe 49 can easily rotate inside the connecting piece 45.

4-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

The upper piece of the drive casing fixed on the mount 74 by axis 89 with washer
88 and split pin 87. To transform the worm from firing to travelling position it
needed to press the lever ball 17 down then turn the lever left along bracket arc
until the catch enter lower piece of the mount, now the worm will escape the mesh
with saddle support worm ring. While transforming the worm from firing to
travelling position the steering gear drive react to reciprocating vertical movement
and swinging relating to axis 89.

3. Worm shaft assembled inside eccentric shaft 63 and consist of a worm 61 and a
shaft 60 installed in needle bearings 57. Its front piece has thrust ball bearing 67
fixed by nut 2. The worm shaft connected with the shaft 11 by the spider 52.

4. Steering gear drive has a casing cylinder shaped pinion and the flywheel. The
drive casing is formed by two sidepieces 19, attached to each other with dowels
28 and bolts 30 with nuts 26; the sidepieces are actually the jackets 80. The front
piece has welded connected piece 45. By means of the connected piece, half-rings
48 and nut 47 the drive assembled on the pipe 49; the nut 47 is locked by locking
ring 46. The flywheel 36 with lever and using key assembled on the driving shaft-
pinion 22, which rests on the needle roller bearings 23. Intermediate pinion 40
assembled on the axis 39. Driven pinion 44 assembled on the axis 43. The pinion
axis is assembled in the brass bushes 18, pressed in the openings of the sidepieces
19. Each axis has inside openings for grease delivery to the bushes. The grease is
delivered to the needle roller bearing 57 and bush 18 through the grease nipple 10;
same grease nipples are screwed in the driven pinions axis. The worm is greased
through the window closed with the lid 5.

5. Steering gear performance. Flywheel 36 with the lever rotation is transmitted

via driven pinions to the shaft 11, from the shaft to the spider 52, then to the shaft
60 with worm 61. Rotating worm being engaged with the worm ring of the saddle
support, force the howitzer steering part to rotate. While the steering gear
flywheel rotates clockwise, the howitzer’s steering part will rotate to the right, if
the steering gear flywheel rotates counterclockwise, the howitzer’s steering part
will rotate to the left. When on the jack it is prohibited to rotate the steering gear
flywheel with the trials together or set apart. If it needed to turn the howitzer
barrel to the considerable angle in horizontal plane quickly, it is required to turn
the lever from firing position to traveling position and to turn the barrel manually
as necessary, then engage the worm smoothly to the worm ring of saddle support
to provide mesh by pressing the lever ball then turn it smoothly in firing position
unless the lock will match the bracket slot. In fig.30 there is different version of
the steering gear of the different gun-howitzer models. The principle
characteristic feature of such a gear is no switching device from firing to
travelling position and vice versa. The steering gear guiding pinion 22 connected
with the flywheel axis 21 with the key 31; the axis rotates on the bushing 20. If it
needed to turn the howitzer barrel to the considerable angle in horizontal plane
quickly, it is required to turn the locking device 23, turn eccentric shaft 56 to the
left behind the drive casing then turn the howitzer barrel to the required direction;
then engage the worm smoothly to the worm ring of saddle support and lock the
drive with the locking device 23.

4-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

D. EQUILIBRATOR

Equilibrator (fig.31) is of pneumatic propelling type serve for balance of the howitzer
swinging part in relating the trunnion axis, reduces the load of elevating gear and wheels
elevator mechanism. Equilibrator consists of outside and inside cylinders, the valve and
sealing devices.

1. Outside cylinder 5 of welded construction has the upper lid 2 welded in the
upper piece of it. The other piece has welded in casing 12 with the pressed in
guiding bush 11 locked with the pin. Outside surface of the cylinder carries the
valve body 37 welded to it.

2. Sealing device assembled in the casing 12 consist of the ring 14, two packing
rings 16, two sealing rings 13, spring ring 15, the nut 25 with guiding bush 26 and
felt ring 17. It’s important not to forget that the felt ring 17 is not purposed to
clean dried dirt from outside surface of the inside cylinder 8, so it is necessary to
eliminate dirt from inside cylinder with wooden shovel and wipe the surface with
cloth prior starting the elevating gear to operate. The nut 25 has two through
openings for clamp maintaining (part 42-22), placed in ЗИП.

3. Inside cylinder 8 is chromium plated outside. It fits the outside cylinder and
while moving inside along its axis serves as a piston. The lower piece of the
inside cylinder has a bottom 21 with ball and socket bearing. Inside cylinder
cavity has a spring 10 fitted the rod 4. The rod upper piece has a ring 9 put on it to
eliminate dents caused by the spring at the nut 7 end face. The spring will
compress and will rotate along with the ring around the nut 7 with quadrant
elevations more than 45 degrees. The rod 4 lower piece has two half rings 27
welded and holding hollow metal cylinder 20. Such a design lets hollow metal
cylinder to enter the rod when adjusting screw have been screwed in completely
with depression angle is –7 degrees. The rod 4 upper piece linked with ball socket
bearing 1 by axis 3. The ball socket bearing 1 with sealing ring 29 screwed in the
outside cylinder lid. In the upper piece of the inside cylinder the nut 7 is screwed
in serving as spring 10 bearing.

4. Valve device assembled in the valve casing and consist of the valve 32, pressure
nut 33, lock nut 34, two rings 35 and four leather bushes 36. The valve 32 is
screwed in pressure nut 33 inside thread and with its cone shaped piece closes the
bore which connects T-joint housing and the cylinder inside cavity. Equilibrator is
retained from rotation by the axis 31 with the split pin 30; the same axis arrest the
outside cylinder ball socket bearing from dropping out in case of pressure failure
in equilibrator. For air-tightening of the sealant device, the outside cylinder is
filled with the mixture of 0.45 L of “Steol M” and graphite – 20-30 gm. Upon
assembling completion, the equilibrator is filled with air or nitrogen. Air
(nitrogen) is pumped by air-hydraulic pump or delivered from the balloon using
valve device equipped with T-joint Сб42-25 and pressure meter. While pumping
air (nitrogen) in, it is required to set the equilibrator “on clamp” mode. Using this
mode the pressure in the equilibrator should be reached to 100 Kg/cm2.

4-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

The screw 9 (fig.20) displacing the moving bearer serves for adjusting of
equilibrator pressure when outside temperature changes. While screwing
(unscrewing) the bearer’s screw, pressure in the cylinder will increase or fall
down respectively. Such adjustment will provide regular pressure in the
equilibrator within outside air temperature fluctuation of more than +-14 degrees
Celsius.

E. RUNNING GEAR

Running gear (fig.32 and 33) equipped with torsion type cushioning assembled on
branch pipes of the saddle. It consists of running axis, two levers, two torsion rollers and
wheels. Running axis 7 is a kind of tube with slots for installing of heads of torsion
rollers 5 at its middle wider piece. The running axis has a toothed ring meshing with
wheel elevator’ connecting piece while in acting or travelling position. Beside the toothed
ring there are left 32 and right 35welded brackets used for installing of the wheel
elevation lever; the brackets 32 and 35 are fixed to each other with bracing 37. Each
piece of the running axis has a neck for brass bushing 2 and lugs for bearing fixing.

1. The cranks 16 and 19 of welded built. Each crank have crank casing 17, hollow
metal cylinder 12 and hollow pin 15; the cranks carry the tubes 26 welded to them
which serve for wheels elevation while transforming gun-howitzer from travelling
to firing position and vice versa. The hollow metal cylinders 12 have slots for
installation of the heads of torsion rollers 5. The hollow metal cylinders end faces
have the lids 1 screwed by two bolts 13 to them for prevention the torsion rollers
from displacing; the bolts 13 are tightened with wire 14. Beside the cranks in the
running axis slots there are the levers 18 and 20 performing as steel casting with
welded lining. The levers carry upper 29 and lower 31 rubber buffers with the
bolts 27. From axis displacement the right lever is secured with split bearing 4,
left lever is secured with split bearing 11. The guiding axis installed in the saddle
branch pipe and is retained from axial displacing by toothed ring on the right
piece and by split bearings 11 and 21 connected with five bolts 22 with nuts 25
and split pins 24 on the left piece. To prevent scoring on the guide axis necks
when transforming the system from travelling position to firing and vice versa,
the brass bushing 6 and 8 are inserted in the saddle branch pipes. The bushes 6
and 8 are greased through the grease nipples 3.

2. Running gear performance cushioning of gun-howitzer is maintained with its

torsion rollers 5. When a wheel has driven an obstacle the torsion rollers wind and
absorb an impact. To prevent the torsion rollers from being destroyed in case of
strong thrust, the angle of their winding is limited by the levers 18 and 20
assembled on the guiding axis slots. Rubber buffers absorb the crank thrusts on
the levers. When the wheels are elevated while in firing position, the torsion
rollers are unloaded and do not work.

3. The wheels (fig.34) for gun-howitzer D-30 fit the lorry truck ZIL-150 with there
ГК 9.00-20. The left wheel is different from right one in following: the right
wheel hub links with the wheel disc by the cotter-pins 2 and 3 with right-handed
thread, the left wheel hub - by the cotter-pins 6 and 7 with left- handed thread.

4-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

The wheels apart from hubs are interchangeable. There are two coned roller
bearings 14 and 1 inside the hub 17. From outside the hub is closed by the nut 16
of gland with the sealing ring 15, protecting roller bearing 14 from dirt. The nut
16 is secured from self-winding by the bolt 22 with locking washer 21. The hub is
closed from outside by the lid 11 with gasket 20 which are fixed by the bolts 19.
The bolts 19 are locked by wire 18. The wheel put on the crank pin and fastened
by the nut 9 with washer 8; the nut 9 is locked by the split-pin 10.

F. WHEELS ELEVATING GEAR

Wheels elevating mechanism (fig.35) serve for wheels elevation in firing position and
returning them in travelling position. Wheels elevation is maintained by the power of
equilibrator. Wheels elevation mechanism consists of supporting lever, connecting rod,
connecting piece and lever.

1. Supporting lever consists of supporting lever 12 and lever 15; the brass sphere
13 is pressed in the lever housing 12. The bottom piece of supporting lever 12 has
a rest р securing rotation of supporting lever forced by equilibrator in case of axis
33 cutting off (fig.32). Supporting lever 12 (fig.35) is installed with its trunnion in
the saddle bracket 49 (fig.25) and covered by the caps 47 and 48.

2. Connecting lever 17 (fig.35) connect supporting lever and guiding axis.

3. The connecting rod 17 is linked by one piece to the lever 15 with the axis 16; the
axis 16 is fixed in the lever 15 lifting lugs by the nut 11 with the washer 26 and
split pin 10. The other piece the connecting rod 17 is fixed on the axis 33 by the
nut 20 (fig.32) welded to the left bracket of the guiding axis; the nut 20 is locked
by the split pin 19.

4. The connecting piece 29 provides rigidity of link of the guiding axis with the
saddle when howitzer is in the travelling position and securing of the guiding axis
with the wheels elevated when in firing position. The connecting piece 29 is in
mesh with the saddle toothed half-coupling all the time; in firing position the
connecting piece 29 is in mesh with the toothed ring of the guiding axis and
locked by the locking device 4. On the outside surface of the connecting piece 29
there is ball-retaining groove for the guiding pieces 21 welded to the lever fork.
The handle consists of fork 22, rod 24, pipe1 and lever 28. The rod 24 and the
pipe 1 hinged to each other with the axis 25; in firing position the lever 28
interlock the hinge making the handle rigid.

5. The handle is fixed on the guiding axis brackets by the fork 22, bolt 18, nut 30
and split pin 31. Rotation of the guiding axis while the wheels are elevated is
limited by the arrester 8 to stop at the rest 32. The rest 32 welded to the saddle pin
51 (fig.25); when the wheels are descended, the handle meets its rib 23 (fig.35) to
the same pin. In the firing position the handle rests in the U-shaped bracket 3
welded to the shield bar, in the travelling position – in the U-shaped bracket 2
welded to the shield.

4-7
 TM01-01-2005-10

6. Performance of the wheels elevating mechanism.

For elevation of the wheels from the travelling position to the firing position it is
required to elevate the gun-howitzer with the jack, to set the trials apart until they
stop at the tyres, to take the wheels elevation mechanism handle out of the U-
shaped bracket 2, to switch the lock device 4 off and to displace the connecting
piece 29 from the guiding axis toothed ring. The equilibrator while balancing the
wheels’ weight, impacts the guiding axis via the levers 12, 15 and connecting rod
17. For friction overcoming it is required to rotate the guiding axis by the wheels
elevation mechanism handle, supporting the wheels by the crank levers all at
once. After the wheels elevation it is necessary to engage the bushing 29 in mesh
with the guiding axis toothed ring and lock it by the locker 4; after this to spread
the trials then put the gun-howitzer on the ground. When changing the wheels
position from firing to travelling one, it’s necessary to lift the gun-howitzer with
the jack, get the trials together with the angle allowing the wheels to reach the
ground with no obstacle then to switch the locker 4 off and displace the
connecting piece 29 from the guiding axis toothed ring. The wheels’ weight will
be balanced again by the air pressure in equilibrator; for wheels descending it’s
needed to turn the guiding axis by the wheels elevation mechanism handle
pressing the crank levers all at once. After the handle rests its rib 23 to the saddle
pin, it’s necessary to mesh the connecting piece 29 with the guiding axis toothed
ring and lock it by the locker 4; then to put the gun-howitzer on the ground and
get the trials together
G. SHIELD

The shield’s function (fig.36) is to cover the gun crew and gun parts from destroying by
bullets, shell and mine fragments in combat also from the gun wave while shooting. The
shield consists of the left 1 and the right 6 pieces and the lower panel 14. The right and
left shield pieces maintained are set with the 35 degrees angle in relation to vertical plane
and linked with the lower panel by the special hinges. Besides, each shield half has
attached to the saddle by the bars. The right and left shield pieces form the cut space for
the swinging part of the gun-howitzer.

1. In the left shield piece there are the cut for the panoramic sight Д726-45 and the
window for the direct laying sight ОП4M-45. When traveling, the panoramic cut
is closed by the lid 2 and the sight ОП4M-45 window – by the lid 3. The lids 2
and 3 are retained in opened position by the lockers 31. Below the cut and the
window there is the axis 37 fixed by the socket 36 and the dowel 35; the catch 29
for the left bar 25 link is assembled with the axis 37. The other piece of the bar is
put on the pin welded to the saddle; this piece fastened by nut 23, washer 24 and
split-pin 22.

2. The right shield piece has the box 7 for piasaba brush. The box is fixed to the
shield by two bolts 30 and 34 with nut 33 and split-pin 32. The shield right piece
has the catch 29 on the axis 5 for the right bar 9 linking; the bar’s other piece is
fixed on the saddle pin. The lower panel 14 is attached to the saddle brackets by
bolts 13 with nuts 27 and split-pins 28. On the lower panel left piece there is the
battery pocket 15 fixed by bolts 40, nuts 39 and split-pins 38.

4-8
 TM01-01-2005-10

On the left of the upper shearing of the lower panel there are two left-drive hinges
19 and 20 riveted; on the right side – two right-drive hinges 11 and 12 carrying
left and right parts of the shield. Each shield corner is covered with the brackets
16 which protect the cover from attrition while travelling; the brackets attached to
the shield by the lining 17 with rivets. The shield left piece has the power cable
box attached.

3. Shield dismantling. The shield right and left pieces are easy to take away. For
this purpose it is necessary to pull the catch lever 29, to disengage the locking
device mesh, to turn the catch clockwise, to release the bar and lock the catch
again; to turn unlocked piece of the shield pulling on 30 degrees approximately
and to take it off the lower panel hinges. The same order is for the other piece
dismantling. For the lower panel dismantling, it needed to loosen the nuts 27 by
the spanner A52830-5 and to take out the bolts 13. To dismantle the bars 9 and 25
it needed to loosen the nuts 23 by the spanner A52830-6; after dismantling the
bars, to screw the nuts back on each axis. It is required to dismantle the shield
with the barrel quadrant elevation of 30-35 degrees.

4-9
 TM01-01-2005-10
Chapter V

SADDLE SUPPORT, TRAILS, JACK

AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. SADDLE SUPPORT

The saddle support is the rotating piece of the gun-howitzer. The saddle
support branch pipe has the base plate welded; the two other bases are attached
by hinges to it. The saddle support consists of the upper 20 (fig.37) and lower
21 pieces and worm ring 29 welded to each other, pipe 17, bushing 18, nut 13
and two locking devices 25 with pedals 24.

1. The worm ring provides rotation of the gun-howitzer’s saddle. The

upper horizontal planed shearing of the ring serves as a bearing surface
for the saddle when shooting; the saddle bearing rollers rotate on the
same surface when the rotating mechanism works. The ring 29 lower
piece has a collar with three lugs д, placed in a way that upon
transforming the gun-howitzer in firing position, the trails will be under
the lugs. The blocking mechanism works when the blocking mechanism
roller meets the lug д to make it impossible to shoot with the barrel’s
quadrant elevations more than 22 degrees and when the breech piece is
above one of the trials.

2. The bushing 18 is locked by the latch in the central branch-pipe of the

upper piece 20 of the saddle support. It is retained from rotation by the
locking bar 2. The inside surface of bush 18 has ringed lug where the
lower piece of the pipe 17 rests with its collar. The pipe is retained from
rotation in the bush 18 by two wedge prism keys 19. The bracket 7
match in the branch-pipe of the saddle and attached to the saddle by
three bolts 6 with spring washers 5.

3. The pipe 17 has ring15 and washer 16 on, which spring-loaded to the
bracket by the nut 13 with rubber ring 14. The nut 13 is fixed by locking
washer 8 which has the slots meshing with the pipe 10 slots.

4. The central branch-pipe of the saddle support lower piece 21 the jack
has been installed; two branch-pipes with the cone-shaped pinions of the
jack handles are derived with 70 degree angle from the central branch-
pipe.

5. The saddle support has two vertical planned through openings fitting,
for hinge rods used for fixing of the movable trails to the saddle support.
There are two locking devices 25 with springs 33 inserted into the
casings 23 welded to the upper piece of the saddle support used for
fixing of the moving trails in firing position; the locking device’ lower
piece is connected with the pedal 24 by axis 36, cross-member 35 and
two shackles 22. The pedal’s one piece is fixed by axis 32 on the post 31
welded to the saddle support, the other piece has welded bar allowing to
push the pedal by foot.

5-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

B. TRAILS

The gun-howitzer has three trails: one stationary 24 (fig.38) and two moving
ones – left 29 and right 51. Left and right trails have hinge link with the saddle
base and the stationary trail is welded to it. In firing positions moving trials are
spread with 120 degree angle regarding the stationary one and fixed with locking.
In traveling position moving trials are adjusted to the stationary one and fixed
with the tightening device on it; the stationary trail is connected with the barrel’s
muzzle by special frame. Each trial consists of plate casing 1 reinforced by
corners inside and outside; the trail carriage part has the plateau 41 to rest on the
ground, the front piece of moving trails have welded hinged parts 20 and 52 used
for connection with the saddle support. Inside the plateau 41 and facing 38 there
are openings with three slots for spikes 5 to hit in the ground; in the ground
position the spikes are locked by locking devices 10 (fig.39). The rests 36 (fig.38)
are used for spikes easing from the ground. In traveling position the spikes are
fastened to the trails by holders 6 and buffers 15. Each trail plate casing carriage
section is covered by the lid 10 fixed to the upper plate 65 of plate casing by
screws with nuts locked by wire 13. There are two brackets 15 (fig.40) with
pressed in bushes 18 carrying frame 8 fixed by bolts 14, nuts 17 and split-pins 16
welded to the carriage of the stationary trial (fig.38). In the frame upper piece
there is a lug 11 fixed in lifting lugs (fig.40) and screw 3 with nut 4. The frame
and lug in the point of their touching with the barrel have gaskets 12 attached by
screws 13. While in traveling position the barrel is placed on the frame and fixed
there by lug 11 and screw 3 with nut 4; the nut 4 is secured from self-winding by
locker 5 which casing is welded to the lug. In firing position the frame 8 (pos.38)
is placed on the trial and fixed by locker 30. The stationary trail 24 has welded
reflector 19 for sabot protection while pulling the howitzer by a truck. The
tightening device consists of connecting rod 27, lever 2 locking bar 3 stops 45 and
59 also axis 63 and 60 with nuts 62 and split-pins 61. When the trails are set
together, connecting rod 27 is put over the stop 59, when the trials are set apart; it
is put over the stop 45. The hinges 20 and 52 of the moving trials are connected
with the saddle base by the hinge pins 55. The rods are retained from dropping-
out by bolts 57, from rotation – by the dowels 56. The bolts 57 are locked by the
screws 58. Hinge greasing is provided through the grease nipples 54 and bores an
in hinge pins. Hinge parts have the lugs б with openings fit for the locks 25
(fig.37) in case of firing position for the trails. The devices for entrenching tools
and equipment are welded to the trails. The stationed trail has two welded stops
22 (fig.38) and two holders 26 for attaching of the bar, also the stops 39 and 49
with two holders 48 for attaching the aiming post. The right trail has two welded
brackets 17 and two holders 16 for attaching the crowbar, the stop 43 and two
holders 13 and 12 for attaching the sledge-hammer and the stops 44 and 47 with
the holder 70 for attaching the rammer; besides this the right trial has welded post
50 for installation of the hydro-pneumatic pump and the bar 18 with the
howitzer’s center of gravity indicator for traveling position.

5-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

Note. The other gun-howitzer models have no bar 18 with the center of gravity
indicator. For these models to determine the center of gravity it is required to make a
dash with red paint on the right trial 637 mm from the axis of the hinge pin 55.

The left trial has two welded holders 13, 12 and the stop 43 for attaching the
sledge-hammer, also to stops 25, to stops 31 and two holders 28 for attaching of
two shovels.

C. JACK

The jack (fig.41, 42 and 44) is used for elevating and descending of the gun-
howitzer when transforming it from traveling position to firing and vice versa.
The jack is placed in the central opening of the saddle support. The jack principle
parts are: base disc, two screws, two cone-shaped pinions, housing with pinion,
thrust ball-bearing, two needle roller bearings, lid and two folding handles.

6. Base disc are of welded construction consists of: 65, ring 64, eight upper
ribs 66, eight lower ribs 63 and boss 91. Besides the base disc carries pivot
bearing 62, nut 81 with the sealing ring 85, which is screwed in the ring
64, bush 82, washer 86, sealing ring 84, locking bar 89, two locking
screws 90 and grease nozzle 56. The base disc is hinged with the axis 83
by the screw 30 through the openings of pivot bearing 62 and screw 30.
For the purpose of improvement of balance when the jack works, the base
disc has round shape and can swing on the axis only in one plane along
stationary trial. The base disc design allows rotation of the gun elevated
with the jack to any direction within 360 degrees angle.

7. The screw 30 on its outside surface has one way groove where the balls
can roll when jack is operated. The arrester 35 is put on the top of the
screw, retained by two keys 31. The keys are closed by the casing 34 put
on the arrester and fixed on it by the nut 33 with locking ring 32. The
upper screw piece is aligned in the saddle support pipe by the nut 33, the
lower – by the balls and bush 60 pressed in the screw 46. The screw is
retained from rotation by the keys and slot link of the arrester 35 with the
saddle support rod. The lid 53 with sealing rings 52, 61 and the gaskets 68
is fastened to the saddle support by four bolts 69.

Note. The lid 53 during howitzers production has been issued with three different
model numbers 15-59A, 15-98 and 15-150. The lids are non-interchangeable.

The bolts are locked with wire 67. The lower screw piece is hinged with
the base disc 65 by axis 83. The screw 46 on its inside surface has one
way groove (about two windings), which is limited by reflectors. The
entrance and exit of the groove have ejection openings to outside screw

5-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

surface; the ejection openings are linked to each other by the groove on
outside surface. The bush 47 retains balls from dropping-out from outside
groove. Filling inside and outside grooves the balls form continuous chain
and while rotating screw 46 roll over from inside to outside groove guided
by reflectors, and from outside back to inside groove. The screw 30 is
displaced in an axial direction. Outside surface of the screw 46 has two
winded sphere-shaped grooves intercepted by bushing 36 at the screw
upper cutting. The bushes 28 and 60 pressed in the screw 46 serve as a
guide for screw 30. Housing 43 has two spiral sphere-shaped grooves on
its inside surface which are limited by reflectors and making ¾ turn. The
beginning and the end of each groove have ejecting openings guiding to
the housing outside surface; the housing outside surface has the grooves
connecting the openings. The bush closed by two dowels 27 and 42
installed beside the upper cut inside housing. The outside bush 42 surface
has two sphere shaped spiral cam toes. The screw 46 is winding in the
housing forming two spiral grooves which are filled with balls 45; the
balls are retained from dropping-out of outside grooves by bushing 44.
The spiral groove space between the screws 30 - 46 and between screw 46
- housing can be loaded with 126 balls (50 and 76 balls respectively) The
bushing 48 pressed in the housing 43 serves as guiding for the screw
46.The outside collar of the housing 43 lower piece, toothed ring 49 is
fixed by six dowels 50. The housing assembled in needle bearings
carrying the rollers 51 and outside rings 41 and 54; cylinder-shaped
housing pieces perform as bearings inside rings. The housing upper end-
face stops to rest ball bearing 38 by means of the washer 39. The lower
end-face is supported by the lid 53 by means of the gasket 70 and ring 54.

3. Cone-shaped pinions 22 and 100 mesh with toothed ring 49 and rotate
the housing 43. Left handle is fastened by the bolts 107 by means of the
gasket 102 and pressure bushing 106 to the saddle support left branch-
pipe. It is assembled on the cone shaped pinion 100 axis. The pinion axis
has two needle roller bearings (the same as roller bearings 25), which
outside brackets are retained from displacing by washers (the same as
washers 24). There is a distance bush 103 between the washers. Bushing
104 is fastened on pinion axis by the dowel 105. The pinion axis 100 is
linked with the hinge 99 by axis 109. The hinge 99 carries a pipe 79
assembled with the glands 80; the pipe 79 will displace to stop at pinion
100 axis collar. Loose piece of the hinge 99 has square for the jack handle
with boss to be fastened by the nut 10 with split-pin 9. The left handle
lever has welded rib 8 and axis 98. The pipe is placed on the axis and
retained by the locking ring 96.In the firing and traveling positions the left
handle rests folded in the U-shaped bracket 88 welded to the saddle
support. The right jack handle fixed by bolts 15 with the gasket 17 and
pressure bushing to the saddle support right branch-pipe. It’s assembled on
axis-pinion 22. The axis-pinion carries two needle roller bearings 25,
which outside brackets are retained from displacing by the washers 24.

5-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

Between the washers 24 there is a distance bushing 23 and washer 71,

used for the handle’s free wheeling adjustment. Inside of the bearings are
spring-loaded by the nut 21. Brake is assembled on the axis-pinion and
consists of connecting piece 72 with lugs retaining nut 21 from rotation,
disc 95 with rollers 94, push rods 93 and springs 92, disc 73, bushing 74
with thrust roller bearing 75 and bushing 19. The bushing 14 and 76
placed behind thrust roller bearing; between them the split bushing 18 are
set in the axis-pinion groove.

4. The axis-pinion tail-piece has a casing 13 which slits have two keys 77
retaining it from self-winding. The keys are retained from drooping-out by
pressure bushing 16. The cylinder-shaped casing 13 tail-piece is connected
with hinge 12 by axis 109. The pipe 5 placed on the hinge moves to casing
end while handles working. Loose piece of the hinge 99 has square for the
jack handle with boss to be fastened by the nut 10 with split-pin 9. The
right handle lever 7 has welded rib 8 and axis 6. The pipe 5, washer 4,
spring 3 washer 2 placed on the axis 6 is retained by the locking ring 1. In
firing position the right handle is folded and fixed in the saddle support
holder 87 and in traveling position – in the bracket 110 on the wheel
transforming fork. Jack performance to descend sabot down to the ground
and to elevate howitzer on jack, its necessary to take the right handle out
of bracket 87 or 110, to pull the pipe 5, take left handle out of U-shaped
bracket 88, put the pipes 79 together until they stop both the casing 13 of
the right handle and the pinion 100 collar of the left handle, then start to
rotate the right handle clockwise until the sabot stop to the ground then,
finally process elevation by both handles. Right handle clockwise rotation
is transmitted via the hinge 12 to the casing 13 which is winding at ¾ of
the thread approximately round the thread of axis-pinion tail-piece. This
results in front section of casing 13 to spring load thrust roller bearing 75
and the disc 73; the disc 73 will compress the disc 95 to the connecting
piece 72, after that the axis-pinion 22 starts to rotate. The locked brake
disc 95 and the rollers 94 which are compressed by the springs and
pushers to inside bush 19 surface, rotate together with the axis-pinion. The
bushing is retained from rotation in the saddle support branch-pipe by
locking teeth of the spring bushing 16. While further handle rotation, the
rollers will rotate along the bushing 19 surface and by the pushers 93 will
compress the springs 92.The right handle rotation via axis-pinion 22 will
be transmitted by the pinion ring 49, pinion 100 (pinion 100 will rotate left
handle) and the balls to the screw 46. The screw 46 rolling along the balls
connected with the screw 30 will get it down with the sabot to stop at the
ground. After this the screw 30 will remain stationed and the screw 46
with the housing and howitzer will elevate until the bush 28 stops at the
nut 33, after which the arrester 35 will move along the rod 11 (fig.37) of
the saddle support and rest at the keys 31 (fig.42). After this the elevation
of the system will be processed by housing displacement in relation of the

5-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

screw 46. This displacement is limited by bush 42 to rest at bush 36. Bush
42 has a specific inside cut.

5. Jack performance. To keep howitzer in elevated position safely the

following is required:

a. While holding the left handle, to rotate the rights handle clockwise
for additional spring-loading of the brake disc 95.
b. Get left handle down
c. Get right handle down
d. When getting right handle down the howitzer weight will rotate it
counterclockwise using the sabot, screws and housing

Arrested disc 95 will rotate together with axis-pinion locking the rollers
between the disc and bush 19, as the bush 19 is meshed with steady bush
16 connected with the saddle support, so the howitzer will remain safely
on jack. To get the system down to the wheels and lift the jack it necessary
to rotate right handles counterclockwise. The left handle will rotate by
itself. Pos. 43 describes the other jack model. Its principle difference is
following: the left handle is fixed to the saddle support branch-pipe with
the nut 95, locked by screw 96, right handle – with nut 16, locked by
screw 17. Behind the thrust bearing 75 there are two bushes 14 which have
split bushes 15 placed in the axis-pinion groove; the key 77 retained from
Dropping-out by the nut 16. Steady link of bushing 19 with the saddle
support is provided with the key 18.

D. ROLLER

For displacing howitzer to short distances by few of personnel, the gun has the
special dismountable roller.

• The roller (fig.45) consists of the following parts: wheel 1, fork 2 and rod
3.
• The wheel has welded casing a rotates round the axis 16, fixed in the
sidepieces 17 of the fork 2.
• Axis greasing is maintained by grease nozzle 15 through the special bores
and openings welded in axis.
• The rod 3 has: ring 13, nut 4, cone-shaped ring 5, bush 6.
• The bush 6 has three welded brackets 9 with cams 11 rotating on the axis.
• The rod’s end has winded thrust bush 7 locked by screw 8.
• For howitzer rolling, the roller is guided under the draw bar, fixed in
position to be trailed by truck, and guided by its pin into the draw bar ring.
Cams 11 at this moment are in upper position.

5-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

Draw bar is placed on the cone wheel 5, the cams 11 driven in lower position and
lay with their slants on the surface of the draw bar ring. To fasten the roller in the
bar, nut 4 should be rotated guiding the handles to the stop. All above steps
should be done in temporary arm-lifted position. It is allowed to put the howitzer
on the roller upon tightening nut 4 only.
Roller disconnecting should be done in reverse steps. While traveling, the roller is
transported in a trunk of a truck. If rolling the system manually, it’s allowed to
use drag ropes 52-Ю-021 stored in ЗИП. Drag ropes should be hooked by the
trials’ handles or to wind drag rope ends round the cranks 15 (fig.32) from inside
of the wheels then to hook drag rope

E. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Electrical equipment provides light signals on traveling, installed on the left

dismantleable panel of the shield and consists of casing 3 with the flashlights
(fig.46), cable 16 with socket plug 17 and casing 2 with lid 1. The casing 3 has
two similar red lights 20 and 25 supplied the lamps A 24 (12v 3w, lamp socket 1
Ш-15 ГОСТ 2023-50) with resistor 30 as power adapter from 24v to 12v.

Note. The howitzers of other models have no 24-12 voltage switch

The casing 3 has a switch 5 to switch resistor on/off. The piece of casing 3 has a
hook welded for tent fastening. While preparing howitzer to traveling position it
is essential to: turn switch 5 to “24v” sign if the gun will be trailed by the trucked
vehicle or to “12v” when transported by wheeled vehicle. After this take the cable
16 out of casing 2 and to close the lid 1; turn the cable twice round the barrel and
put the with socket plug 17 in the vehicle’s socket. Thus, electrical equipment of
the gun will be connected with the vehicle circuit and main light will switch on;
on traveling when truck stops, stop-lights will switch on. The earlier models
requirements demand to change the lamps 24v, if trailed by the trucked vehicle or
12v when transported by a wheeled vehicle.

5-7
 TM01-01-2005-10

Chapter VI

AIMING EQUIPMENT

The aiming equipment is used for laying howitzer to target while shooting by
direct laying and from indirect fire position. Aiming equipment consists of
panoramic sight Д726-45 and direct laying sight ОП4M-45. Both sights are
attached at the left cradle piece on bracket 4 (fig.47). For lightening of the sights
and panoramic sight when shooting at night or in low vision howitzer is
equipped with “Luch” Д726 (fig.59 and 60) lightning device.

A. PANORAMIC SIGHT Д726-45

Panoramic sight Д726-45 (fig. 48 and 49) is used for laying howitzer to target
from indirect fire positions; it may also used for direct laying when ОП4M-45
sight is unavailable. The regular panoramic sight ПГ-1М is used as view-finder
and protractor. According to its scheme Д726-45 sight is depending on a gun and
has depending line of sight. For sustaining sight in working order it has spare
parts and accessories as indispensable part of gun support kit (ЗИП ).

Sight main characteristics

Angles range:
Tangent elevation………………………………… From 0-00 to 12-00
of sight…………………………..……………….. From +4-00 to - 2-00
Swinging range………………………………..…….…+- 6oC
Scale factors:
Rough calculation of tangent elevation (to 12-00)……..1-00
Precise calculation of tangent elevation ………………..0-00, 5
Rough calculation of angles of sight………….………...1-00
Precise calculation of angles of sight……………………0-01
Sight weight (without fork)…………………….……….11, 5 kg

The sight Д726-45 consists of tangent elevation mechanism, mechanism of

angles of sight, cross swinging mechanism and dial sight socket.

1. Tangent elevation mechanism used for setting of tangent elevations on the

sight. It consists of the following principle parts: worm 63 (fig.49), worm
wheel 5 with dial sight socket housing 67 attached, flywheel 53, ring 49 with
millennial scale, cylinder pinions 31 and 94 and range drum with indicator.
The worm is meshed with the worm wheel, placed in gun-metal bearings 35
and 56 fastened to housing 14 lug. The cone 58 with spring 60 put on the
worm shaft 63. Springs eliminate worm end play and, at same moment spring
load the cone to coned surface of the bearing 56 retarding the worm. This
worm design allows tangent elevation not to be destroyed during the shot.
One piece of the worm 63 carries flywheel 53 with handle fastened on key 98

6-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

and fastened by cone shaped dowels 97. On the flywheel rim there is a ring 49
with scale of tangent elevation fastened by compressing ring 54 and screws
104. Scale factor of this scale equals half one millennial (0-00, 5); the scales
are graduated by figures from 0 to 95 in each five scales. The flywheel has
hinged lever 50 of switching worm brake off. The lever under spring’ 59
compression retains the flywheel lever in pressed out position. When pressing
the lever in axial direction, it will press push rod 51 and accordingly – the rod
55; at the same time the spring 59 compress and dowel 57, resting cone 58
will press it out of cone shaped surface of the bearing 56. This position allows
rotating the flywheel 53 with no excess power and setting tangent elevation
required. The other piece of the worm has a split pinion 31 with spring 64
screwed on and tightened by nut 32 and dowel 33. This spring set apart the
both parts of split pinion and eliminate backlash in cylinder shaped pinions 31
and 94 meshing. Pinion 94 fastened on a shaft 95; the same shaft carries plate
91 locked by dowel 84. The plate carries range drum 90 fastened by
compressing ring 86 and screws 87. The shaft 95 assembled in the housing 14
lugs of sight and rotates along with range drum 90. The drum surface has
winding grooves, between them the different distance scales for different
shells are put on. Pos.50 carries drum scale meanings for gun-howitzer Д-30
ballistics. Parallel to the range drum 90 axis there is guiding bar 102 fastened
with screws 103 on which the indicator housing moves. In bottom piece the
indicator housing has two winding lugs matching winding grooves of the
range drum 90; on the upper piece of indicator housing there is attached
guiding strip 99 with indicator100. The indicator can be moved along the
guiding strip locking it with locker 101 at respective scale; scale descriptions
are marked on the guiding strip. Inside the sight casing 14 there is eccentric
axis 3 fixed with nuts carrying worm wheel 5 with dial sight socket housing
67 fixed on it. Worm wheel with dial sight socket can rotate round eccentric
axis; they retained from axial displacement by bolt 2 with nut 16 and split pin.
The worm wheel is split consists of two parts with spring 15 between them
which spread worm wheel parts apart eliminating backlash in meshing of
worm 63 with the wheel. The worm wheel wider part has dial sight socket
housing 67 fastened by bolts 65 and screws 68 which has angle of sight
mechanism fastened and dial sight socket. The dial sight socket housing has
screwed plate with rough calculation of tangent elevation scale 82. Scale
meanings marked with digits from 0 to 12; scale factor is 6 degrees or hundred
of one thousand (1-00). The sight casing 14 carries index 83 for rough
calculation and index for precise calculation. The worm and axis are greased
through grease nozzle 4.
2. Tangent elevation mechanism performance: It’s necessary to rotate
flywheel 53 for setting tangent elevation mechanism with prior switching off
the cone 58 pushing flywheel lever in axial direction. Omitting of this can
cause loosening of the flywheel lever of tangent elevation mechanism. While
flywheel rotates, the worm 63 also rotates being in mesh with worm wheel 5
rotate it, inclining dial sight socket housing 67 in longitudinal direction along
with the panorama and angle of sight mechanism. At the same time worm

6-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

shaft 63 rotation is transmitted to the range drum 90 by means of pinions 31

and 94. Rotating range drum displaces the indicator 100 along guiding bar
102. The calculation of setting of tangent elevation in sight meanings make by
one of the scales of range drum opposite pointer index and calculating of
millennial meanings by the ring 49 scales and the scales 82 opposite the
pointer indexes 85 and 83. Tangent elevation mechanism is used for setting of
tangent elevation on a sight. It consists of the following principle parts: worm
42, split worm arc 11, small flywheel 38, ring 39 with precise scale, rough
calculation bar 72, pointer 75 with limiter and longitudinal level 7. Worm is
fixed in the upper opening of tangent elevation mechanism by nut 44 and
dowel 77. Axial loosening is eliminated by spring 43. The small flywheel 38
is fixed to the worm by screw 37 with dowel fitting an opening in worm
collar, rigidly fixing it with the small flywheel. The ring 39 with surface
divided to 100 equal parts is clamped between worm collar and small
flywheel. Scale factor is one millennial (0-01); each tenth meaning is marked
by figures from 0 to 90. Zero of precise calculation scale is fixed by dropping
in of wedge lug of arrester 73 in the groove on inside ring 39 surface.
3. The side opening of angle of sight mechanism an axis 8 of level is fixed. It
has split worm arc 11 put on it and retained from axial displacement by bolt
13 and locking screw 12. Split worm arc 11 is made of two parts having a
spring 10 between them. This spring put both parts of worm arc apart
eliminating backlash of worm 42 and arc meshing. Split worm arc rotation is
limited by two dowels fastened to its wider piece. In extreme positions of arc,
these dowels stop in arrester 9, fixed to the pointer 75, which in its turn is
fixed by the screws 74 on the angle of sight mechanism housing. The strip
with rough calculation scale 72 is fastened to split worm arc 11 by screws 71.
The scale graduation marked by figures from 28 to 34. Even scale marks are
highlighted with the long marks; odd marks are highlighted with short marks.
Scale factor is 6 degrees (hundred of one thousand 1-00). Zero of the angle of
sight rough calculation scale corresponds 30-00 setting; in this case the mark
of index 75 is opposite the mark figured 30. Longitudinal level 6 rim is placed
in eye lugs д; the rim carries a glass level bulb lying in plaster cast. The bulb
is filled with anti-freeze liquid (spirit or ether) and has a small air bubble. The
bulb has setting marks on its glass; in horizontal position of the bulb the
bubble rests between middle marks. Inside the rim 6 from end face four
screws 105 are screwed in for rim and bulb zero adjustment. The rim is
retained from axial displacements by caps 70 screwed in thread openings of
the lugs д, from rotation – by screw 78 inserted in the opening of lug д and
fitting the rim slot. Winding the cap 69 put on the rim 6 one can open/close
the glass level bulb.
4. Angle of sight mechanism performance. Setting of angles of sight is
possible by rotating of small flywheel 38. It allows rotation of worm 42 and
split worm arc 11 meshed with it. Position of longitudinal level 7 axis changes
along with worm arc. Setting of angle of sight is calculated according rough
calculation scale opposite the index mark 75 and according precise calculation
scale opposite the lock mark.

6-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

5. Rolling motion mechanism is used for setting sight in vertical position. It is a

screw-type mechanism consisting of split screw 23, handle 25, housing 22,
roller 21 with eye lug, spring 24 and rolling level 47. The sight casing 14 is
hinged to fork 18 using trunnion bushing 36 covered with lift lugs and bolts
66. The lower part of sight casing 14 has lift lugs handling the housing 22
hinged to trunnion bushing 62; the lift lugs are fastened by bolts 61. Split
screw 23 with handle 25 is screwed in the housing 22. Backlash in screw
suction is eliminated by spring 24. Inside the split screw there are small shaft
21 with lift lug fastened inside the split screw by nut 89; by the small shaft
and axis 20 with split pins the split screw 23 is hinged with fork 18. Thus,
rolling motion mechanism perform as a rigid triangle, which one side is
formed by the fork 18, the second – by sight casing, the third side of variable
length is formed by the housing 22 and the split screw 23. Vertical position of
sight in horizontal plane of howitzer is determined by rolling level 47 fixed on
the base 67 of dial sight socket (the bubble rests in the middle). The rolling
motion mechanism is similar to longitudinal mechanism.
6. Rolling motion mechanism performance. Sight rolling is processed by
rotating of handle 25. When rotating the handle with split screw 23, the
housing 22 will screw on the screw or screw off it, thus it will move along the
screw changing the triangle variable side more or less. The sight will
simultaneously swing on trunnion bushing 62 relating the stationed fork 18.
Dial sight socket 45 fixed on the base 67 by two cone shaped dowels 46. The
dial sight socket has a bearing cone в for panoramic sight installation,
eyepiece window, pressure screw 30 and catch retaining panorama from
dropping out. The catch has axis 81 with spring and handle 79. The catch axis
inserted in horizontal opening of the socket, has two-edged cut in the middle.
One of the edges is used for catching of panorama hook, the other one – for
ejecting of panorama up when taking it from the socket. For axis rotation
limiting the dial sight socket has a dowel 80 for axis collar slants to rest in
stop position. The pressing screw 30 press panorama bulge in lug housing г
fixing this way the panorama’s stationed position in dial sight socket. The
screw is retained from self-screwing by spring 29 fixed by the screws 27 with
spring washers 28. When placing panorama in dial sight socket, turn the catch
handle 79 clockwise to stop then put panorama down the cone в and put catch
down.

B. PANORAMIC SIGHT ПГ-1М

Panoramic sight ПГ-1М is an optical instrument. It looks like folding optical

tube carrying stationed piece в (fig.51) and rotating head a. The lower stationed
piece has eye piece д, worm quick-release collar and hook г for installation of
panorama in dial sight socket; in its wider part there are bearing scale of dial sight
mechanism and rotating mechanism. Rotating head a consists of reflecting
mechanism and view-finder casing e. The optical system of panoramic sight
consists of reflector prism1 (fig.52), erecting prism 10, objective lenses 16, roof
prism 21 and eye piece lenses 18.

6-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

Location of the prisms, their configuration, dimensions and relative rotation

calculated in a way that the rays after passing through optical system of
panoramic sight will expose direct undistorted four times multiplied image of
object observed. Usage of this system allows observing horizon with stationed eye
piece.

1. Reflecting mechanism. Rotating head 4 cavity has a casing 3 with worm

segment 9; in the casing 3 reflector prism 1 is fixed. Rotating head cavity
is protected by the glass 2. Worm segment mashes with reflector worm 8
which carries drum 6 with precise calculating scale 7 fastened to small
shaft of reflector with nut 5. Scale 7 has one hundred meanings; scale
factor is one millennial (0-01). Each tenth meaning is marked by figures
from 0 to 90. Rotating head casing has scale index, there markings “Up”,
“Down” and arrows pointing direction of drum rotation for moving of
panorama optical axis in vertical plane. Left outside piece of casing 3 has
rough calculation reflector scale (three dots up and down from central
mark), which scale factor is hundred millennial (1-00).

2. Reflector prism 1 rotation provides magnification of panoramic view

with indirect laying using auxiliary dots, located upper or lower than
howitzer horizon. In case of direct laying reflector is set on 0-00 Right
piece of rotating head 4 has a view device, used for howitzer deep laying
and in case of panoramic sight disorder. The view device perform as
rectangular empty box with two wire threads fixed tense in the front piece
and forming objective viewer; back piece of the box is covered by the bar
with vertical slit trench. Lower piece casing 22 of panorama and protractor
casing 11 forms a cavity in the middle of panorama for lodging of
protractor mechanism and rotating device.

3. Protractor mechanism. Protractor mechanism consists of worm 13;

worm wheel 12 which cylinder shaped upper piece has winding on
panorama head 4. The worm 13 is lodged in eccentric bushing, one piece
of which has worm quick-release collar б (fig.51). The worm small shaft
13 (fig.52) has drum and precise calculation protractor scale. The scale is
graduated by one hundred meanings; scale factor is one millennial (0-01).
Each tenth meaning is marked by figures from 0 to 90. Panorama casing
has index for precise calculation protractor scale, arrows and signs: “Пр”
(to right), “Лев” (to left) and “Weapon”, moreover the arrows show
direction of drum rotation to transform trajectory to the right or to the left
according to angular correction, while keeping initial laying. The sign
“Weapon”, “Пр”/“Лев” on panorama casing shows clinometer drum
rotation for gun switch right or left. Rough calculation clinometer scale 26
is fixed to rotating head 4 casing. It has 60 meanings; scale factor is
hundred thousand (1-00). Even meanings are marked by figures from 0 to
58. Rough calculation scale is marked on clinometer 11 casing.

6-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

4. Rotating device. Rotating device is purposed for rotation of erecting

prism 10 and consists of tree cone-shaped pinions: stationed pinion 14
fixed on the casing 22, intermediate pinion 24 fixed on cross-leveled axis
of guiding cylinder 23 and pinion fixed on the worm wheel 12. Thus, if
worm 13 rotates, the worm wheel 12 also rotates with rotating head 4 and
with pinion 25 fixed on it; pinion 25 rotating, engages intermediate pinion
24 to rotate with guiding cylinder 23, casing 15 and erecting prism 10
forcing to roll along stationed pinion 14. Due to this when the reflector
head rotates, so does the erecting prism 10, rotating near vertical axis with
the rate of angular rotation two times less than of the reflector’s (e.g. if the
reflector rotates on 90 degrees, the prism 10 will rotate at 45 degrees).

5. Panorama’s grid. The grid is marked on the glass plate 17 inserted in eye
piece 18. The net (fig.53) includes graticule, angle bracket, aim-off
graticule and special scale. Special scale is used for gun collimator
marking, used instead long-distanced object. This scale has 74 meanings,
corresponding respective meanings of collimator marking. The meanings
which set to the right from graticule vertical line, marked by letters,
meanings set to the left – by figures. Horizontal graticule line has to the
right and to the left from the angle-bracket four dashes of aim-off graticule
each side. The scale factor is five of one thousand (0-05). It means that
aim-off graticule on the grid allows adding lateral lead right and left up to
twenty of one thousand (0-20). The same scale can be used for angular
measurements and measure lateral deflection when shooting direct laying.
For shooting at night the grid is illuminated through the side window of
eye-piece pipe 20 (fig.52) by flashlight; the window of eye-piece pipe has
protective glass. Rays passing through panorama. The rays from an object
observed, pass through reflector prism 1, distort to 90 degrees and reflect
in erection prism 10. The prism 10 provides straight, not inclined image of
an object with different angle of reflector’s rotation. It can be reached by
means of erection prism 10 angular rotation two times less than angular
rotation of reflector prism 1. From prism 10 the rays come in objective
lenses 16, then in roof prism 21. The prism 21 distorts the rays to 90
degrees exposing straight image of an object observed in eye-piece lenses
18.

Principle optical characteristics for panorama sight

Magnifying ……………………..………..…….4x
Field ………………………………….10 degrees
Exit pupil diameter…..………….….………..4mm
Distance between exit pupil
and eye-piece lens………..…………..about 20mm

6-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

The optical system of panorama requires normal eyesight. Panorama

designed in a way, wherever aiming point would be: on horizontal plane
of howitzer, upper or lower, the layer needn’t change position and observe
aiming point in graticule in one plane, increasing laying precision. When
aiming, it needs to match only two points: center and aiming point which
simplify aiming. Slight approaching or taking away an eye from eye-piece
do not affect aiming precision; there is an eye guard 19 to put on eye-piece
for convenient aiming. When working with panorama it is essential to pay
attention on right way of head rotating. For rough line of sight laying on
aiming point it needs to lift to stop worm collar Б (fig.51), turn panorama
head in required direction and release collar. In case of worm tread will
stop in worm pinion it need to turn clinometer drum in any possible
direction and when worm collar will find it in the right position, make
precise aiming. It’s unlikely to turn panorama head in case when worm
collar is not lifted to stop, as it may damage the worm pinion teeth. When
traveling and/or storage of howitzer, panorama is placed in case with
reflector settings (0-00) and protractor (30-00). Dismantling and
maintenance of panorama is allowed by optician at artillery shop or
arsenal. In the units it’s allowed to install reflector’s broken protecting
glass, repair/change wires of view-finder and vary setting of protractor
rings and scales, also reflector while testing aiming accessories.

6. Panorama installation and dismantling

To install panorama, it needed:
• to wind out pressing screw 30 to end (fig.49);
• to hold panorama with left hand between reflector and wider part
in a way that eye-piece pipe turn backwards, then put it down in
dial sight casing;
• -to turn by right hand the catch lever 79 clockwise to stop holding
on;
• -to put panorama down and when its hook will rest on catch small
shaft, release the catch;
• -to wind pressing screw 30.
• To dismantle panorama, it needed:
• -to loosen pressing screw 30;
• -taking panorama with left hand by the casing, turn with right hand
the lever 79 clockwise to stop;
• -to take panorama out of dial sight socket.

C. TELESCOPIC SIGHT ОП4М-45

The sight ОП4М-45 (fig. 54, 55, 56, and 57) is a principle sight when shooting
direct laying on moving and stationed targets. The sight ОП4М-45 is used with
different types of artillery, minding sight range scales must match gun’s ballistic
characteristics to use with.

6-7
 TM01-01-2005-10

Depending on sight range scales, carried by the sight, it has a marking

specifying: code of sight ОП4М-45, digital code depending on ballistic
characteristics, name or code of weapon and sight Nr.

The sight for 122-mm gun-howitzer marked “ ОП4М-45, КД-30, №….” This is put on
the special plate attached to sight casing.

ОП4М-45 sight set includes:

Sight with face-piece…………….…………1
Light filter……...……………………….….1
Protective glass (spare)……………………..3
Eye-piece spare……………….…………….1
Screwdriver…………………………………1
Spanner……………………………………..1
Flannel napkin 200x200…………………….1
Storage case*………………………………..1
Objective cap………………………………..1
Eye-piece protective cap……………………1
ОП4М-45 sight user Manual.………………1
A form ……………………….……………..1
Group ZIP ………………………………….1
Maintenance ZIP……………………………1

Principle optical and technical characteristics of ОП4М-45 sight

Magnification……………………………….……………5.5x
Field of view……………………………………………..11 degrees
Exit pupil diameter………………………….……………5.5mm
Distance from exit pupil to the last eye-piece lens ….….24.5mm
Sight adjustment permitted relating to vertical …………+-0-10
Line adjustment scale limits……………………... …….+-0-22
Distance adjustment scale limits…………………………from 0 to 0-70
Velocity scale limits…………………….……………… 0-40 km/h
Sight’s weight……………………………………………5 kg
Weight of the sight and storage case…………………….11kg
*Storage case fits for one sight with set of its accessories

1. Sight optical scheme (fig.55) includes objective 2, condenser 4, erector

lenses assembly 29 and 30, net 8 and six-lens eye-pieces 20. In front of
objective there is protective glass 32 and light filter 1. Objective 2 consists
of two lenses glued to each other and used for getting of image (turned
upside down in focal plane). Condenser 4 is installed in objective focal
plane and used for narrowing of the rays to get able to decrease
dimensions of optical parts following by it. Erector assembly 29 and 30
consists of six lenses, four from which are glued by pairs. Erector
assemblies adapt the image turned by objective. So, in the focal plane of
the second lens of erector assembly the image comes true for observing it
through the eye-piece 20. On the net 8 there are distance and adjusting
scales, component velocity scale, target sign, range scale and set square
for range calculation of direct shot on targets 1.5m and 2.7m.

6-8
 TM01-01-2005-10

Distance scales 1 (fig.58) are placed in upper part of the flat glass net in
accordance with the howitzer’s ballistics and marked by letters,
corresponding respective shells. Scale graduations are marked according
range (hundreds of meters). On the right side there is scale marked БК.
There are graduations from 0 to 20. Scale factor for БК scale: from 0 to 5
(500m)-500m; from 5(500m) to 20 (2000m)-100m. Slightly to the left
there is HE fragmentation shell scale, marked ОФ/полн: from 0 to 6
(600m)-600m; from 6(600m) to 40 (4000m)- 100m. At the same place
there is cumulative shell scale, marked БП. Graduations are marked from
0 to 20. Scale factor of БП scale is: from 0 to 4 (400m)- 400m; from 4
(400m) to 20 (2000m)- 100m. To the left from the range scales there is
scale 2 of range adjustments from 0 to 0-70 with scale factor 0-01. To the
left of middle part of the net placed range target scale 3 for measuring of
distance to 2, 7 meter height targets on angular target height factor. Scale
limits are 12-28 hectometers. Scale marks are set in two hectometer
interval, the figures – in four hectometers. Below range scale there is
target sign 5 in the middle and four small set square 4, set by the tops to
each other by pairs with figures 2, 7 and 1, 5. The aiming mark is for
aiming. Small set squares for reading the range of direct shot on 2, 7 and
1,5m height targets shooting armor-piercing shells. Blank space between
the top of central set square and vertical line equals 0-02. In the middle of
the central part there is a scale 7 of side component of target velocity;
scale limits are 0-40 km/h and scale factor 5 km/h. Under the scale 7 there
is correction for line scale 6.Scale limits are: +22, scale factor is 0-01.

2. Design of the ОП4М-45 scale (fig. 54 and 55). The sight consists of pipe
3, casing 6 with mechanism of aiming and aim-off, eye-piece part,
adjustment mechanism, rubber face-piece 15, light filter 1. The pipe 3
screwed in the cylinder part of the casing 6; eye-piece assembled on lid 21
fixed to the casing with screws. Cylinder part of casing 6 has a key 31
locking sight configuration relating howitzer bracket. In the casing there
are aim-off and adjustment mechanisms.

a. Aiming mechanism consists of sidecar 9 with flat-parallel

glass plate (net) 8, screw 27 with nut 24. Tangent elevations
are set by moving of sidecar 9 with the net 8 up/down relating
horizontal line.

b. Aiming mechanism performance. When rotating small

flywheel 25, the nut 24 will follow its rotation, displacing
screw 27 up/down. While rotating small flywheel to the right,
the screw will go down and winding in nut’ thread, will pull
the sidecar with net down meshing its clamp by its Г-shaped
piece. When rotating small flywheel to the left, the screw will
come up, so will the sidecar with net. The springs press out
sidecar 9 down all the time eliminating backlash in screw 27

6-9
 TM01-01-2005-10

and nut 24 junction. When displacing the net down, tangent

elevation will increase, when moving up – it will decrease. For
limiting of net displacing within its scale limits, the nut 24
carries arrester washes 26 resting to each other in their stop
positions, limiting rotation of small flywheel 25.

c. Aim-off mechanism carries slides 3 (fig.56), springs 8, screw

9, small flywheel 10 with nut 2. Aim-off leads are set by
moving slides 3 with net right/left relating vertical line of
cross-wires. While rotating the small flywheel 10 backward,
screw 9 will move left, winding in the nut 2 and will drag the
slides left with its Г-shaped piece. When rotating the small
flywheel forward, screw will winding out of nut, slides will
move right. Springs 8 press out the slides to the left,
eliminating backlash in screw 9 and nut 2 junction. To limit
slides moving within the aim-off scale nut 2 carries arrester
washes 1 resting to each other in their stop positions, limiting
rotation of small flywheel 10 with nut as demanded. Eyepiece
part consists of lid 21, rubber eyepiece 19 and eye-piece 20.
Eye-piece part has a sidecar 28 with cross-wires 18 (fig.57).
The sidecar 28 (fig.55) moves in two crossing directions when
rotating nuts 13 of adjustment mechanisms. Vertical
adjustment mechanism is in the upper part of the casing 6 and
Direction adjustment mechanism is on the right (if look in eye-
piece). Both mechanisms are of similar design, so find below
the description of one of them (of vertical adjustment).

d. Adjustment mechanism consists of casing 16, nut 13 and

screw 17. When rotating the nut 13 to the left, the screw 17
will descend, winding off the nut at the same time. It will
displace the sidecar down by its Г-shaped piece. When rotating
the nut to the right, the screw will ascend and the sidecar will
move up. Springs 22 eliminate backlash in screw 17 and nut 13
junction.

D. ILLUMINATING OF SIGHTS

The “Luch” Д726 (fig.59 and 60) lightning device is used for lightening of sight
facilities and positions of the commander and assistant shooting in poor visibility
conditions and at night. The lightning device consists of four batteries, sight
lightning device and panorama, commander and layer position lightning devices,
also storage case.

6-10
 TM01-01-2005-10

1. The battery 10 (fig.60) of 3.5 voltage, flash lamp type, consists of two
series connected alkaline batteries HKH-10 placed in metal case with lid.
Back piece of the case has spring bracket to fasten the case at waist belt;
the side pieces of case have shoulder belt brackets. The lower piece of
case there is a socket plug for lightening installation. The battery for sights
and panorama lightning are fastened to the gun shield; commander and
layer put two batteries on themselves; one battery is for lightning of
collimator net.

2. Sight and panorama lighting device is a derived wire. Integrated part has
a socket 9 for battery 10 connecting. Derived part consists of five two-core
conductor for sight lightning and panorama connecting.
a. Lamp 1 is for lightning of horizontal level thousand angle scale of
Д726-45; consists of lamp socket with lamp and reflector, fastened
by holder 4.
b. Lamp 2 is for protractor scales and panorama lightning; consists of
lamp socket with lamp and a cap; installed in removable bracket on
panorama casing.
c. Lamp 3 is for panorama net lightning; consists of lamp socket with
lamp and a cap; fastened by holder 4 embracing panorama eye-
piece.
d. Lamp 7 is for longitudinal level and range drum lightning carries
lamp socket with lamp and reflector; lamp is installed in bracket 8,
fastened to dial sight socket.
e. Lamp 6 cap has letters ОП Lightning of net and cross-wires is
provided by lamp 6 carrying lamp socket with lamp and a cap.

3. Lighting of the commander’s position - perform as a wire having lamp

socket with lamp and reflector on one piece and the other piece with
socket for battery wired plug. Lamp socket has a bracket to fasten to waist
belt.

4. Lightning of gunner’s position - perform as a wire with leather left

handed glove. One wire piece has lamp socket with lamp the other piece
with socket for battery wired plug. Lamp socket with lamp in post is
sewed in the layer’s leather glove.

6-11
 TM01-01-2005-10

Storage case used for storing the lightning device and spare parts attainable.

Lightning of howitzer installation is following:

• to take bracket from storage case, put it on panorama casing below - dial-
sight main scale and tighten drop off screw of the bracket;
• take out the wires of sight and panorama lightning and plug holder 5 in
socket bracket 20 (fig.20);
• fasten the lamps on sights;
• put the bracket 4 on (fig.60) eye-piece pipe and tighten it with nut;
• put in the battery case in shield housing; plug in socket plug 9 in wire plug a
of the battery 10

6-12
 TM01-01-2005-10

Chapter VII

SPARE PARTS, TOOLS, ACCESSORIES

AND SKI FACILITY

A. GENERAL INFORMATION

Spare parts, tools and accessories (ZIP) are purposed for sustaining equipment on
alert. All ZIP equipment is dispatched in kits: to be used individually; to be used
in unit; specific tools; maintenance tools. In individual ZIP kit there are spare
parts, tools and accessories obligatory per one howitzer under all conditions of
service. In unit ZIP kit there are spare parts, tools and accessories obligatory for
preparation howitzer to shoot, maintenance, and urgent repair within the battery.
Special kit is with tools and repair set required for observation, examining, repair
of howitzer within unit facilities are provided with the howitzer and assigned to
particular unit artillery workshop. All ZIP kits must be sent to army units with the
howitzers. Kits replenishment is an obligation of Head of Artillery of army unit
and conducted according to set order. General purpose tool kit is given to gun
fitter, if available; if gun fitter is not assigned to a unit, then artillery workshop
tools are used. The list of spare parts, tools and accessories (ZIP kit) is given in
annex 4 below. The kits with spare parts, tools and accessories are stored and
transported using specific storage boxes. Some of the accessories, needed
frequently for service and maintenance are lodged directly on the howitzer. It is
indispensable to control ZIP kits same way as the howitzer itself. For all kinds of
work including dismantling, assembling, adjustment and repair and treatment of
mechanisms only special tools and accessories must be used. The directives
regarding their usage are given in The Manual on dismantling and assembling of
the Howitzer. If a part fails to be maintained with the special tool it is necessary to
use generally purpose tools.

B. FIELD CLINOMETER

Field clinometer (fig.61) consists of frame 1, guiding arc 5, slide 7 with level 8.
The frame has toothed sector 3 with scale marks; one side has marks from 0 to 7-
50, the other side – from 7-50 to 14-75. Calculations are observed opposite the
index 4 marks. When guiding arc rotates, the angle of level inclination changes.
Besides, due to curvature of guiding arc 5 the level axis changes its position when
moving the slide along the arc. In this case the level inclination is calculated using
the scale, marked on guiding arc relating slide index. The guiding arc scale
marked in interval from 0 to 0-25 of protractor marks with scale factor of 0-00, 5

7-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

C. GUN CLINOMETER

Gun collimator K-1 is used for horizontal aiming of a gun either if the actual
(distant) aiming points are not available, or under poor vision conditions: night,
fog, snowstorm, fumes coming from shooting. The collimator is stationed beside
the gun and substitute distant aiming points. It allows arranging shooting position
in any terrain: in shrubs, in forest, forest edge, etc. Collimator matches different
types of artillery; the assigned gun panorama ПГ should have special net.
Panorama with special net has index ПГ-1. Each gun is supplied with one
collimator. Working with the collimator at daytime daylight is used, while at night
or in poor vision, electric light is used. For collimator lightning the battery
assigned to illuminating facility is used. Collimator has marking carrying
collimator code (K-1), factory code and collimator number. Marking is indicated
on the collimator mirror rim nut.

To collimator K-1 assigned equipment belongs:

Collimator with mirror – 1;
Socket with plug and connector – 1;
Anti-flash compound – 1;
Tripod (from director ПАБ-2) - 1;
Storage box – 1;
Collimator cover – 1;
Spare mirror – 1;
Spare lamps (2.5v) – 6;
Flannel napkin – 1;
Principle optical and technical collimator data:
Field of view – 10 degrees;
External pupil diameter – 48mm;
The most convenient range from collimator to panorama – 6-8m;
Number of signs at collimator net, horizontal axis – 76;
Scale factor for collimator net and panorama special scale –7, 8’ (0-02, 2).

Weights:
Collimator – 1.3 kg
Packed collimator – 2.4 kg
Tripod – 3.5 kg

Gun collimator K-1 (fig.62) consists of casing, objective, net, level, viewer, ball
joint, mirror, bracket, socket with plug and connector, anti-flash compound.
Collimator K-1 optical system consists of multi-lens objective, carrying lenses 2,
3, 11, 12 and 19, plates 24, protective glass 41 and mirror 32. Casing 1 is a pipe
carrying collimator optical pieces fixed inside. The front piece of collimator
casing has viewer 9 fastened by screws 4 and dowels 6 for rough aiming of
collimator to gun panorama. There are lugs in the middle part. Two upper lugs
carry the level 13 fastened. Lower lug has thread for ball joint 54 to screw on for
purpose of collimator fixation in tripod housing. Ball joint is fastened on case lug

7-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

by screws 52 and dowel 53.Back piece of collimator casing there hinged mirror
32 and bracket 38. Inside collimator casing there are fastened lenses 2 and 3 of
objective glued to each other. Lenses 2 and 3 are fixed in rim 5 by spring ring 7
and thread ring 10 locked by screw 8. Rim 5 screwed in front piece of casing 1
and locked by screw 57. The middle part of collimator has a rim 17 which carries
objective lenses 12 and 11, locked by ring 56 and screw 55. There is gasket ring
16 between lenses 12 and 11. The back part collimator casing has screwed in rim
50 locked by screw 49 and ring 44, locked by screw 26. The ring 44 retains a slide
27 within the casing. The rim 50 has a rim 18 inside. The rim 18 carries lens 19
fastened by ring 51 and having plate 20 glued. Lens 19 has collimator net on it.
The rim 18 is fastened in rim 50 by ring 21 and screws 22 and 48. The rim 50 has
screwed in it rim 23 with frosted plate 24 locked by a screw; the plate is fastened
by ring 25 and locking screw. Net of collimator has 76 graduations performing as
vertical strips. The right piece strips are marked by letters: А, Б, В etc., the strips
in the left piece of collimator net by figures: 1, 2, 3 etc. Lever 13 works to
eliminate side clinometer, e.g. for adjusting collimator net strips in vertical plane.
It consists of the level bulb, bulb rim 14 and protective ring 15. Level is locked by
nut in the lugs of collimator casing. Setting of collimator level is doing by rotary
motion. Mirror 32 is for reflecting of daylight rays to collimator net. The mirror
32 is fixed in a rim 31 by nut 33 with screw 34. The rim 31 is placed on axis 28
and locked by dowel 29 on it. Axis 28 rotates in lift lugs of slide 27. Screw 30 is
screwed in rim 31 lift lugs for turning of friction, between lift lugs of the rim 31
and the slide 27, necessary for retaining the mirror in working position. The slide
27can is rotated round the collimator casing. It’s necessary, when working with
collimator in daylight rotating the slide 27 and rolling the rim31, to set the mirror
in a position allowing maximum light to come on the net. Using electric light, the
mirror is lifted and set in horizontal plane position. In bracket 38 socket 37 with
the lamp 40 is fixed. The bracket 38 put on axis 47 is locked by dowel 46. Axis 47
rotates in lift lugs of casing1. Wing nut 45 screwed on axis, useful for locking the
bracket 38 in required position. Socket 37 with plug 36 and connector 35 used for
power supply from battery to the lamp 40. Socket 37 has reflector 39 with
protective frosted glass 41 locked by nut 42 and screw 43. When working with
collimator at night or in low vision, socket 37 should be uplifted unless reflector
39 stop at ring 44, after this the bracket 38 should be locked by the wing nut 45
and connector 35 plug in the battery socket. Anti–flash compound 59 placed on
the front piece of collimator casing. It’s used for sun flash protection, also for
protecting of outside lens of objective from dirt. Power supply necessary for
illuminating of the collimator net is provided by alkaline battery carrying two
series connected HKH-10 elements. Alkaline battery put in metal casing, fastened
by belt to tripod leg if working at night. The casing lid has connector 35 and
switch. When working with collimator, the battery should be used only on
demand. Other time the lamp must be switched off. The tripod 3 (fig.63) used for
collimator installation at line of fire. Collimator is placed with its ball joint in
base-plate socket and fastens by cap square and clamping screw.

7-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

D. AIR-HYDRAULIC PUMP 52-И-035

Air-hydraulic pump 52-И-035 is used for pumping of air and fluid in recuperator
and equilibrator. Air-hydraulic pump (fig.65) consists of casing 11 of pump with
lid 6, large piston 12, small piston 39, fork 18, handle 15, connecting rod 63,
pipeline 1 and connecting pipe 26. Casing 11 of pump is a steel casting. It
aggregate all pump parts together. Inside surface of casing fits the large piston 12
diameter and perform as a low pressure cylinder (primary air compression). Pump
casing has a bracket a for installation of small piston 39 and fork 18 with handle.
For installation on howitzer (right trial), the casing has lug with clamping pieces 6
in the bottom. Pump lid 6 is fixed to the casing with six cotter-pins 49 with nuts
50 performing as low pressure cylinder bottom. There is leather sealing ring 9
placed between casing and lid. The lid carry suction valve, filter and tap. Suction
valve consists of ring 8, soldered to the pump lid, suction valve 51, spring 52 and
nut 53 locked by split pin. The pump lid has a lid 4 screwed in the front piece,
between two lids a filter 5 with net is clamped. When on storage, an opening in
the pump lid 4 is closed with cap 56 having a chain 55 attached to screw 54.
There is a lug in upper piece of pump lid carrying tap 7 for switching pump
modes “Air” or “Fluid”. In the upper lid of pump, tap 7 is fastened by nut 60 with
split-pin and washer 59. The pump lid has signs “Air” and “Fluid”, while tap has
a mark. Large piston 12 has two trunnions в for connecting rods 63, making
piston meet with fork 18. The grooves on the piston head carry three cast iron
rings 10. For better heat evacuation, the piston carries seven aluminum rings (ribs)
43. There are steel bushing 13 pressed in and soldered inside the large piston
forming high pressure cylinder (final air compression). Saddle 45 of high pressure
valve and rubberized asbestos fabric ring 48 are screwed in the front part of the
piston. The saddle has high pressure valve 44 with spring 46 and nut 47 locked by
split-pin. Small piston 39 screwed on tip 23, which is in the opening of bracket a
and locked by nut 25 and locking washer 24. From rotating the tip retained by
dowel 22, which end piece meet the slot of bracket a. For stroke absorption of
piston engagement with bracket when work, the pin has a fiber ring 21. The
grooves of small piston carry five cast iron piston rings 42. Delivery valve saddle
19 screwed in piston. The saddle has hollow metal cylinder 40, spring 20 and
delivery valve 41. When pump is on storage, a cap 38 chained 37 to screw 36
which screwed in bracket a. Fork 18 fastened in bracket a on axis 62 which is
retained from falling out by split-pins 61. Connecting rods 63 are put on fork
trunnion г and large piston 12 trunnion в, and then locked by split-pins 64. The
fork has welded handle base 17 which carry handle 15 with pin 14. Base, handle
and pin should be fastened by split-pins 16 prior pump operation. Connecting pipe
26 serve for connecting pump with recuperator or equilibrator by means of T-
joint. There is a pin 33 fastened to one piece of connecting pipe. It has specific nut
34 and leather gasket 35. This nut serve as connecting pipe fastener to the pin 23
of pump small piston. The other piece of connecting pipe has a connecting point
with specific nut 28 and leather gasket 29. Inside, connecting point has valve
device assembly with ball 32, spring 31 and rest 30 screwed in connecting point.
For connecting pipe linking with T-join, specific nut 28 is screwed on

7-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

intermediate nipple 66, which in its turn screwed on T-joint side pipe. Pipeline
1serves for delivery of fluid to the pump (in “Fluid” mode); it is a 1.5meter pipe,
which one piece has pin 58.The pin has pressure nut 3, the other has leather
gasket 57. Air-hydraulic pump has spare parts and tools kit assigned, which stored
in separate cells in pump storage box. Pump ZIP include valve device
maintenance kit, gaskets fitting to them, piston rings, connecting pipe, also two
spanners (Сб34 and Сб113) for pump valve dismantling and special graphite
grease tin.

1. Preparation to performance

To take the pump out of storage box and fix its clamping pieces in guiding
slots of right trial. To wind off a cap 38 from the small piston pin, then
wind out a plug 56 from the cap. To connect with specific nut 34 one piece
of connecting pipe 26 to the pin 23, paying attention on usability of the
leather gasket 35. The other piece of connecting pipe with valve device,
using intermediate nipple 66 and leather gaskets connect with T-joint or to
specific connecting point in case of using pump for artificial recoil. Put
handle15 with pin 14 in handle base 17 and fasten them by split-pins 16.
For pumping air, set tap 7 switch on “Air” mode. For checking of links
tightness, working with pump rise pressure to 30-40at in connecting pipe
keeping recuperator or equilibrator valves locked. If no air leakage, then
unscrew the valve and pump air in. If pumping fluid, fasten pipeline1 in
lid opening by pressure nut 3, paying attention on usability of leather
gasket 57 on pipeline pin. Pipeline pin 1 plunge in a tin with measured
amount of fluid to be pumped in recuperator. Set tap 7 switch on “Fluid”
mode (to match tap openings with of the lid ones).

2. Pump performance when pumping air

The pump set on operation pumping with a handle by two people. While
pumping it needs to produce 20-30 double strokes per one minute with full
piston stroke. While pumping a handle, large piston 12 connected with
fork 18 by connecting rods 63 will reciprocate. Small piston 39 fastened
on the pin 23 with bracket will remain motionless. Move of the large
piston to the right creates under pressure in low pressure cylinder. Outside
air will pass the filter 5, open valve 51 and fill the cylinder. At the end of
large piston stroke, suction valve 51 will lock under pressure of spring 52.
Move of the large piston to the left will pressurize air in the low pressure
cylinder, which opening valve 44 will fill the high pressure cylinder. At
the end of large piston left stroke the valve locks under spring 46 pressure.
Further move of the large piston rightward will let the air in through
suction valve in low pressure cylinder with simultaneous compression of
the air in high pressure cylinder. The air compressed in high pressure
cylinder open delivery valve 41 and enter connecting pipe 26.

7-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

With low pressure values in recuperator or equilibrator (up to 10 atm) the

pump operates differently. Move of the large piston to the left will result
the air, compressed in low pressure cylinder to open immediately high
pressure valve and delivery valve and will reach connecting pipe through
high pressure cylinder.

3. Pump performance when pumping fluid

While pumping fluid its necessary to produce not more than 10-15 double
strokes per one minute with full piston stroke. Move of the large piston 12
to rightward creates under pressure in low pressure cylinder. The fluid
from tin through pipeline 1 will enter the filter 5, and then through the
valve 51 opening fill the low pressure cylinder. Opposite (left) move of
the large piston open valve 44 and high pressure cylinder is filled with
fluid; excess of fluid is pumped through tap 7 opening back to pipeline1.
Further move of the large piston rightward will let the fluid in low
pressure cylinder through tap opening and suction valve with simultaneous
pumping it from high pressure cylinder through delivery valve 41 and
connecting pipe 26. Upon fluid pollution from pipeline stops, it’s
necessary to set the tap on “Air” and, pumping air with pump displace
fluid residue from the pump and connecting pipe into recuperator.

E. SKI SKIDS EQUIPMENT

Ski skids equipment is used for transportation of howitzer over deep snow using a
vehicle. It’s impossible to shoot while on skis. Ski skids consists of two similar
skis 13 (fig.67) and two looped chains 10. Base pieces of skis have welded cutters
2 for skidding protection when transporting howitzer on packed snow and for
perfect skiing. On the top, the skis have wheel housing. In the front piece of a ski
there is a bracket 3 where hook 4 is fixed by bolt and nut. Tightening device is put
on the hook for tightening of chain on a wheel. Tightening device comprised of
leg stay 7 with winch, connecting rods 5 and 8, nut 6 with winch. Each looped
chain consists of two longitudinal chains connected by three transverse chains.
Longitudinal chains are connected with a strip 9 on one piece where the
connecting rod 8 of ski tightening device is put on. The back piece of the ski has
two loops 12 welded, which carry the hooks 11 fastened by the bolts with nuts;
back pieces of the looped chains are put on the hook.

1. Attaching of skis on gun-howitzer

Installation and dismantling of skis conducted while howitzer is in

traveling position.
To put howitzer on skis in the following order:

a. To put the skis beside the howitzer in front of its wheels in move
direction.

7-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

b. To display the chains and tightening devices in front of skis in

order them not to interfere attaching of the skis under howitzer
wheels.
c. To lift howitzer with jack to put the wheels off the ground and lift
the wheels with wheels elevating gear 150-200mm off the ground.
d. Move the skis by gun crew under the wheels until the wheels are
above the wheel housing.
e. Put wheels down, switch wheel elevating gear connecting rod and
set the jack on traveling position.
f. Put the chains on the wheels and fasten their end pieces on the
hooks.

Note: Tightening devices must be unscrewed up to stop; if the chain happens to be longer
than needed and the leg stay 7 would not provide required chain tension, then necessary
to hook the chain by the link which provides proper tightening. After that rotate the leg
stay by the winch tighten the chains. To lock the leg stays from self-winding by nuts 6
with winch.

2. Dismantling skis off gun-howitzer

a. To unscrew the nuts 6 by two-three turns and, while winding the

leg stays, loosen the looping chains. Take the chains off the hooks
and put in front of skis.
b. To lift howitzer with jack to get the wheels off the skis, using
Wheels elevating gear, get the wheels 150-200mm off, put the skis
from under the wheels by gun crew, put the wheels down, switch
wheel elevating gear connecting rod and set the jack on traveling
position.

3. Storage of ski skids

a. Preparing ski skids for long term storage it is required to screw off
the plugs 1 and check any water to be inside cavities. Grease the
skis inside cavities with 3-4 l of hydraulic fluid АУП МРТУ 38-1-
194—66 and turn the skis several times, then let the fluid off and
screw the plugs tightly.

F. BARREL RETRACTING INSTRUMENT

Barrel retracting instrument is used while checking fluid quantity in

recuperator. It consists of screw 3 with pivot bearing (fig.66), nut 2 with housing
and ratchet 4. The screw has acme screw-thread; its one piece carries pivot
bearing on a dowel to reduce friction between piston rod of recuperator and the
screw, the other screw piece has a square head fitting ratchet.

7-7
 TM01-01-2005-10

The nut 2 with housing screws in outside recuperator cylinder and serves for
guiding of screw 3 and pivot bearing. The ratchet consists of handle, ratcher
wheel and ratchet pawl. Ratcher wheel is fixed in handle lift lug, the ratchet pawl
constantly contact it with leaf spring. The ratcher pawl allows the handle to rotate
round the ratcher wheel with no hindrance in one direction, in other direction –
with ratcher wheel only. To retract the barrel it needed to screw out the lid 31
(fig.22) and screw the instrument instead. Screwing in or out the screw 3 of
instrument by the ratchet 4, conduct the barrel retracting or set in initial position.

7-8
 TM01-01-2005-10

Chapter VIII

GUN-HOWITZER DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLING

A. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

It is prohibited to dismantle howitzer in army for training purpose. Dismantling

and assembling should be maintained by armorers under supervision of
Armament officer.

NOTE: It is strictly prohibited to dismantle panoramic and telescopic sight ОП4М-

45 in Army units.

While working, it is required to follow strictly the operational order stipulated in

respective Chapters guiding dismantling/assembling of gun-howitzer. It is
essential to remember that equilibrator and recuperator are under considerable air
pressure, that is why when taking them off the howitzer and dismantling, the
follow precautions are obligatory to follow. It is required to dismantle equilibrator
when air is off and only upon safe switching of equilibrator by the bracket. When
releasing air from equilibrator and recuperator, to screw the valves gradually and
smoothly; prior dismantling of equilibrator and recuperator it is essential to
control, whether they are released from air.
When assembling gun howitzer, be sure the payload of equipment and facilities
match the weight of reloading loading parts.

Prior beginning to work it is necessary:

1. Prepare the space for work

For howitzer dismantling and assembling it is the best to use well
lightened covered facility. When in field conditions use locations
protected from wind and dust. Under bad weather conditions to
dismantle and assemble the howitzer in the building or tent.
2. Prepare the location for barrel, cradle and saddle; for smaller parts
prepare tables, shelving or wooden decking. It is not allowed to use
gun tents to put parts on them.
3. Prepare all necessary tools and accessories and check them to be in
working order.
4. To start working only upon detailed study of gun mechanisms and
order of working steps.

While working, follow the guiding recommendations:

8-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

1. Dismantling and assembling of howitzer must be done using assigned

tools and accessories only (Annex 2) and the tools for general purpose.
2. When screwing/unscrewing parts watch the spanners not to destroy the
parts’ edges. It’s not allowed to use chisel or similar things destroying
a part being unscrewed.
3. It is not required to use extra power when dismantling or assembling
the parts on their positions. First thing to do is to determine the cause
of such hindrances, then to eliminate ones.
4. Prior taking a split pin, press its both end pieces with bull-nosed pliers;
after inserting the split pin spread its end pieces apart using
screwdriver.
5. Taking the bolts out, use gun-metal or wooden drift tool in order not to
scratch the thread.
6. Dowels should be detached in a cause of dismantling necessity or if it
needs repairment.
7. When dismantling, it is unlikely to mix different howitzers’ parts. The
parts dismantled should be placed to their places. The quantity of
gaskets and their width should be kept as initial. Gun-metal rings
should be annealed prior to installation.
8. Polished, grinded and parts of friction should be thoroughly protected
from dents, scratches, rust as from sand and dirt. When assembling
friction parts, especially the recoil and recuperator cylinders, it should
be cared for sand, metal filing, shaving, dirt and other fragments not to
appear on glands and thread links.
9. Each time dismantling, all the parts must be thoroughly examined and
cleaned, paying attention of no rust to be on the howitzer parts. The
parts out of order should be substituted from the spares.
10. Prior assembling all the parts should be cleaned from dirt and grease
residue, dried after that they should be greased according to greasing
Table (ch.XIV).
11. Upon assembling of mechanisms it is required to check right order of
assembling by its performance.
12. Howitzer dismantling to the units should be done in firing position.

The order of dismantling should be followed as:

- Dismantle the breech mechanism with semi-automatics (ch.VIII.);

- Dismantle the jack (ch.VIII)

The order of assembling/ adjusting should be following:

- Assemble the breech mechanism with semi-automatics (ch.VIII.);

- Assemble the jack and put it on the gun (ch.VIII)
- Adjust clearance between saddle and saddle support (ch.VIII)
- Adjusting the jack handles for fastening in traveling and firing
positions (ch. VIII)

8-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

- Upon assembling completion put the howitzer in traveling position,

pull the levers on gear axis slots; mind the marks on levers to match
those ones on the cranks. After that put the parting bushing 4, 11 and
21 on.

B. Disassembly and Assembly of Breech Mechanism with Semiautomatic Gear and

Guard Assembly with Interlocking Gear

1. Disassembly of Breech Mechanism with Semiautomatic Gear

The disassembly of the breech mechanism breaks into Partial and complete.
Partial disassembly of the breech mechanism is accomplished during its cleaning
and lubrication and also for training purposes.

a. The order of partial disassembly should be as follows:

1. release the firing mechanism;

2. remove firing spring retainer 82 (Fig.l4) by means of wrench
152840—
36, for which purpose release the retainer and turn it through 90°;
3. remove firing spring 83 and firing pin 79;
4. open slightly the breech mechanism, depress breech block stop 21
and turn it through 90°;
5. insert handle 171519—1 into holes “a” of the breech block, remove
breech block 81 by shifting it upwards and place it on the table, the
6. breech should be face upwards;
7. take the lug of latch 74 from the slot cut in recocking pin 70, then
remove recocking pin 70; take latch 74 from the breechblock slot and
remove it together with spring 73;
8. detach cocking pin 69 by pressing cocking cam sear 72;
9. depress cocking cam 80 and remove cocking cam sear 72 with spring
71;
10. incline the breech block and remove cocking cam 80;
11. detach the retainer for which purpose drive out screw 85 pull off
12. retainer pin by the retainer pin head with the aid of a screwdriver (until
spring 86 clears the retainer pin head hole; this done, remove retainer
13. Pin 84, spring 86 and retainer 75 from the breechblock.

Complete disassembly of the breech mechanism is affected during complete

disassembly of the howitzer for preventive inspection and the replacement of
lubricant, and also during the repair of the breech mechanism Involving
complete disassembly of the latter.

8-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

Carry out complete disassembly of the breech mechanism after removing the
barrel from the cradle or after retracting the barrel to 500—600 mm and
removing the guard assembly shield.

b. The order of complete disassembly of the breech mechanism as

follows:

1. Carry out partial disassembly of the breech mechanism.

2. Disassemble the locking device and semiautomatic gear, for which

Purpose:
(a) remove split pin 27 and drive out screw 28;
(b) holding adjusting nut 5 in position, back out the nut by means
of wrench A52830—5 and remove closing spring 7;
(c) straighten out lock washer 30 and drive out locking sore W
29 with the aid of wrench 152830—8;
(d) Drive out screw 18 and thrust screw 19;
(e) Lower lock 66 and back off nut 65 by means of wrench
172931—10; remove lock 66 and spring 67;
(f) Take the extension of thrust sleeve 4 from the breech ring
socket. While removing Opening lever 3 from pin 20 and
holding cranks 59, 62 in position remove crankshaft 68 with
breech opening lever 1 from the breech ring, detach
crankshaft 68 and breech opening lever 1 from the other
levers;
(g) withdraw levers 9, 3 and pressure sleeve 8 from tie-rod, drive
out screws 12 and back off nuts 10 by wrench A52830—5,
remove pressure sleeve 8 from thrust sleeve 4.

3. Disassemble the extracting mechanism, to this end:

(a) Straighten out lock washer 46, drive out locking, screw 45
And remove lever 47 from extractor pin 15;
(b) Remove extractor pin 15 from the breech ring hole, holding
extractors 16 and 17 in position;
(c) Remove caps 57 and springs 56.

4. Disassemble the trigger pressure arm, for which purpose:

(a) Remove wire 37 by means of pliers and unscrew bolts 38 by
wrench 152830—4;
(b) With draw breech lock 42 with trigger lever 43 from its
socket;
(c) Knock out pin 41 by means of a drift pin and detach lever 43
from breech look 42;
(d) Remove trigger pressure arm 40 and spring 39.

8-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

5. Disassemble the recocking cam, to this end:

(a) Screw out lock 48 with the aid of a screw—driver,
remove lever 51 and withdraw recocking cam 49 and spring
50.

6. Disassemble the retainer cam plate, for which purpose:

(a) straighten out lock washer 35, drive out screw 34
With the aid of a screw driver, remove lever 36 and take out
retainer cam plate 32, spring 31 and washer 33.
(b) Remove locking wire 52 and unscrew bolts 55 by means of
wrench 152830-2;
(c) Take, if necessary, spring loaded plunger 53 out of the breech
recess socket and disassemble it, having fire knocked out the
lock pin.

7. Disassemble the breechblock stop, to do this:

(a) Drive out screw 26 by means of a screw-driver;
(b) Remove breechblock atop 21 complete with thrust bushing 23
and atop bead 24;
(c) Use a drift pin to drive out lock pin 25, and detach stop head
24, thrust bushing 23 and spring 22 from breech-block stop
21.

8. Drive out screws 87 and remove spring washers 88, then remove
buffer stop 77 and buffer spacer 76.

C. Assembly of Breech Mechanism with Semiautomatic Gear

Before assembling the breech mechanism, thoroughly wipe

all its parts with clean cotton waste and coat them with a
thin layer of lubricant I.IIIATMU—201.

1. Assemble the breech mechanism in the following sequence:

(a) put the retainer into the breech block slot, insert one end of spring 86
Into breech block hole fit in retainer pin 84, then bring the second end
of spring- 86 into hole “p” of retainer pin head “e” thereby
recompressing the spring. This is done, shift retainer pin 84 forward
until bearing against the breech block and secure it with screw 85;
(b) insert cocking cam 80 into the breechblock recess and fit in cocking
pin 69 and cocking cam sear 72 with spring 71 (with cocking cam 80
in the cocked position, the lever of cocking pin 69 should face down);
(c) Put latch 74 with spring 73 into the breechblock socket and, having
wound the spring by turning latch 74 through one revolution in the
counterclockwise direction, Insert latch lug “c” into the breechblock
slot;

8-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

(d) Retract latch 74 and fit in recocking pin 70, with the pin head facing
upwards, then release the latch;
(e) Insert handle 171519—1 into the breechblock holes “a” and met the
breechblock into the breech recess, having first pressed against the
extractor lug knock-off lever;
(f) Slightly open the breechblock, turn the breech block stop 21 by stop
head 24 until the latter is depressed into the breech ring, them close the
breechblock;
(g) Put firing pin 79 with firing spring 83 into position, pressing trigger
lever 43 simultaneously;
(h) Insert firing spring retainer 82 by means of wrench 152840—36.

D. Breech Mechanism after Complete Disassembly

1. Assemble the breech mechanism in the following order:

a. Assemble the breech block stop, to this end:

(1) Fit spring 22, thrust bushing 23 and stop head 24
on to the stop rod, having secured It on the rod by locking pin 25;
(2) Insert the breech block stop into the breech recess and drive in
screw 26.

b. Assemble the retainer cam plate, for which purpose:

(1) Install spring-loaded plunger 53 in the breech recess and secure it
with bolts 55; tie the bolts with locking wire 52;

c. Assemble the interlock mechanism, for which purpose:

(1) Assemble lever 1 (Fig.l5) with bushing on the side
plate of the top carriage, having connected it with taper
pin 73; spread the ends of the taper pin;
(2) Install lever 45 with the roller in the top carriage
brackets and secure the upper arm of lever on pin 8 by means
of taper pin 72; spread the taper pin ends;
(3) Connect lever 45 with lever 1 by pin 15. Secure the
pin in position by split pin 13 with washer 14;
(4) Connect tie-rod 43 with lever 1 and with cam plate -
slide block 20. Carry out the above connection by means of
two pins 12 with split pins 11 and washers 10; install spring 44.
(5) Install spring 91 into the socket as shown in the Figure; fit slide
block 90 on recoil indicator rule 89 so that the pointer index is
directed towards recoil. Install recoil indicator rule 89 and secure it
with screws 52, having first fitted spring washers 53 and screwed
on two nuts 54 by means of wrench A52830-2.

8-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

(6) Install the extractor lug knock-off lever, as follows:

(a) Put lever 50 on the pin welded to shield 49, install the
washer onto the pin and secure it with the split pin;
(b) Connect tie-rod 51 with lever 50 by a pin with a split pin.

d. Assemble the recocking drive, for which purpose:

(1) Mount handle 31 on pin 76 and secure it with washer 80 and split
pin 74;
(2) Connect tie-rod 41 with lever 19 by pin 62. Insert pin 62 into the
slotted lugs In such a way that split pin with washer should be on
the side of pin provided on lever 19;
(3) Install lever 19 on pin 59 and secure it with a split pin and washer;
(4) Connect tie-rod 41 with handle31 by pin 79 and secure the split pin
with washer
(5) Hook the spring to handle 31

e. Assemble the trigger mechanism, to this end:

(1) Insert lever 42 into the hole on the guard assembly shield and put
pressure arm lever 68 on pin 70 and- secure it with taper pin 69;
spread the taper pin ends;
(2) Mount lever 21 on the pin welded to the guard assembly shield;
(3) Install handle 30 on pin 56 and secure It by split pin with washer;
(4) Connect levers 21 and 42 with tie—rod 39 by means of pins 71.
secure the pins with split pins and washers;
(5) Connect tie—rod 39 with handle 36 by pin 87; secure the pin by
split pin with washer; fit spring 35 on handle 36 and press it by
nuts 34 and 33;
(6) Install spring 40.

f. Install the guard assembly shield, for which purpose:

(1) Set the tipping unit at maximum elevation;
(2) Mount the guard assembly shield on the cradle in brackets 48
(3) Screw on nuts 46 and 23 by means of wrench A52830—5 to
provide close—fit of the shield (without play), then secure them
with split pins;
(4) Screw in bolt 17 by means of wrench A5283o—4, secure bolt 17
with looking wire;
(5) Connect tie—rod 51 with lever 25 (fig.l6) by means of a pin with a
split pin;
(6) Set the tipping unit in a horizontal position.

After mounting the guard assembly shield check:

(1) Clearance between end “r” of pressure arm lever 68- (fig.l5) and
trigger lever 43 (fig.15) which should be from - 1.5 to 3 mm;
adjust the clearance value by screwing fork 38 (fig.l5) on tie—rod
39;clearance between pin of lever 19 and recocking

8-7
 TM01-01-2005-10

lever 51 (Fig.l4). This clearance should be from 2 to 3 mm;

adjust the clearance by screwing the fork on tie-rod 41 (Fig.l5);
(2) Clearance between bearing surface “a’ of cam plate 20 with slide
block and pin 26 of the interlock lever, when the tipping unit Is set
at elevations above 22° (with the roller positioned on the bottom
carriage arc). This clearance should be from 0.2 to 2.5 mm; adjust
the clearance by screwing the fork on tie-rod 43;
(3) Clearance between pin “a” of lever 50 and lever 47 (Fig.14), with
the breech block open and lever 47 pressed all the way up. The
clearance value should be 6 to 8 mm;
(4) Clearance between the surface of the guard assembly shield and the
breech ring which should equal 13.5 to 15.5 mm;
(5) The length of the limiting link compressed spring should be
76 to 79 mm.

Note: Assembly over, check the operation of the breech mechanism and make
sure that the breech mechanism with semiautomatic gear is properly assembled.

Note: If the breech mechanism closes too slowly or too abruptly, adjust the
tension of closing spring 7 (Fig.14)

E. Disassembly and Assembly of Jack

The jack will be disassembled for- technical inspections and repair. The jack may be
disassembled on the mount set in the traveling position; for this purpose, wheel the
mount on wooden bars and place it above a pit. To disassemble the jack on the
howitzer set in the Traveling position, put trestles or supports under the movable
trails.

Disassembly Procedure
Before disassembling the jack, lower the jack footplate by 230-300 mm. As a
result, step bearing 62 (Fig.3l) will retract from cover- 53.

1. Disassemble the jack in the following order

a. Detach -the footplate from screw 30, to this end:
(1) Drive out locking screws 102, remove locking strip 101 by a screw-
driver fitted through the recess of boss 103, back out nut 80 by means
of wrench A52832-32 holding end plate 65 in position, detach the
plate from the Lift nut 80 with bushing 81 up to the level of end face
of step bearing 62 and remove pin 82; withdraw top bearing 62,
bushing 81, and nut 80 from screw 30;
(2) Remove washer 85 from the end plate.

Note: Remove packing rings 10, 76, 83, 84, 94 only for replacing them

8-8
 TM01-01-2005-10

(3) Rotating the jack handle, lift screw 46 until washer 58 starts bearing
against bushing 48, and acre’s 30 —against washer- 58.

(4) In howitzers of another make: rotating the handle lift screw 110 until
nut 109 collar rests against the end face of Bushing 48 and screw 30
lower part, against nut 109.

b. Detach the jack handles from the bottom carriage sleeve, for which
purpose:
(1) Drive out screws 17 and 96 by means of a screw-driver;
(2) Using wrench Assay 42-13, back out nuts 16 and 95 and
remove gear-a with handles from the bottom carriage sleeves;
(3) Detach key 18 from the right handle;
(4) Withdraw shims 20 from the bottom carriage sleeves;
pay attention to the number and thickness of shims for each handle to
prevent their- confusion during assembly.

c. Detach screws 30 and 46 with jack nut 43, for which purpose
(1) Remove wire 67 by means of pliers;
(2) Unscrew bolts 69 by wrench A52830-4, holding the handles
by cover 53 to pr-event it from falling out of the bottom carriage
sleeve;
(3) Remove the jack from the bottom carriage sleeve;
(4) Detach cover- 53; remove gasket 68 and packing rings 52 and 61 from
the cover;
(5) Take off gaskets 37 and thrust ball bearing 38.

d. Disassemble screws 30 and 46 and jack nut 43, to this end:

(1) Remove locking ring 32 by means of a screw—driver;
(2) Unscrew nut 33 by wrench A52830-92 and remove casing 34;
(3) Withdraw keys 31 and remove limiter 35 from sore’s 30
(the key Is screwed in by driving in bolt MB);
(4) Drive out screw 29 with a screw-driver and back off
bushing 36 with the aid of wrench A52833—14; back off nut 43 from
screws 46 and assemble balls 45 in a box (the number of balls should
be 76);
(5) Drive out screws 26, 40, and 55 with the aid of
a screw-driver and remove bushing 44, washers 39 and 57,
rings 1l and 54 from the jack nut, having first assembled
needle rollers 51, then remove gasket 70;

Note: In howitzers of another design, no provision is made for- washers 39 and 57

protecting the rollers from falling out during removal of the jack.

(6) Remove screw 30 from screw 46 and assemble balls 45- In a box
(thenumber of balls should equal 50);

8-9
 TM01-01-2005-10

(7) Drive out six screws 59 by means of an acre’s-driver and detach

washer- 58 and bu8hing 47. In howitzers of another make, drive out
screws 111, through hole “a” in bushing 47 by means of a screwdriver,
screw off nut 109 and remove bushing 47-by means of wrench
A7293l-49.

e. Disassemble the jack handle, to do -this:

(1) Pull out split pins 79 by means of pliers and back off nuts 78 with the
aid of wrench A52830-5;

(2) Remove the handles from the handle joint squares; withdraw tubes 11
and nuts 16 and 95.

f. Disassemble the left handle, to this end:

(1) Knock out looking pin 97 with a drift pin; remove bushing 98, and
needle roller bearing 25, washer 24, distance bushing 99, second
bushing 24, needle bearing 25 and third washer 24 from the gear.

g. Disassemble the right handle, for which purpose:

(1) Remove keys 77 by drift pin A52823—6;
(2) Unscrew body 13 with joint from the shaft of gear 22;
(3) Remove bushing 14, split bushings l5, second bushing 14, thrust ball
bearing 75, bushings 74 and 19 (holding the -rollers, pushers and
springs against fall-out), disc 73, brake disc 107 with rollers 106,
pushers 105, springs 104 and coupling 72;
(4) Back cut nut 21 by means of wrench A52838—l9;
(5) Remove needle bearing 25 and washer- 24, washer set 71 (having
noted their quantity and total thickness), distance bushing 23, second
washer 24, needle bearing 25 and third washer 24.

h. Disassemble the jack handles, to do this:

(1) Remove looking ring 89 and tube 90 from pin 91;
(2) Withdrew locking ring 1 from handle pin 6 by means -of a
screwdriver, depressing washer 2 until bearing against the end face of
tube 5;
(3) Remove tube 5 and washer 2;
(4) Withdraw spring 3 and washer 4 from the tube.

2. Assembly of Jack

Before assembly, remove old lubricant from the entire jack

Parts, wipe the part surfaces with cotton waste and coat with new lubricant.

8-10
 TM01-01-2005-10

Assemble the jack in the following order:

a. Assemble nut 43 (fig.3l) and screws 30 and 46, for which purpose:
(1) Fit washer 58 on screw 30 (in howitzers of another
make fit nut 109 onto sore’s 30) and put bushing 47 onto screw 46
screw 30 into screw 46 to about 3/4 of its length by rotating screw 30
to the left, i.e. counterclockwise;

(2) Shift bushing 47 off screw 46 and fill through the

two holes the inner and outer helical grooves with balls 45
(50 pieces). To facilitate the filling of Inner helical groove
with balls, periodically turn screw 30 through 1/2—1 revolution
to the right or to the left;

(3) Fit bushing 47 on screw 46 and secure washer 58 on

it by six screws 59 which should be screwed right home, and
stop—punch the screws at the slit into two points.

In howitzers of another make:

(a) fit bushing 47 on screw 110 and on the screw –threaded end, by means
of wrench A7293l—49 screw on nut 109 as far as it will go, aligning the
screw threaded holes with those in nut;

(b) Stop nut 109 with screws 111.

(c) No projection of screws over the nut cuter surface is allowed. Screw
sinking should not exceed 1 mm;

(4) Put gasket 70 and ring 54 on the journal of the jack nut from the side
of gear rim 49; fill the Space between the nut journal and ring 54 with
needle rollers 51 (154 pieces);

(5) Secure washer 57 to the nut by three screws 55; tighten up the screws
as far as they will go and stop-punch them at the slit in two points

(6) Fit bushing 44 on the opposite end of the jack nut, placing it with
ohamfer 3x45°towards gear rim 49; adjust ring 41, fill the space
between the ring and -the jack nut journal with needle rollers 51 (154
pieces);

(7) Install washer 39 and secure it with screws 40;

drive in the screw right home so that the screw heads should
not protrude beyond the surface of the washers (to prevent
breakage of the thrust bearing); stop—punch the screw at the
slit in two points;

8-11
 TM01-01-2005-10

(8) screw the assembled nut on screw 46, drive bushing 36

onto screw 46 by means of wrench A52833—l4 until the threaded
hole for locking screw 29 is matched; drive in sore’s 29, fill
the inner and outer helical grooves with balls 45, fitting
thirty eight balls into each groove (through every 4 holes in
the nut). The total number of the balls to be inserted is 76.
After filling the first groove with the balls, hold them with
LJ tin. turn the nut through 180 degrees and fill the second
groove; this done, shift bushing 44 on the nut journal with
the right hand and secure it with three screws 26; tighten up
the screws right home and stop—punch them at the slit in two
points;

(9) fit limiter- 35 on the cylindrical part of screw 30;

press-fit two keys 31 and check the limiter for free movement
on the screw journal

(10) put casing 34 on the limiter, with its slot facing

down, screw on nut 33 by means of wrench A52830—92 until bearing
against the limiter end face; match the holes for the looking ring, then
insert locking ring 32; -

(11) adjust thrust ball bearing 38 and shims 37 on the screw.

Note: 1. The number of shims 37 and 68 is determined when adjusting the jack
operation and should remain unaltered during the assembly operation.
Note: 2. When balls 45 are missing it is allowed to add balls of the same size only
or to replace the whole set of the balls by those taken from the other sets.

b. Install nut 43 with screws 30 and 46 into the socket of the bottom carriage,
to this end:
(1) Connect limiter- 35 with the bottom carriage spine shaft in such a way
as to have the lug axis of screw 30 square with the axis of the fixed
trail;
(2) Set cover 53 with shims 68 and packing rings 52, 61;
(3) Screw in four- bolts 69 with the aid of wrench A52830—4 and tie
them with locking wire 67.

c. Assemble the jack left handle, for- which purpose:

(1) Fit washer 24 onto gear 93, needle bearing 25, washer 24, distance
bushing 99, washer 24, needle bearing 25.

8-12
 TM01-01-2005-10

Note: When assembling the right and the left handles of the jack, check to see that
the minimum shoulder of washers 24 (0.5 mm) should face the side of needle
roller bearing 25.

(2) put bushing 98 with its collar towards the bearing and secure it on the
gear by means of lock pin 97;

d. Assemble the left handle grip, to this end:

(1) adjust tube 90 and looking ring 89 on pin 91;
(2) fit the left handle grip on the square end of joint 92;
(3) screw nut 78 onto the threaded end of the joint by means of wrench
A52830-5 as far as grip permits it; secure nut 78 with split pin 79 after
adjusting the fastening of the traveling lock handle

e. Assemble the right handle, to do this:

(1) mount washer 24, thrust roller bearing 25, washer 24, distance bushing
23, washers 71 and 24, second bear-lug on pinion shaft 22 and tighten
them up with nut 21; fix the position of the nut by coupling 72 with
inner spines;
(2) put brake disc 107 with three pushers 105 and washer 104 on the
pinion—shaft as indicated in the cross--section 13—B (fig.3l); insert
rollers 106 ~into the disc slots and compressing the pusher springs,
install bushing 19;
(3) fit disc 73 onto the spines, then install bushing 74 with thrust ball
bearing 75 and two bushings 14; inter-lay the bushings with half—
bushings 15 and, holding then against fall—out with the hand, sore’s
body 13 with nut 16 and packing. ring 76 with tube 11 on the shank of
the pinion—shaft;
(4) insert keys 77 in the transverse slots of the body and, shifting nuts 16
until bearing against bushing 19, prevent them from falling—out of the
slots.

f. Assemble the right handle grip, to this end:

(1) fit tube 5, washer 4, spring 3, washer- 2 on pin 6 and secure them with
locking rln~1; -
(2) put the assembled grip on the square end of hinge joint 12 and secure it
with nut 78; tighten up the nut with wrench A52830-5; split—pin the
nut after checking the jack handle fastening in brackets 87 and 108 in
firing and traveling positions.

After assembly over, check the free travel of the right handle which should be
within 1/2 to 3/4 of a revolution? The free travel of the jack handle is necessary to
ensure trouble-free operation of the brake and to allow folding of the handles in
firing and traveling positions. If the free travel of the handle is less than 1/2 of a
revolution, decrease the number of washers 71. With the value of free travel
exceeding 3/4 of a revolution, increase the number of the washers. Replacement

8-13
 TM01-01-2005-10

of the adjusting shims involves additional disassembly of the right handle,

therefore when disassembling the handle, mark the number and the total thickness
of the shims.

g. Install and fix -the right and left handles in the bottom carriage sleeves, to
this end:
(1) install key 18 in the slot of bushing 19;
(2) insert shims 20 in the bottom carriage sleeves;
(3) fit the right handle assembly into the right-hand sleeve of the bottom
carriage so that key 18 should enter the key slot of the sleeve;
(4) screw in nut 16 by wrench Assay 42—13 as far as the end face of
bushing 19 permits it, ensuring free rotation of handle with minimum axial
travel;
(5) secure nut 16 by means of screw 17;
(6) insert the left handle assembly into the left sleeve
of the bottom carriage;
(7) drive in nut 95 by wrench Assay 42—13 until bearing against the
collar of bushing 98, and secure the nut with screw 96;
(8) check the operation of the jack without load; the jack should function
easily and smoothly without jamming.

h. Assemble the jack footplate and place it in position, for which purpose:
(1) put nut 80, bushing 81 and step bearing 62 on screw 30, matching the
step bearing holes with the lug hole in screw 30; insert pin 82. while
doing so, side 11 (fig.3l) of the step bearing should face the bottom
carriage rib, and side IZ — the fixed trail;
(2) mount bushing 81 and nut 80 with packing ring 84 on step bearing 62
(fig.3l);
(3) rotating the jack right handle, lower the screw with assembled step
bearing into the footplate hole with packing ring 83 and washer 85;
(4) Screw nut 80 into the threaded hole of the footplate by means of
wrench A52832—32;
(5) tighten up step bearing 62 by nut 80 in such a way as to ensure free
rotation of footplate without noticeable axial play;
(6) secure nut 80 with locking Strip 101, fitted into boss 103; fix the strip
with screws 102, tighten the Screws right hone and a top—punch them
at the slit in two points.

i. Check the operation of the jack under load. The jack should function smoothly without
stops or jamming. The right handle brake should securely hold the jacked—up howitzer.

8-14
 TM01-01-2005-10

F. Adjusting the Jack Handles Used for Fastening the Handles in Traveling and
Firing Positions

Adjust the jack handles used in traveling and firing positions on the fully assembled
howitzer, changed to traveling position, with the barrel secured in the frame and the
wheel lifting handle fixed.

1. Carry out the adjustment of the jack in the following way:

a. Lift the footplate to the extreme upper position by left handle until step
bearing 62 is against packing ring 61 cover 53, slightly tightening the rubber,
and secure the handle in clamp 88. (Fig.31). - If the left handle joint fails, to
enter- clamp 88, drive sore’s 96 by means of a screw—driver, back off nut 95
with aid of wrench Assay 42—13 and disengage gear- 93 from gear 49. Turn
gear 93 in the required direction to ensure it is locking in the clamp, and
engage it with gear rim 49; the handle grip should be in the upper position,
which is obtained turning it on the joint squares

b. Use the idle travel of the right handle to turn the latter- by the grip in the
direction of the wheel lifting fork, the tube upwards and insert it into the fork
of bracket 108. The handle grip should freely enter the fork of bracket 108. If
the handle grip does not match with the bracket fork, carry out an adjustment
similar to that of the left handle.

c. Having adjusted the fastening of the handles for both positions of nut 78,
secure them with split pins 79,

8-15
 TM01-01-2005-10

Chapter IX

SAFETY PROCEDURES AND GUIDELINES

A. GENERAL PROVISIONS

When operating the D-30 howitzer and its ammo, it is important to know and
strictly follow the service rules and safety regulations stipulated here below. Only
the personnel instructed and trained will operate the howitzer. Ordnance should be
arranged by supervision of the advanced officers, aware of personal safety, the
rules of howitzer use and ammunition handling. The howitzer must always be on
alert. The howitzer combat readiness is provided by working order of all
mechanisms, appearance and reliable link of all parts and assemblies, same as for
the spare parts, tools and accessories assigned. Soldiers, non-commissioned
officers and officers assigned are responsible for howitzer’ operability.

B. PERSONAL SAFETY GOVERNING INSTRUCTIONS

While operating a howitzer, the following safety obligations are essential to

follow.

1. When switching howitzer from traveling position to firing position

and vice versa.

a. All operations on switching howitzer from traveling position to firing

position and vice versa must be done following the order of steps with
possible unification of the adjoining operations.

NOTE: It is strictly prohibited to descend the howitzer using jack prior full
spreading of trials, neither to extract the spikes from the ground using the jack.

b. The gun crew personnel should do the draw bar dismantling from the
coupling assembly of a truck.

c. The angle for jack base should be flat, free from snow, stones and
roughness.

d. It is prohibited to do any operations not listed for switching howitzer

to firing position and vice versa.

9-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

It is strictly prohibited:
- To operate laying mechanism when the howitzer is on jack
position (for prevention of howitzer capsizing and jack
breaking);

- To elevate the howitzer with jack, if the barrel is not

adjusted along the steady trial;
- To elevate the howitzer with jack, if the handle 12 (fig.29) of
the worm switching mechanism is in traveling position.

Meeting the trials together and spreading apart should be done

simultaneously, securing them by the handling bars until they met the
locking devices, or until complete meeting together, accordingly. It is
prohibited to spread the trials when the steady trial is on trial roller.

e. Elevating the wheels must be maintained by the both crew members,

rotating at the same time gear axis by the wheel elevation handle at the
same time elevating the wheels by the crank handles; those of the gun
crew who are not engaged in process should not stand beside. Wheels
elevation and descending is required to conduct smoothly, avoiding
hitting abruptly the handle arresters by the saddle pin. Use two handles
for howitzer elevating by jack, rotating them clockwise. At the
beginning of elevation make sure the brake is in order, using the right
jack handle; for this purpose let the plate on the ground and elevate the
howitzer by the jack a bit of while turning the right handle by
two/three revolutions.
In the case for this position the brake does not engage with the right
handle, then let the howitzer on the ground and, retaining the left
handle, turn the right one clockwise with power unless free-play
elimination (1/2-1 revolution.) At the end of howitzer elevation by the
jack, to avoid its self-descending, turn on the right handle brake prior
to let both handles rest (retaining the left holder, turn the right one to
the right to stop).

f. When on jack, it is unlikely to stand beside the handles’ rotation area,

for the accidental push of the right handle may launch it to descending
mode and howitzer will be pushed to the ground by its weight.

g. It is prohibited to descend the wheels from firing position to traveling

position, if the pressure in equilibrator is insufficient, which may be
indicated by considerable pressure to the elevating gear flywheel,
while adjustment of quadrant elevation to it.

h. It is prohibited to adjust the barrel for quadrant elevation of more than

30 degrees, when in traveling position.

9-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

2. When Shooting the Howitzer

a. It is forbidden to stay in barrel recoiling area, when adjusting the

barrel quadrant elevation.

b. Prior rotating the howitzer’ muzzle brake on considerable angles with

steering gear off make sure first, nobody within the gun crew is
between the trial and fence; it is forbidden to rotate the barrel holding
it by the fence.

c. Prior to firing make sure the jack is up to stop and the handles are
locked on U-shaped brackets, and the worm switching mechanism
handle is in working mode.

d. When charging the howitzer especially with large quadrant elevation,

shell ramming in barrel chamber should be done abruptly to avoid
shell settling on cartridge case.

e. When firing, the gun crew should keep off the recoiling barrel and
cartridge case ejecting areas. It is also forbidden to stay in front of the
shield, to the right or to the left from it, same as for trials’ pitch.
Interphone headsets are recommended to use.

f. When firing with reduced charges, extracted powder bundles will be

placed in special pits.

g. After frequent shooting it is not allowed to screw the recoil absorber

plug off until the recoil mechanisms are cool.

h. Before shooting with negative angle meanings (from 0 to –5degrees)

when breech piece is upon the trials, make sure the spikes are fixed
full length up to stop in arrester.

NOTE: Strictly forbidden to shoot over the trials with angles from –5 to
–7 degrees.

i. Discharge the howitzer by firing only.

3. While on March

a. When moving it is forbidden for gun crew to sit on the howitzer. The
crew must be in the truck cabin or in the cargo area.

9-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

b. During stops the following parts are obligatory to be examined:

running gear, wheels tightening, lever and connecting rod fastening
the moving trials to stationed trial, link of the barrel in frame with
locker, tightness of bolts, fastening draw bar to muzzle brake and its
wired locking, also draw bar link in coupling assembly of truck and
reliability of wheels elevating gear connecting piece locking. The
different howitzer models require checking draw bar link with the
muzzle brake sidepieces.

c. Worm switching mechanism handle should be in traveling position

(fig.29).

C. GUIDING INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF HOWITZER IN DRILLS

While conducting drills all operations are required to fulfill in the order
stipulated by the Manuel herein, minding all safety requirements. For drilling
purpose in army units with use of howitzers it is allowed to do partial
dismantling and assembling of breeching mechanism, to dismantle and
assemble panorama and the telescopic sight, to check pressure in the
recuperator, adjust pressure in the equilibrator, take away (add) fluid from
recoiler and recoil absorber, to examine quality of “Steol M” fluid, to examine
the sighting equipment, to take away/assemble the panels, also maintain all
operations which normally are conducted by a gun crew when shooting, on
march and gun service. Prior breech locking with releasing mechanism, it is
necessary to check safety of fastening of the breech mechanism lever.

NOTE: For the purpose of firing drills, the drill rounds should be
used. It is strictly forbidden to use service rounds for charging
methods drilling.

During the classes on sighting equipment, also when firing do not rotate small
wheels of mechanisms and adjusting mechanism nuts too strong, neither hit
the optical equipment when assembling/dismantling. To avoid a short circuit
when working with batteries, do not touch positive and negative terminals all
at once. After drill completion, the howitzer should be examined and cleaned.
The “РЧС “detergent for bore cleaning is poisonous. Take care of eyes.
It’s recommended to clean hands thoroughly after cleaning and to pour the
used liquid in special pits.

9-4
 Chapter X

PREPARATION OF HOWITZER TO SHOOT

A. GENERAL DIRECTIVES

The howitzers assigned to Army units must be in working order and full
combat preparedness. Preparation of howitzer for shooting is implemented by
platoon commander responsible of general gun examination; test the work of
mechanisms, anti-recoil and aiming devices. It’s important not to forget that
even not serious malfunctions may result in aggravated damage.

B. HOWITZER EXAMINATION AND TESTING OF MECHANISMS WORK

The order of examination of the howitzer when in firing position is

following:

1. To examine the barrel. The outside surface must not have dents
turning to convexity of bore, no cracks.

2. For bore examination open the breech, take grease away, if lighting is
insufficient, put a sheet of white paper with an angle to the muzzle.
The muzzle inside surface should be clean without residues. In case of
finding any cracks or tube bubbling in the bore which looks like rings
of shade, also in case of cracks and deep dents on outside bore surface,
it is forbidden to fire the howitzer. Check the muzzle brake link.

3. Examine the breech mechanisms, semi-automatics and trigger, for this

purpose:
• Maintain partial dismantling of the breech (refer to partial
dismantling procedure in ch.VIII);
• Wipe breech piece parts, the housing in breech piece and spread
thin layer of grease on them;
• Assemble the breech;
• Open-and-close the breech several times afterwards detent striker
by release lever;
• Make arming again (without breech opening), then detent it.
If wedge-type bridge block ascend slowly, then it necessary to
dismantle the breech and examine the wedge-type bridge block and
it’s housing in breech piece; any malfunctions found (dirt, excess
grease, dents), eliminate and grease with thin layer. If afterwards
the wedge-type bridge block will descend slowly again, it goes
necessary to compress the spring of locking mechanism by
adjusting nut until it closes fast.
 4. Examine blocking gear:
• Adjust quadrant elevation of 22 degrees (3-66) and guide it in a
way, the breech piece would above one of the trials;
• Release the trigger lever, no detent would occur.
Make examination with each trial.

5. Check the rod links of recoil absorber and recuperator in cradle lid
piece. Rod nuts should be screwed on and locked.

6. Check if any fluid leakage from counter recoiling devices and

eliminate malfunction if any.

7. Check and examine recoil pointer, for this purpose displace the slide-
bar along the ruler from extreme front position to extreme back. If the
slide-bar moves free and can keep flywheel action, then leaf spring is
damaged and should be replaced.

8. Examine laying mechanisms and check their work; the mechanisms

should work smoothly without pulling and excess force to the
flywheels.
In a case the force on elevating gear flywheel is more with all quadrant
elevations when increasing the elevation, than when decreasing
quadrant elevation, then it’s necessary to increase pressure in
equilibrator by screwing in the screw 9 (fig.20) of cradle slipper
guides. In a case the force on flywheel of elevating gear with quadrant
elevation of slipper guides is less than when decreasing, so unscrewing
the screw 9 should decrease the pressure in equilibrator.
Screwing/unscrewing of the cradle slipper guides screw maintain by
spanner Сб 42-14 (if thread allows) unless the power at elevating gear
flywheel comes to normal. In the cases the adjusting mechanism fails
to sustain regular working order of elevating gear, it is necessary to
check pressure in equilibrator and adjust it to normal. For this purpose
unscrew the screw 9 to a half of its thread pump air or release excess
air.

9. Examine running gear. While checking pay attention to integrity of

lever rubber buffers, rubber tires, and safety of wheels’ tightness by
body rings; check loosened or unlocked nuts, bolts and split pins, if
any.

10. Check condition of assigned spare part sets, accessories and tools.

C. CHECK OF RECOIL ABSORBER AND RECUPERATOR

When checking counter recoiling devices fluid quantity in recoil absorber and
recuperator is checked, also pressure in recuperator

1. Checking of fluid quantity in recoil absorber

(To check fluid quantity in recoil absorber it is necessary to :)

a. Set the swinging part of the gun quadrant elevation of 3-5 degrees.
b. To unscrew the plug 14 by spanner 42-27 (fig.21). If there is
“Steol M” in a window, so its level is normal. If there is no sign of
“Steol M” it should be refilled by pressure gun A72277-16 unless
it over flow through the opening; while refilling it’s advisable to
swing the swinging part of the gun up and down in +2 degrees
angle for air release.
c. Screw the plug 14 with the 42-27.

2. Checking of fluid amount in recuperator

(To check fluid amount in recuperator it is necessary to :)

a. Lock the breech and set the swinging part of the gun angle of
depression of 3-5 degrees.
b. To unscrew the plugs 55 and 57 by spanner A52840-65 (fig.22).
c. By the spanner A72930-53 unscrew the locking valve 59 by ¼ of
its thread and release the hydraulic lock fluid via the pipe 50 and
screw the valve in promptly.
d. Set the swinging part of the gun horizontal position.
e. Screw in T-joint Сб42-25 in the housing, unscrew the plug from
one of T-joint branch and replace it with the manometer.
f. Install the air-hydraulic pump in trial post; screw the plug 33 off
the lid 31, screw the nipple with connection point in and connect
the pump; switch the pump to “Fluid” mode and, pumping “Steol”
from a tin in the recuperator, retract the barrel until the rear cut of
front bracket 11 (fig.3) match the first mark on the left cradle guide
of the cradle (marked Zero).
g. Using the spanner A72930-53 unscrew the valve by one
revolution, read pressure meaning on the manometer, remember it,
then screw the valve in.
h. Holding on with the pump, retract the barrel until the rear cut of
the front bracket meet the second mark on the left cradle guide of
the cradle, marked “250”; that means the barrel along with the
counter recoil cylinders will be retracted by 250 mm. Barrel
retracting procedure except the method described, can be
maintained by Сб 42-29 device (barrel retracting device): put
locking wire 52 away (fig.22), unscrew the screws 53 by
screwdriver, disconnect lock 54 and screw out the lid 31 with ring
32 by spanner Сб 42-13; replace the lid 31 by the nut 2 by spanner
Сб 42-13 (fig.66) with device screw 3, place the locking device 54
(fig.22) and fasten it by screws 53; screwing screw 3 with the help
 of ratchet 4 (fig.66), retract the barrel on the meaning mentioned
above. Using spanner A72930-53 screw the valve on one turn and
read manometer meaning again, after that screw valve in; unscrew
connection point valve and empty the fluid off, while
now the barrel will recuperate to initial position.
i. By matching two manometer readings (with the barrel retracted to
the first and second marks) evaluate the fluid content using the
chart table (fig.69) attached to the fence panel; for this purpose:
• Find the vertical corresponding to the pressure in recuperator
retracted to the second mark;
• Find the horizontal corresponding to the pressure in
recuperator retracted to the first mark and follow this line further
until its cross with the vertical corresponding to the pressure in
recuperator retracted to the second mark. In case the junction
point of vertical and horizontal lines is in the area limited by
inclined lines, then the pressure in recuperator is within normal.
The lower inclined line corresponds 9.77 l of fluid in recuperator,
the upper inclined line corresponds 9.97 l of fluid. In case the
junction point of vertical and horizontal lines is in the upper area
off the upper inclined line, then it’s an extra level of fluid in
recuperator and it should be decreased; if the junction point is
happen to be lower off the lower inclined line, it means the fluid
level in recuperator is low and fluid should be added to.
Approximate amount of extra or to be refilled fluid can be
calculated by the relation of distance from the junction of
respective vertical and horizontal lines to the inclined line of the
chart. The distance between two inclined lines correspond 0.2 l.
1. To release excess fluid from recuperator it needed to:
a. Set the swinging piece of howitzer the quadrant
elevation of 10-15 degrees.
b. Unscrew the plug from T-joint branch and put a beaker
under it.
c. Using spanner A72930-53 slightly unscrew the valve
and release some fluid in the beaker minding the fluid
is under pressure.
After the required amount of fluid would be released
screw the valve, then screw a pipe in the T-joint branch
and check the amount of fluid in recuperator using the
chart.
2. For refilling of fluid the air-hydraulic pump is used as
follows:
a. Unscrew the manometer from T-joint and screw a plug
in its branch; after screwing the other branch plug off,
attach a pump hose to it.
b. Pour the fluid in a tin 0.1 l more than the chart
requires, put the pump switch on “Fluid” mode and
 make four-five pumps by the lever.
c. Unscrew the valve by two-three revolutions and upon
pumping the fluid in recuperator, screw the valve.
d. Check again the amount of fluid in recuperator using
the chart. If the fluid amount equals normal, then screw
the valve to stop, unscrew T-joint and the manometer
and screw in the plugs 55 and 57 (fig.22).

Note. Checking of fluid amount in recuperator can also be arranged, while howitzer is
in traveling position, for which purpose is essential:
Let the jack sabot down to rest in the ground.
Part the right moving trial apart from the stationed one for the distance ample for the
pump installation.
Meanwhile, it’s forbidden to retract the barrel more than 300mm.

3. Measuring pressure in recuperator

(For measuring of pressure in the recuperator do the following:)

a. Set the swinging piece of howitzer to the depression angle.

b. Unscrew the plugs 55 and 57 (fig.22 and 68) by the spanner
A52840-65.
c. By the spanner A72930-53 unscrew the locking valve 59 by ¼ of
its thread and release the hydraulic locking fluid, then screw the
valve in.
d. Screw in T-joint in; unscrew the plug from one of T-joint branches
and replace it with the manometer.
e. Carefully unscrew the valve by one revolution, using the spanner
A72930-53 and read pressure meaning on the manometer, then
screw the valve in. Pressure in the recuperator must be 46+2
Kg/cm2.
If the pressure is lower than mentioned, it is necessary to add air in
the recuperator (fig.70), for which purpose:
• Unscrew the plug from the other T-joint branch replacing it
with a air-pump hose;
• Set the air-pump valve on “Air” mode, unscrew by two-tree
revolutions the valve and pump air up to 46+2 Kg/cm2
meaning;
• Screw the valve in and unscrew the T-joint with manometer;
• Set an air lock in recuperator.
The order of air lock setting is following:
• Set the swinging piece of howitzer to the quadrant elevation of
10-15 degrees;
• Unscrew the locking valve by ¼ of its thread, upon the fluid
appears in T-joint housing screw the valve in to stop.
 If the pressure in the recuperator is below than the regular
meaning, it’s required to release some air, for which purpose:
• Keeping the T-joint with the manometer on, unscrew the valve
by several revolutions;
• Release a bit of air by screwing/unscrewing of T-joint valve
watching the pressure falling down by the manometer
indication.
• When the pressure in the recuperator cylinder will be adjusted
to normal, screw the valve, unscrew the T-joint with the
manometer and make hydraulic lock of air, then screw the
plugs 55 and 57 (fig.22) in.
When measuring the fluid amount and pressure in recuperator, the
serviceable manometer, which has been calibrated regularly,
should be used. The calibrated manometer is stored in the artillery
workshop of the Army unit.

D. AIMING EQUIPMENT EXAMINING

Examining of aiming equipment is arranged for providing of conformity

between sight settings and the position of the bore axis. Examination of
aiming equipment is subdivided to partial and full examination.

a. Partial examination of aiming equipment is maintained:

• Every time when preparing howitzer for firing;
• In case of considerable deviation of shells from target while
firing.

b. When partial examining is arranged, it’s necessary to:

• Check Zero setting of Д726-45 sight;
• Check Zero lines of setting for Д726-45 and ОП4M-45 sights.
Full-scale examination of aiming equipment should be
arranged in cause of preparing for destructive shooting without
ranging.

c. Prior to aiming equipment examination, it’s essential to:

• Prepare the howitzer for aiming equipment examining;
• Prepare the aiming equipment for examination;
• Check the field clinometer.

E. Preparation of howitzer for aiming equipment examination

Display the howitzer on horizontal pitch and in firing position. Check the
aiming equipment and fix shortages, if any. Wipe the clinometer planes on
breech piece and cradle thoroughly.
Check the fastening of Д726-45 and ОП4M-45 sights to howitzer and look
them over. The sights should be in working order; the sights’ mechanisms
should work smoothly and with no excess pressure on small flywheels.

1. Field clinometer examining

Adjust field clinometer on the clinometer plane along the barrel. With
the help of elevating gear of howitzer set the clinometer bubble to
center. Rotate the clinometer to 180 degrees; if the bubble remains in
the middle, then the field clinometer is in order. In case of insufficient
displacement of the bubble, it’s necessary to slack a half of an error by
means of front adjusting screw, another part of the error adjust by
howitzer elevating gear. Rotate again the clinometer to 180 degrees; if
the bubble would not appear in the middle, the same procedure is
required to repeat unless the bubble would stay in the middle while
rotating the field clinometer to180 degrees. It may happen that after
the first rotation of field clinometer to 180 degrees, the bubble may be
displaced from the middle so far, that it would not be possible to
calculate even roughly the error of field clinometer.

If so occur, then it is necessary to:

• Guide the field clinometer bubble in the middle using howitzer
elevating gear and count the precise number of flywheel
revolutions (including backlash);
• Reverse the flywheel rotation for half number of its previously
counted revolutions;
• Guide bubble in the middle by rotating of the clinometer front
adjusting screw;
• Rotate the field clinometer to 180 degrees angle.

If the field clinometer bubble would remain in the middle, the field
clinometer is in order.

If the bubble has slightly moved, then it’s required to repeat the steps
described above.

2. Checking of nil readings

a. Checking of nil reading settings for Д726-45 sight

The order of checking of nil reading settings for sight is following:

• Place the howitzer in horizontal plane, using the field clinometer
set on clinometer plane of the breech piece;
• Match the field clinometer on the cutting of the dial sight socket,
parallel to cross level and, while rotating the small flywheel setting
screw of rotation, guide the field clinometer bubble in the middle;
• Rotate field clinometer on the cutting of the dial sight socket to 90
degrees and, rotating the flywheel 53 (fig.49), guide the field
clinometer bubble in the middle;
• While rotating small flywheel 38, guide the longitudinal level
bubble in the middle;

After mentioned above steps the sights’ scales should carry nil
Settings (sight 0, clinometer 30-00). The sight cross level bubble
should be in the middle. If in a case the setting on the angle of sight
mechanism scale would not be 30-00, then required to unscrew the
screw 37 using a screwdriver by one-two revolutions, revolve the ring
39 in a way, that 0 meaning of its scale would match the lock 73, and
afterwards screw-in the screw 37. If in a case of nil mark of thousand
scale of the tangent elevation mechanism does not match with pointer
mark, it needs to unscrew the screws 104 using screwdriver by one-
two revolutions, and revolve thousand scale ring 49 in a way that nil
reading of scale would match the pointer mark, afterwards screw the
screws 104 in. If in a case of range drum nil mark does not match
pointer mark 100, it’s necessary to unscrew the screws 87, using a
screwdriver by one-two revolutions, and revolve the range drum in a
way, that its nil mark would match the pointer 100, screw in the
screws 100 afterwards. If the cross level bubble would not reach the
middle, then it’s necessary, using upper and lower adjusting screws
105, to turn the rim 6 of cross level in a way, that the bubble would
reach the middle. To have an access to the adjusting screws 105, it
needs to unscrew with the screwdriver the left (when looking at the
sight in the muzzle direction) plug 70, should it be screwed back
again, upon adjusting is complete.

b. Checking of nil line of sighting for Д726-45 sight

Checking of nil line of sighting is conducted after checking of nil

reading settings. The nil line of sighting is checked by relating to the
range spot in a terrain (not closer than 1000m) or by board graticule.

In case of checking the nil line of sighting, using the range spot in
a terrain, is following:

• Put panorama in the dial sight socket and fix it with pressure screw
30 (pos.49).
• Pull the strings matching the marks on muzzle face and take the
striker mechanism out of the wedge-type bridge block;
• Aligning through the striker stud of striker exit opening, and the
center of strings on the muzzle face, lay the muzzle to the range
spot;
• Set the sight vertically by cross level;
• While rotating the small flywheels of panorama bearing scale and
reflector, match the graticule of panorama or the top of angle
bracket with the spot, captured by graticule on the muzzle face of
the howitzer’ muzzle.

As a result of the actions described, the panorama’s protractor scales

should read 30-00, though the reflector scale – 0-00. If the deviation of
protractor and the reflector happen to be more than a half of one of
thousand, then necessary to loosen with screwdriver the clinometer
and panorama’s clump nuts and, rotate the marked ring in a position
for nil marks to match the pointer marks. Screw in the clump nuts
afterwards. If it comes necessary to move the protractor ring, then
make the ring screws loosen, and rotate it until it meet the mark 30
with pointer mark. When checking the panorama protractor scales, it’s
also necessary to check a viewfinder of panorama head. If the range
spot chosen would not be observed in between the view-finder strings,
then rotating the view-finder screws, move it in such a way, for the
range sport to be observed between the strings. If a convenient range
spot is unavailable, also when the weather conditions are poor, the nil
line of sighting may be adjusted using a board (fig.71). A plywood
board carries graticules, indicating direction of panorama optical axis
(left graticule) and howitzers bore axis (right graticule). For checking
of nil line of sighting, the board is posted in 50 meters down from the
howitzer, perpendicular to the line of viewing (of howitzer’s bore axis)
with no cross inclination. If checked by the board, the howitzer should
stay without trunnion axis inclination. The procedure of nil line of
sighting checking, using the board is the same as with the range sport
procedure. In this particular case the muzzle is aligned to right side
graticule, and panorama – to the left graticule.

c. Checking of nil line of sighting for ОП4М-45 sight

For sight check using the range spot, it is necessary to:
• To install the sight in the opening of the cradle bracket of howitzer
to rest, then fasten it by the wing nuts;
• Pull the strings matching the marks on muzzle face and take the
striker mechanism out of the wedge-type bridge block;
• Aligning through the opening in the breech piece wedge and the
center of the strings on muzzle face, lay the muzzle to the range
spot;
• While rotating the small flywheels 25 (fig.55) and 10 (fig.56)
match the top of aiming mark.
If, after doing this procedure, the horizontal string would not match the
nil marks of range scales 1 (fig.58), and the vertical string wouldn’t
match the nil marks 6 of line correction scale and 7 line component
scale, then it comes necessary to make an adjustment:

• Unscrew the screws 11(fig.55) and 7 (fig.56) by two revolutions

and open the lids 12 (fig.55) and 6 (fig.56) of adjustment
mechanisms;
• Rotating the nuts 13 (fig.55) of adjustment mechanism, make
match the graticule vertical string with the nil mark of the line
component scale, and match horizontal string with the nil marks of
the range scale;
• Close the lids of adjustment mechanisms and screw the screws 11
(fig.55) and 7 (fig.56) in to the rest.

The procedure of checking of the nil line of sighting using the board is
the same, as with the range spot, but this procedure needs to match the
bore axis and the optical axis of the sight with the relevant board
graticules (fig.71). The board is posted in 50 meters down from the
howitzer perpendicular to the line of viewing and with no cross
inclination.
 TM01-01-2005-10

Chapter XI

HANDLING OF GUN-HOWITZER WHEN SHOOTING

A. TRANSFORMING OF HOWITZER FROM TRAVELING TO FIRING POSITION

To transform howitzer from traveling position to firing position in the

following order:
1. Disconnect the socket plug from the truck housing and place the cable
in the casing.
2. Get the draw bar off the truck’s hook and put the trials on the ground,
supporting the howitzer handles at the same time.
3. Take the cover sheets away.
4. Release the moving trials from locking and spread apart until they rest
at the howitzer wheel tires.
5. Release the barrel from locking, switch the worm switching handle
from traveling position to firing position, and adjust the barrel
quadrant elevation of 5-8 degrees.

Note. On the other howitzers models it needed to fold the draw bar to firing position
and lock it (when shooting direct laying and of time constrained, the draw bar is
permitted not to be folded).

6. Rotate the jack handles unless clearance appears between the ground
and wheels.
7. Switch the lock 4 (fig.35) off. Disengage the connecting piece 29 of
wheels elevating gear off meshing with teethed ring of steering gear
axis. Elevate the wheels unless the arrester 8 stop at rest 32 welded to
the saddle pin and, mesh connecting piece 29 with the teethed ring of
steering gear axis again; lock the connecting piece 29 by lock 4, fold
the elevating gear handle, and fasten it in U-shaped welded to the
shield bar.
8. Spread the trials to the stop and lock them.
9. Using the right jack handle put the system down to the ground; elevate
the sabot until it stop at the lid 53 (fig.42) and fold the jack handles to
firing position according to the chart (fig.42). The different howitzer
configurations are displayed in pos.82, 83 and 84.

In cases of urgency, it’s allowed to rotate the howitzer on the jack sabot,
for which purpose:
- When the barrel is over the stationed trial, elevate the howitzer by
the jack in a way, to get the moving trials plateau elevated to
250mm over the ground approximately;
- Adjust the barrel quadrant elevation of 60-65 degrees;
- By the gun crew numbers (by two persons at each trial) rotate the
howitzer at the required angle.
10. Install panorama in dial sight socket. Adjust nil settings on the sight
and panorama.
11. Install the sight OП4M-45.
12. When shooting direct fire, open the shield windows.

11-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

13. Drive the hinges to the stop at the hinge arrester 4 (fig.38).

B. HOWITZER SHOOTING PREPARATIONS

1. Clean the barrel, sight and mounting from dirt, wiping thoroughly the
arc and elevating gear axis pinion.
2. Put the wedge-type bridge block out and grease the wedge and breech
mortise of breech piece with a thin grease layer.
3. Put grease from the bore away and examine it
4. Insert the wedge in bridge mortise and test the breeching mechanism.
5. Test the recoil indicator, set it to front position.
6. Check the anti-recoil devices’ rods in the cradle front lid piece.
7. Check any fluid-leaks in recoil absorber cylinder and recuperator
through the glands and valve devices.
8. Test the laying mechanism performance.
9. In an appropriate situation check the nil line of sighting.

C. COLLIMATOR USE

1. Posting collimator beside the gun

Posting the collimator beside the gun (fig.63) is produced in the following
order:
1. Adjust the gun quadrant elevation 18 degrees using the sight (sight 300
according to tangent elevation thousand scale) and rotating mechanism
adjusts the barrel to principle direction.
2. Place the collimator tripod to the left backside 6-8m from the gun
panorama.
3. Take the collimator out of the box along with the cable, socket plug
and connector; put the anti-flash compound on.
4. Fasten the collimator at the tripod as below:
- Loosen the clamping screw of the base-plate socket;
- Put the collimator ball joint in the base-plate socket in such a way,
that its objective would point the panorama direction, pressing the
slightly the ball joint by clamping screw beforehand;
- By using the viewer 9 (fig.62), guide the collimator to panorama
head more precise, at the same time adjusting its cross plane using
the level 13;
- Make last fastening of collimator in the base-plate socket by
clamping screw.
5. At daytime, working with the collimator, install the mirror 32 for net
lightning in a way that the rays from the best-lighted sky sector,
reflected by the mirror would come to the net.
6. If working with the collimator at night or at poor vision conditions, the
electric illumination is required to be switched on.

For this purpose:

11-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

- From the lightning equipment box take the K-1 collimator assigned
battery and fasten it on the tripod, using tripod fastening belt;
- Guide the mirror 32 to the extreme upper cross plane position;
- Rotate the bracket 38 unless reflector 39 stop at the collimator end
face and fasten the bracket in this position by the wing nut 45;
- Plug the connector in the battery socket plug and turn the switch
on;
- Turn the panorama net illumination on. If the net is poorly
observed, then it’s necessary to slide the red light filter away from
the socket of net lightning.

Backwards order of dismantling and packing of collimator apply. The

collimator should be fastened safe on the tripod, to avoid instrument’s
swinging by the wind and occasional pushes, which may interfere its align.
For this purpose the lower and upper wing nuts should be tightened up to
rest. It is advisable to dig the tripod stands in the ground or cover them
round with the stones, depending on the terrain conditions. If a trench is
available, the tripod is likely to place at breastwork in separately dug cave,
where the collimator would be protected from the shell fragments, or from
somebody’s occasional push the instrument to interfere its align within the
routine service. The designated spot location for the collimator (to the left
back side, in 6-8m from the gun panorama) is the most optimal for work.
Meanwhile, if the terrain conditions are inappropriate to locate the
collimator as described, nevertheless it may be placed anywhere beside the
gun to be captured by panorama sight and taking in account the maximum
distance off panorama for the collimator is 13m (with two net strips
visible), and the shortest one is 0.3m (with all 76 net strips being visible).
It is also important to remember that the closer collimator operational spot,
the narrower is the collimator operational range. It means, that the
collimator’s applicability decreases in the cases of significant
displacement of panorama as a result of gun rotation left or right, within
the arc of horizontal fire, same as a consequence of gun mounting shooting
displacements, especially at the position unprepared. With the long
distance collimator place (12-13m), even if it’s possible to use the
collimator with the significant displacements of panorama sight, though
the collimator’ net vision sharpness when aiming with panorama, would
become insufficient.

2. Making collimator marking

Upon installation of the collimator beside the gun, marking and aligning for
shooting procedure is following:

1. To match the gun panorama to collimator, it’s necessary to match the

visible through panorama vertical lines of collimator net, with the
similar dashes of the panorama specific net scale (marked with the
same as of the collimator letters and figures), while rotating
panorama’s head and adjusting its reflector.

11-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

An example of matching of the collimator net’ lines with the panorama

scale dashes displayed in fig. 64. In the field of panorama view is a
collimator, placed in 4m from the panorama approximately (six
collimator lines are visible). Put down the protractor meaning resulted
after collimator marking.
2. To make a gun laying after varying of the protractor settings, or
reconstruction of laying after shots, it’s essential, looking in panorama
and engaging with the elevating gear of the gun and panorama’
reflector at the same time, lay the panorama graticule on the collimator
and match the visible vertical lines of the collimator net with the
similar dashes of panorama’ specific net scale. For the purpose of fair
vision of the collimator when shooting, it’s recommended to wipe
clean the outside lens of the collimator objective from time to time (to
avoid glass misting-up and dirt).

3. Collimator setting providing unified field clinometer for battery formation

parallel sheaf

When shooting with battery formation it’s convenient to use unified

clinometer for all guns. For this purpose, the collimators of all guns are set in
the following order:

1. Prepare the battery formation firing position and lay the reference gun
piece in the direction of main attack (using posts, director, etc.). Form
the parallel sheaf and set the guns quadrant elevation of 18 degrees.
2. The reference gun piece should mark its panorama with its collimator,
and out down the sight meaning.
3. For the panoramas of all the guns set the same bearing scale of dial
sights, as obtained by the reference gun piece. After this set the
collimators beside the other guns in the following order:
- Put the tripod, following the layer’s instructions, in a way that the
tripod base-plate socket would approximately match the vertical
line of the panorama net graticule;
- Post the collimator on the tripod and using the viewer 9 (fig.62),
guide the collimator’ objective to the panorama head, aligning at
the same time the collimator in cross plane using the level 13;
- Following the layer’s instructions, rotate the collimator in the base-
plate socket carefully in a position for the marks of the collimator
net (observed through panorama) would match the similar dashes
of the panorama’ net scale; fasten the collimator in the tripod base-
plate socket by the clamping screw finally and, check matching of
scales of the collimator net to panorama.

N o t e: For the purpose of fire convenience and preparedness time saving, it’s
reasonable to have a nil clinometer of principle direction. For this purpose necessary
to adjust the collimators using 0-00 clinometer. In this case upon parallel sheaf
formation and adjusting the guns quadrant elevation of 18 deg., all collimators would
be set at once.

11-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

D. HOWITZER INDIRECT LAYING

1. For indirect laying of howitzer to target, the Д726-45 sight is used with the
following order of steps:

a. To set ordered laying (according to thousand’ scale, or the one of the

distance drum) and ordered level (angle of sight);
b. To set the bearing scale of dial sight according with the order;
c. Using the howitzer elevating gear set the barrel quadrant elevation,
guiding the cross plane bubble in the middle and retaining it here with the
swinging mechanism;
d. Using the howitzer rotating mechanism and the panorama reflector small
wheel, match panorama graticule or the top of the central set square of
panorama net with the laying point;
e. Check the howitzer laying by quadrant elevation.

E. HOWITZER DIRECT LAYING USING ОП4М-45 SIGHT

1. Laying for stationary target shooting

For howitzer laying for shooting on stationary targets, it’s necessary:

- Looking in the sight eyepiece and rotating the small wheel of laying
mechanism, match a scale mark of the distance scale corresponding to
the ordered sight and shell, with the horizontal string.

N o t e: When shooting it might be ordered to set a half meaning sight (e.g. 12.5).
The ordered sight setting is adjusted approximately. (Dividing of the scale mark by
two).

- Check “0” of the side component scale to match with the vertical line;
- Manipulating with the howitzer rotating mechanism and elevating
gear, match the aiming mark top of the sight net with the aiming spot.

The range corrections are possible to do using the distance

scales (by sight adjustment) or correction scale. Corrections for line should be
done using correction scale. If it ordered “Down 2, Bear Right 0-04”.
Following this order, layer would set sight 2 scale marks down, i.e. 200meters
rotating the small wheel of lateral lead to the left by 0-04, then match the
aiming mark top with the aiming spot, using the howitzer elevating gear.

F. LAYING PROCEDURES WHEN FIRING AT A MOVING TARGET

1. Opening Fire

The Gun Detachment Commander (GDC) designates a target for the gun layer,
estimates the range to the target and a deviation component relating to the speed the
moving target moves with and announces the data to the layer. To estimate the range,

11-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

the GDC uses an anti-tank range card (in case, a range-finder is available he operates
with that device). The layer may also estimate the range using the OP4M-45-series
sights scale. A target speed deviation component, i.e. speed of the target moving in
the sideward direction, is defined by eye. Observing the target through the eyepiece
the layer “catches’ the target into the field of sight view and according to the range
scale sets the announced sight by rotating the knob of the sighting mechanism; the
range scale should correspond to the type of the projectile selected for firing. Then,
rotating the knob of the lead mechanism the layer sets up the announced target speed.
He sets up the value from the part of the scale indicating a target speed deviation
component on which the reader’s arm coincides with the direction the target moves to
(the sight mark therewith moves to the side opposite to the target movement
direction). Then, the layer selects the aiming point on the visible target silhouette and
operating with the howitzer elevating and traversing gear moves the sight mark a little
bit forward, in the direction the target moves. At the instant the sight mark coincides
with the aiming point the layer fires.

Note: When setting maximum angles by range scales, insignificant (to 0-01.5) adjustment
errors may occur. Such confusion can be read from both scales: from the scale that shows a
target speed deviation component and from the movement correction scale. When extreme
scale graduations indicating the target speed deviation component match the vertical line,
then, this may result in small (to 0-00.5) adjustment errors in settings that can be read from
the range scales.

2. Observation of Fire

Fire is observed by introducing corrections in the sight settings due to the conditions
under which the projectile deviates from the target. Observing the fire results through
the binoculars the GDC measures deviation values of the tracer shell by reading from
the binocular reticules. Deviation values (in mils) are tracked from the center of the
tank in vertical and sideward direction and the GDC commands the spotting
corrections to the layer. In case of left (right) deviations or downward (upward)
deflections, the command will follow: (TO THE) RIGHT (LEFT) 0-02; UP (DOWN)
0-04, FIRE. By rotating the sighting and lead knobs the gun layer introduces
corrections using on the scales of deflection. To introduce spotting corrections, the
layer performs the following operations: he finds out with which scale division the
vertical line coincides, then, rotating the knob of the lead mechanism he deflects the
scale division by the announced correction value to the side opposite to the announced
side. For example, if the command “RIGHT 0-02” follows, then, the deflection
relative to the vertical line should be moved 0-02 left, and vice versa.
Range corrections are introduced similarly. After the spotting corrections have been
adjusted the layer establishes aiming and round-shot procedures in the same way he
does it when opening the fire.

Notes: The GDC measures the tracer shell deviations at the instant the projectile is within
the target area. Early or late measuring may result in significant deviation-measurement
errors.

1. At considerable shorts (by 200 m and over) the GDC measures the deviations
and announces the spotting-correction deflection only for a vertical direction.

11-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

G. Howitzer Direct Laying with use of the D726-45-series Sight

The howitzer direct laying on the target with the D726-45-series sight is used
only if the OP4M-45 is not available; with the following steps to be completed:
a. Set the sight vertically by turning the transverse- rolling hand-wheel up to
the moment the cross-leveling bubble stops in the center;
b. Set the dial sight deflection at 30-00 and the reflector value at 0-00;
c. Rotating the tangent-elevation-gear hand-wheel set the announced sight
using the mils scale or one of the range-drum scales; «BP» scale for the
hollow charge shell «BP1»; «HE * -full» scale for HE fragmentation shells;
d. Operating by the howitzer traversing and elevating gear match the dial-
sight graticule, or the top of the central set square, and the target.

Note: When firing at a moving target, The aim-off (lead)-factor is applied to tank figures
or lead is inserted in the deflection. In the first case, the dial-sight graticule or the top of
the central set square is laid not at the target but the laying is done accounting for the aim-
off. In the second case, the 30-00-deflection will differ by the aim-off value.

H. Designing target range by the «ОP4М-45»-series sight scale

1. Detecting a Flat-Trajectory Range

A flat-trajectory range applied to the targets of 1.5m and 2.7m in heights is

designated by using special angle brackets that are visible within the sight and
which are located to the right and to the left of the sight mark.

To define the flat-trajectory range to the target of 1.5m in height:

a. Operating with the howitzer traverse and elevating gear and observing the
target through the sights eyepiece one needs to match the angle brackets
with the 1.5 dial faces (to the right of the central angle bracket) and the
target image;
b. If the target image is equal or larger in height than the distance between
the tops of the angle brackets (by altitude), then, the target is located
within the flat-trajectory range. If the target is less in height than the
distance between the tops of the angle brackets (has clearance), then, the
range to that target exceeds the flat-trajectory range.

To define the flat-trajectory range to the target of 2.7m in height, the same
procedure is required but with the use of angle brackets with 2.7 dial faces (to the
left of the central angle bracket) or with the use of the right edge of the range-
finding scale (3) (Fig.58).

2. Use of a Range-Finding Scale for Range Detection

A range-finding scale serves for detecting the range to the target on the
assumption of the target of 2.7 m in height.

11-7
 TM01-01-2005-10

In such case:
a. Operating with the howitzer traverse and elevating gear and observing the
target through the sights eyepiece the range-finding scale has to be located
such that the target base is on the horizontal line of the range-finding scale,
and the target top point reaches the upper (dotted) line of the scale without
clearance;
b. Define what divisions under the horizontal line of the range-finding scale
will match the imaginary vertical line drawn through the target top point
situated on the dotted slanting line of the range-finding scale. The digit at
matched graduation designates the range to the target (in hectometers, i.e.
hundreds of meters); if the division is not matched the scale values are
read as approximate.

3. Measured-Angle Method for Detecting Range

The range to the target might be detected with the help of sight scales if the
target sizes (in height and in length) are known.

To define the range, it is required:

a. To lay the sight on the object of the known size and define the angle under
which the object is visible;
b. To divide the object length (height) in meters by the angle size value in
mils and multiply the quotient by 1,000.

Example: The length of a front-ways moving tank is visible under the angle of 0-04.
You need to define the range up to the tank if it is 5m in length.

Answer: The range to the tank is:

R = 5/4 x 1,000 = 1,250 m

I. Howitzer Loading and Firing

1. To load a howitzer, complete the following steps:

a. Open a breech mechanism by hand (for the first shot).

b. Following the command take the projectile and set up the fuse.
After the command FIRE has been announced, put the projectile on the
loading trough, move it forward beyond the retaining pawl and ram the
projectile by a rammer such that the slap of the driving band against the
chamber shoulder be clearly heard.

At large angles of quadrant elevation, the projectile should be rammed very

carefully as if the shell case takes the projectile weights it may cause an accident.

11-8
 TM01-01-2005-10

c. Set up the charge following a corresponding command and put the shell
case into the chamber such that the shell case flange is lying on the loading
trough. Ram to the full the shell case to the chamber by a strong hand
push; with this, the flange will move the extractor leavers down from the
detents and the breech mechanism will get closed.
d. With the command GUN, fire a shot pressing the starting handle.

2. Unload the howitzer only after the shot has been fired.

If with the first release of the striker misfire occurs you need to cock the
striker again and trigger one more time. If the striker has been released three
times but the shot does not follow you need to wait for a minute, then, extract
the shell case from the chamber manually opening the wedge-type breech
block, ram a new shell case into the chamber, lay the howitzer on a target and
fire a shot. The shell case should be carefully taken out of the chamber in
order the primer cup of the shell case does not strike against the carriage or
ground. If after the shot has been fired the shell case is not extracted it should
be taken out by a hand-operated extractor (Fig. 74). For this, the primer cup
has to be unscrewed and instead an extractor rod be screwed into the primer
hole; then, put the lever into the rod plate and using the lever extract the shell
case.

3. Surveillance of howitzer in the process of firing

a. When firing, pay a particular attention:

1. Watch the length of recoil, it should be 740-930 mm; the length of

recoil should not be outside the line marked out by the word STOP
on the rule of the recoil indicator. At heavy winter frosts, the recoil-
absorber fluid thickens; as a result, recoils may be short. In such
cases, a reduced charge is used to fire the first one or two rounds. In
the process, the indicator will not show the length of recoil, and the
shell case may be not extracted. At firing with angles of quadrant
elevation, lock operations should be guided, as the breech can be
very close to each of the trails.
2. After the first round has been fired, check a shovel driving; if the
shovels are driven in badly, they should be driven in anew.
3. When firing at the maximum angles of quadrant elevation on marshy
and soft ground, be careful not to allow any strike of the breech
against the ground in the barrel-recoil process. To avoid the strike, a
groove (small ditch) under the breech has to be dug out.
4. If the firing is intense be sure that the windows on the cradle served
for cooling the recoil system are open; during the shot breaks the
breech mechanism should be open in order the barrel be also cooled.
5. At firing breaks, if the weather is bad sight devices and collimators
should be covered.

11-9

6. In case of significant charge deviation from the target, or in case of
great blowback the firing should be stopped, the bore and sight
devices examined, and the accuracy of laying be checked.
J. Howitzer possible faults and remedies in the process of firing
Fault
The retaining pawl does
not operate.
When loading the gun, the
breech mechanism is not
closed or is slack in
closing.
Misfire
The breech mechanism did
not open after the shot had
been fired, the barrel
stayed on the cam.
TM01-01-2005-10
Cause of Defect Remedy
1. The retaining pawl 1. Clean out the recess.
recess is contaminated by
powder gases or 2. Replace the spring by a
desensitizer residues. new one from the spare
2. The retaining pawl parts tools and accessories
spring has broken down. kit.
1. The shell case is in a 1 To extract and replace
dented condition; dents in the shell case. Smooth out
the flange; the primer cup the flange dents by a
is not thoroughly screwed. personal file; screw up the
primer cup.
2. Thick lubricant, dirt or 2. Examine and remove
dents on the breechblock thick lubricant and dirt,
guides and in the breech then, lubricate afresh.
ring bush. Smooth out the dents by a
personal file.
3. The closing spring is 3. Adjust or replace the
loose or broken. spring.
4. Bent extractor leavers 4. Replace the extractor
leavers.
1. The primer cup is faulty. 1. Extract and replace the
shell case.
2. The primer cup is 2. Screw the primer cup
extremely screwed up. flush with the base section
3. Sag or rupture of the of the shell case.
firing pin; the firing pin 3. Extract the shell case;
does not protrude enough replace the striker.
over the breechblock face. 4. Extract the shell case.
4. The main spring is loose Replace the main spring.
or broken. 5. Extract the shell case.
5. Parts of the striker Disassemble the striker
mechanism are dirty or mechanism; clean, oil and
thickly lubricated. reassemble it.
1. The broken firing pin 1. Take out the striker
got stuck. mechanism.
2. The base of the shell 2. Try to open the breech
case is sagged. mechanism by hand. If it
does not open put the
baulk on the loading
trough and striking it open
the breech mechanism
simultaneously.
3. Dirt or dents on the 3. Open the breech
11-10

Fault Cause of Defect
breechblock guides the
breech.
The breech mechanism did 1. The cam spring broke
not open after the shot had and it stayed in the lower
been fired but the barrel position.
moved to the initial
position. 2. The bevel-edge dents on
the positioning stop stayed
in the lower position due
to the cam rolling.
The shell case does not 1. The shell case has
jump out after the shot has swollen.
been fired 2. Powder gases and
desensitizer residues
contaminated the chamber.
3. The clamping pieces of
the extractor broke.
The springs of the
extractor retaining lugs are
sagged or broken.
The wedge-type breech The springs of the
block is not kept in the extractor clamping pieces
lower position sagged or broke.
1. Faults of Recoil System
Leak through the thread of 1. The plug is not
recoil absorber plug 14. thoroughly screwed.
(Fig. 21). 2. The sealing ring of the
plug is damaged.
Leak through the thread of Sealing ring 30 is pressed
blank end cover 29 of the out poorly.
recoil absorber.
Leak through the thread of Sealing ring 39 is pressed
nozzle 40 of the recoil out poorly.
absorber.
Leak through the stuffing The seal nut is under-
box seal of the recoil screwed.
piston rod
Leak through sealing rings 1. Wear or damage of
9 into the connecting sealing rings 9.
tubes. 2. Nuts 42, 2 and 41 get
loose.
11-11
TM01-01-2005-10
Remedy
mechanism by hand or use
the opening technique
mentioned above; remove
the dirt and smooth out the
dents.
1. Replace the spring. If
spare springs are not
available open the breech
mechanism manually.
2. Diminish the cam
rolling pressing the screw-
nut on its axis. Smooth
out the dents on the
positioning stop.
1. Knock out the shell
case.
2. Clean the chamber.
3. Replace the extractor
levers.
Replace by spare springs.
Replace by spare springs.
1. Screw up the plug with
spanner 42-27..
2. Replace the sealing ring
Maul spanner A52833-14
and screw up blank end
cover 29; if leak does not
stop replace sealing ring
30.
Screw up nozzle 40 with
spanner A52830-5; if leak
does not stop replace
sealing ring 39.
Screw up nut 36 with
spanner 42-56.
1. Replace sealing rings 9.
2. Screw up nuts 42, 2 and
41 with spanner A52830-
6.

Fault
Fluid leakage through the
plunger seal (howitzers of
another type)
Leakage through the hole
of the blank end cover of
the counter-recoil
mechanism (CRM)
Leakage through the CRM
stuffing-box seal
Leakage through the CRM
sealing ring
Leakage through the CRM
valve device
Gun recoil is long and
counter-recoil (run-out)
comes with hammering.
Gun recoil is long and
counter-recoil is regular
Recoil is long; failure to
run out.
Recoil is short; counter-
recoil is slack or failure to
run out.
Cause of Defect
On the howitzers of
another type, adjusting nut
76 is under-screwed.
Collars 24 are damaged
(Fig. 22).
1. Collars 42 are damaged.
1. Sealing ring 7 is
insufficiently pressed out.
2. The sealing ring is
damaged.
1. Valve 59 is not
thoroughly screwed.
2. The parts of the valve
device are damaged.
There is little fluid in the
recoil absorber.
1. The recoil indicator is
defective.
2. There is little fluid in
the recoil absorber
Low pressure and not
enough fluid in the CRM
The fluid in the recoil
system and lubricant in the
cradle guide is thickened.
(This may occur in
winter).
11-12
TM01-01-2005-10
Remedy
Screw up adjusting nut 76
with spanner A52830-4.
Replace by new collars.
Disassemble the counter
coil mechanism and
replace the damaged
collars.
1. Contract sealing ring 7
by bolts 4.
2. If leakage does not stop
disassemble the counter-
coil mechanism and
replace the damaged
sealing ring.
1. Carefully screw up
valve 59 by spanner
A72930-53.
2. If leakage does not stop
replace the valve-device
component parts.
Check fluid amount in the
recoil absorber; add if
there is little.
1. Examine and check the
side-block. Replace the
loose or broken spring.
2. Check the fluid amount
and add if required.
Check pressure and fluid
amount; add air and fluid
if required.
In winter, first two shots
have to be fired at a
reduced charge. After
three-five shots are fired
recoil will be normal.
To improve extraction at
the ambient-air
temperature of –30º and
below, it is allowed to
raise the CRM starting
force up to 50+2 kgf/cm2.
 TM01-01-2005-10

Fault Cause of Defect Remedy

Counter-recoil with a
bang, recoil is regular.
Failure to run out; recoil is
regular.
The run-out control valve
is out of order.
1. Low pressure in the
CRM.
2. The compensator is
inoperative.
Disassemble the recoil
absorber; examine fluid
purity and operable
condition of the run-out
control valve.
1. Raise the CRM pressure
to normal value.
2. Examine the
compensator valve.

2. Faulty Laying Mechanisms and Balancing Gears

The traversing mechanism 1. The worm screw and 1. Dismantle, then,

operates in hard.
In the process of enlarging
or reducing the angle of
quadrant elevation, the
elevating gear operates
tight.
When enlarging (or
reducing) the angle of
quadrant elevation, the
elevating gear operates
tight.
Fluid leak through the
collars; fall of pressure in
the balancing gear.
Fall of pressure in the
balancing gear.
worm ring of the saddle
support are dirty.
2. Nadirs on the turns of
the worm screw or worm
ring.
3. No clearance between
the bearing surfaces of the
saddle and saddle support.
1. The shaft sector or shaft
pinion of the elevating
gear is dirty.
2. Dents on the teeth of the
shaft sector or pinion of
the elevating gear
Low (high) air pressure in
the balancing gear.
The collars are defective.
Valve 32 is not screwed in
hard. (Fig. 31).
examine, clean, lubricate
and assemble the
mechanism.
2. Disassemble the
mechanism; carefully
smooth out, lubricate and
reassemble it.
3. Adjust clearance
1. Remove dirt from the
shaft sector or shaft
pinion; then, lubricate
2. Disassemble the
mechanism; then, clean
and examine; smooth out
the bulged metal;
reassemble and lubricate
the mechanism.
Adjust pressure in the
balancing gear with screw
9. (Fig. 20)
Take off the balancing
gear from the gun;
disassemble and examine
it; replace the collars.
Carefully tighten valve 32
by spanner 42-27.

Note: At the fire position, only those faults are eliminated that do not require a
complex disassembling. In addition, faults are cleared subject to a combat
situation and a mission to accomplish. Generally, the guns having serious faults
are to be turned in to the workshop for repair.

11-13
 TM01-01-2005-10

3. Howitzer inspection and maintenance after firing

After firing has been accomplished or if there is a long break in firing:

1. The breechblock has to be partially disassembled and cleaned, the component

parts are flood-lubricated, then, and the breechblock is to be reassembled.
2. The bore is to be cleaned. If the situation does not allow cleaning you have to
lubricate the bore abundantly.
3. Under-firing-condition faults have to be remedied.

11-14
 TM01-01-2005-10

CHAPTER XII

HOWITZER MARCH MODE. TRANSPORTATION

A. MOVING A HOWITZER FROM FIRING TO TRAVELLING POSITION

Moving a howitzer from the firing to the traveling position requires the
following steps:

1. Pull out the shovels out of the ground by a crowbar.

2. Set the barrel along the platform frame at the angle of elevation of 5-8º.
3. On the howitzers having a folding draw bar, fix this bar for a traveling
position.
4. Put a cover on the muzzle brake.
5. Close the breechblock and release the striker.
6. Throw open the barrel-fastening frame, draw down the barrel into the frame
recess as far as the barrel will go, then, raise it by turning the elevating
hand-wheel half-turn; draw down the cap square to the frame, clearance-
free.
7. Raise the howitzer full height by a lifting jack.
8. Unlock and simultaneously bring together the split trails and the fixed trail
insomuch that they do not hinder in lowering wheels.
9. Unlock and turn with a handle the clutch of the wheel-lifting mechanism to
the left, lower the wheels into the saddle pin, against the handle-stop (two
gun-crew persons must help to lower wheels using crank handles).
10. Turn the clutch of the wheel-lifting mechanism to the initial position, lock it
by a locking device, fold the handle and fasten it in the U-shaped supporting
arms welded to the shield.
11. Let the wheels down on the ground by rotating the right handle of the lifting
jack counterclockwise, then, raise the firing platform into the cover sealing
(53) (Fig. 42); fold the jack handles according to the folding scheme.
12. Detach and put the dial sight into the case; set the sight on the aiming rest
(rotate the range drum counterclockwise to the position the dial sight socket
will rest against the sight body).
13. When preparing for a long-continued march, detach and pack the OП4M-
45-series telescopic sight into the case.
14. Give a final join of the split trails and the fixed trail and fasten them by a
connecting rod.
15. Close the openings on the shield.
16. Move the handle of the worm-shift mechanism to the traveling position.
17. Put covers on the sights and the breech piece. When preparing for a long-
continued march, use a general cover.
18. Get on the draw bar on the towing hook.
19. Pull out the electric-installation cable from the shield box; turn it twice
around the barrel and put the plug into the socket on the tractor.

12-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

Note: Fasten the entrenching tool and accessories on the trails in the process of moving
the howitzer to the traveling position.

B. HOWITZER PRE-MARCH EXAMINATION

Before the gun is in motion it is required:
1. To examine the wheels and pay attention to the tire condition. Make a crack
and bend wheel disc control, conduct check of nuts and bolts.
2. Inspect spring suspension and make sure that the lower clearance between
the cranks and the rubber buffers (stoppers) is within 0.5–6 mm. Fill wheel
hubs with a lubricant.
3. Check the stopping reliability of the clutch for the wheel-lifting mechanism.
4. Check recoil pistol rod securing in the cradle cover; the nuts are to be in the
stop position.
5. The plugs locking the fluid holes in the recoil absorber and the recuperator
cap should be safely screwed up.
6. Check whether the trails are fastened correctly and safely, and if the cap
square and the frame are reliably pulled together.
7. Examine and make sure that the fastening nuts, lock pins and locking
devices are faultless and available. Special attention must be paid to the
securing of the saddle trunnion bands.
8. Check the state and correct attaching of all covers.
9. Make control of reliable and correct attaching of all instruments and
accessories.
10. When howitzers are transported to large distances under various conditions
and when they are held in the depot the ОП4М-45-series sight is to be
detached and traveled (kept) in the packing box.
11. The ПГ-1М-series dial sight and the collimator is to be transported in the
packing box and protected against hits and jarring.
12. Check the handle position of the worm-shift mechanism. The handle should
be in a traveling position.

C. HOWITZER HANDLING ON THE MARCH

During travel, the howitzer state should be thoroughly inspected. Damages are
not allowed and the following rules should be observed to avoid them:

1. On the march, follow the traveling mode and do not exceed the regulation
speeds stipulated by the Instruction Manual.
2. During traveling, particular attention should be drawn to the running gear.
You should check periodically:
- Whether the wheel hubs are overheated;
- State of the coupling assembly and the draw bar;
- Clutch stopping ability for the wheel-lifting mechanism;
- Safe travel securing of the trails and barrel;
- Fastening the balancing gear, instruments and accessories

12-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

In case the wheel hubs are heated (overheated) and the lubricant leaks away
it is required to get the wheels down and wash the hubs by kerosene; check,
and if required, loose the tightened nut (9) (Fig. 34), wipe dry and fill with a
fresh lubricant.

3. Take a particular care when moving on forest roads or off-road, and in the
nighttime. Carefully pass the areas that have obstacles: stubs, boulders, deep
ditches, etc.; rate of movement on such tracts should be reduced.
Such moderate movement rate must be observed when passing cross-
country terrains (with shallow ditches, trenches and slopes.
4. On dirty, sleepy and snowy roads, if the movement rate is high the howitzer
skids, thus, before the howitzer turns shift gear to a low one and reduce the
speed avoid hard breaking as this results in the howitzer run on the tractor or
in the howitzer turn, especially on descent areas. The howitzer must be
inspected every stop or halt.

D. INTERIM FAULT HANDLING

On the march, if faults are detected they have to be eliminated at the earliest
opportunity. If you have little time or spare parts are unavailable the fault should be
eliminated by any improvised means.

1. Fasten a wheel with a rope; replace the broken wheel by a wooden thin pole
of 2.5-3 m long and 12-15 cm in diameter. One end will be attached to the
trail and the other will be laid on the ground such that the crank and the
spring-suspension lever are rested on the pole. Attach the lever and the
crank to the pole with a rope. The howitzer must move at a low speed.
2. If the draw bar gets out of order attach the howitzer to the towing hook of
the tractor with a steel rope or chain passing it through the sidepieces of the
muzzle brake or through the trail guardrail and plateau.
3. If the frame or cap square is broken attach the barrel to the fixed trail by a
steel rope or chain.
4. In case the band mechanism is inoperative the trails can be tied together by a
steel rope or chain.
5. Replace lost split or joint pins by wire.
6. If the torsion shafts broke replace them by new ones.

E. AFTER-MARCH INSPECTION
After the march has been completed, especially after swampy areas and water gaps
have been over-passed, or after the march under heavy climatic conditions, the
howitzer must be thoroughly inspected.

For this:
1. Remove, examine, clean and dry the covers.

12-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

2. Clean the bore and breech mechanism, examine and if required lubricate
them; disassemble the breech mechanism, clean and oil the parts;
reassemble it.
3. Wipe the howitzer outer parts with a dry cleaning cloth and oil wherever
necessary.
4. If there is a need, take the wheels away; examine the hubs and bearings.
5. Check the spring suspension.
6. Take measures to remove water, dirt and dust from all hollows.
7. Check the accessories availability and mounting.
8. Examine nuts, bolts, split pins and split rings, and locking devices.
9. In case of a long march, exercise control in compliance with the Instruction
relating to defining and accounting for corrections for shift of the lines of
sight and inadequacy of angles of quadrant elevation when measured by the
sight and the quadrant.

F. HOWITZER TRANSPORT ON FLAT WAGONS

Over long distances, howitzers are transported on flat wagons. Two howitzers are
placed on a four-wheeled flat wagon; three howitzers are placed on a flat bogie
wagon (Fig. 85). To the place of destination, in-service tractors deliver howitzers. At
railway stations, which do not have special loading bays, a loading ramp, made of
sleepers, is required. By a tractor, the howitzer is wheeled onto the ramp level and,
then, is rolled onto the platform.
The following instruments are required to place and secure howitzers on flat
wagons:
Bench axe: 1 piece;
Crosscut saw 1 piece
Nails of 150mm 16 pieces
Hammer of 400-500g 1 piece
Annealed steel wire of 6mm 10 m
Wooden wedges 4 pieces
Studs, 50 x 100mm, 0.5m in length 4 pieces

When placing howitzers, a 20cm distance should be afforded between any guns
standing beside. The howitzers are wire-secured to the wagon sockets. Studs and
wedges are nailed to the floor (at least, two nails are used). Studs are nailed:

1. Nail the studs securing the trails at the trail plateaus such that the long axes of the
studs and howitzer are positioned at a 45º angle.
2. The wheels are secured outside the wheels by four wedges and two studs. Such
securing eliminates the possibility for the howitzers to move in horizontal
directions.
3. To avoid moving in a vertical direction, the howitzer wheels and the trail lifting
rails or the draw bar be attached to the wagon by an annealed steel wire folded in
two. The spare parts tools and accessories kit (the Russian abbreviation of the
spare parts, tools, and accessories kit is ЗИП) is placed at the breech in boxes;
nailed studs are used to fasten the boxes.

12-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

CHAPTER XIII

MATERIEL INSPECTION AND FAULT HANDLING

A. GENERAL DIRECTIVES
Materiel examination is required in order to maintain it in a good serviceable
and operational (warlike) condition.
Inspections must be systematic and have to be conducted by the officers responsible
for the materiel and appointed by the commander of a military unit in compliance
with the requirements of Internal Service Regulations. Inspections are expedient in
servicing (vehicle maintenance) days that are assigned to maintain the materiel in
operational readiness. According to the plan approved by the commander of a
military unit, an ordnance officer, artillery workshop officers and gun technicians
have to supply inspectors with the issued accessories and special instruments required
for spot-check inspections and ensure an immediate elimination of identified faults. In
addition to prescribed materiel inspections periodical inspectorial examinations are
also conducted. An assembled howitzer is also examined in corpore after each
dismantling and repair, and after a howitzer arrives at a military unit.

The materiel inspection is assigned to assess:

a. Technical condition of the materiel;
b. Storage and care status;
c. Recording status;
d. Knowledge of materiel and ammunition by a military personnel;
knowledge of handling rules and regulations relating to materiel and
ammunition care, storage and examination.

Assessment of the materiel technical condition includes the appraisal of its

serviceability and fitness for work under combat conditions. All this should satisfy
the demands of this Instruction Manual and general directives relating to storage and
care of gun armament and ammunition in troops. If the identified faults are significant
and there is no possibility to eliminate them on-site (in the military unit), then, it is
required to call for a repair-service field team or to send the materiel to the repair
service. Along with the materiel, a howitzer data card indicating the damage or fault
data should be also sent. Subject to the bore wear extend and level of repair, the repair
service bodies, after the faults have been detected and cleared, categorize the howitzer
in accordance with the reference book establishing categories of gun armament. This
Chapter describes the sequence of the materiel examination procedures and remedial
techniques for most frequently occurring faults that may be eliminated during the
operation process with no special equipment applied. In all other cases the materiel
damages are handled with the use of the Manual pertaining to repair of gun
armament.
Prior to examination it is required:
a. To move the howitzer from the traveling position to the firing position;
b. To remove lubricant from the bore; wash the bore with kerosene and wipe
dry;
c. To clean and wipe dry all howitzer outer parts.

13-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

On the assembled howitzer, check it for completeness; examine operable condition of

the mechanisms, clearances and backlashes; check sighting devices. Examine parts
with disassembled mechanisms only if those are out of order. Disassembling is not
allowed unless repair or replacement of assembly units (indicated in Chapter VIII) is
required. In addition, disassembling of dead joints, bush sections and other details, the
reassembling of which affects their fitting and results in additional adjusting and other
operations is not allowed. When examining the howitzer, it is recommended to check
the spare parts tools and accessories kit for completeness, and its condition.

B. BARREL EXAMINATION

1. Visual Inspection

The barrel outer surface must be clean and painted. Minor mechanical damages
– dents, scorings, nicks and scratches – are not subject to removal. Smooth out
the bulged metal by a personal file and clean by emery paper under supervision
of a gun technician. Clean the spots with a damaged paint in the same way.
Paint the cleaned and bare spots. Painting is to be done in accordance with the
directions of the Manual regulating storage and care of gun armament and
ammunition in troops. Prior to restoring of paint, oil the bare spots thoroughly.
If the outer dents or nicks are deep check whether they do not penetrate onto an
interior surface as internal bulges.

Firing is not allowed if the barrel has internal bulges

Check the securing of the clutch and breech attached to the tube. Their
displacement from the tube is not allowed. The key-bed walls of the breech and
the tube should match. Check thoroughly if there are cracks on the outer surface
of the tube and breech piece; if you doubt about them remove the paint and
examine the spot through a magnifier. In order to be completely sure about the
cracks remove a chip about 0.25 mm deep from the spot by a hypothetical
crack. If the crack exists the chip will fall into two pieces, and a dark fringe will
be visible on the bright surface. If the crack is ascertained the barrel should be
replaced.

Firing from the howitzer having a crack on the barrel is forbidden

If the examination reveals local enlarging in size of the tube outer shape
(swelling) and the measuring followed confirms swelling the barrel is
recognized unfit and is to be replaced. When a howitzer barrel has been
replaced clearances must be left between the opening lever (2) (Fig.15) and the
cam (43) (Fig. 20). Cleats (38) and (41) and surfaces «г» and «д» have to be
filed or built up. The clearances are examined with the barrel drawn off by the
hydraulic pump (52-И-035) or by a special device designed for drawing barrels
off (Сб42-29). There should be no rust, dirt, or dents in the recesses and holes

13-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

of the breech piece. If those are found rust and dirt should be removed and
dents smoothed out. The clinometer plane on the breech piece must be clean,
without dents or scorings. The bulged metal on the clinometer plane that
impedes setting a field clinometer has to be removed by a scraper under the gun
technician’s guidance. Check the securing of a muzzle brake. The muzzle brake
is safely fastened by a nut and fixed by a dowel. The screw nut must be locked
by a stopper, and the stopper’s securing bolts and stop plates be tied up by wire.

Axial and radial unsteadiness of the muzzle brake is not allowed

Check the securing of charger bushes. Fitting failure or the loosening of screws
and bolts that hold the bushes is not allowed. Check how safely the bolts
attaching the draw bar to the muzzle brake are tightened up; also check wire
lockage. The loosening of bolts that secure the draw bar is not admissible.

2. Bore Examination

The bore has to be examined with the breech mechanism open. If the light is
dim put a white sheet of paper in front of the muzzle face. In the process of bore
examination, the following disturbances can be found: rust, copper fouling,
flame erosion, land indents; dents and dimples in the rifled section of the bore
and in the chamber; bore wear. The rust must be immediately removed. For
this, wet the rusted spot abundantly by kerosene and after the rust softens
remove it with a cleaning cloth impregnated with kerosene. After the rust has
been removed wipe the damaged spots dry with a cleaning cloth. If this method
does not work efficiently the rust must be removed by charcoal powder mixed
with spindle oil. Do not remove the remained rust marks or flaws, as they are
not the motive for the barrel rejection. Copper fouling occurs after the first shots
have been fired. This happens as a result of copper drag from the driving bands
of projectiles. Uniform coppering of the bore does not encumber firing. Copper
fouling is removed by a special solution for a bore chemical cleaning. Flame
erosion emerges as a result of high temperatures and high pressures exerted at a
shot. Flame erosion is first developed on the surface of the cone connecting the
rifled part of the bore with the chamber and, then, it emerges in the rifled
section at the grooves head. When the flame erosion starts to develop a dull
ring comes into view (the smallest unconnected cracks). Gradually, the dull
ring expands resulting in emerging fines. The fines change into the net of
longitudinal and cross cracks. Flame erosion impairs the ballistic qualities of
the bore: it affects the muzzle velocity, contributes to increase of dispersion and
the diminishing of the range ability. As the flame erosion grows the breech
chamber lengthens and this is the main motive for the barrel rejection. Bore
wear depends upon the number of shots, conduct-of-fire conditions, gun care
and state of ammunition. Wear is distinguished by a uniform enlarging of land
and rifling diameters and by the smoothing of the rifling fields. Bore wear also
results in the loosing of muzzle velocity. Decrease in the muzzle velocity
resulted from wear and flame erosion may be defined when firing sighting shots

13-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

or because of the lengthening of the breech chamber. A chamber wear gauge is

designed to measure the length of the chamber. Periodically (each 400-500
shots), check whether the breech chamber is lengthening; enter the measuring
results into the howitzer book. The barrel category may be changed in
accordance with the special instruction. Small dents and dimples on the bore
rifling section do not hinder in firing but if they are at the head of rifling, then,
they contribute to the erosion growth. A gun technician must handle major dents
and dimples that affect loading; a personal file, should carefully smooth them
out first then, by a fine emery paper; only a bulged metal has to be removed.
When examining the bore, it is recommended to remove casts only from the
damaged spots; this will give an opportunity to identify damage nature and
extent with greater accuracy.

C. EXAMINING A SEMI-AUTOMATIC BREECH MECANISM AND

DEFLECTOR ASSEMBLY WITH A LOCKING SYSTEM

For inspection, a semi-automatic breech mechanism should be disassembled; be sure

that all parts are available and examine them. It is required to clear out and examine
all recesses and holes in the breech section designed for breech mechanism parts.
The inspection may reveal rust, dents and scorings on the surfaces; it may also show
to what extent the parts are worn out, whether they are broken or the springs are
sagged. The rust should be removed by cleaning. Do not remove the remained rust
fines or flaws, as they are not a cause for rejection. Remove the bulged metal by a
personal fine and smooth out by a fine emery paper. A gun technician should guide
all procedures. Replace the broken parts by new details. Replace the sagged springs
and worn parts that do not meet the operation requirements. If sore spots emerge on
the bearing areas of the figured slots (г) (Fig. 16) the bulged metal that sets forth over
the lateral surface must be smoothed out. Pay special attention to the juxtaposed
surfaces of the inner cocking lever and release lever. If the working areas of those are
worn out the striker can get self-triggered when closing the breech mechanism. The
inner cocking lever and release lever with the areas worn-out should be replaced.

Before the breech mechanism is reassembled coat breech recesses and holes with
a thin layer of oil.

After the breech mechanism has been reassembled it is required:

1. To check how the components act when opening the breech mechanism.
Press the LBM catch plunger (1) (Fig. 15), pull the lever back and then,
move it forward to the full. The striker should get armed and the wedge-type
breechblock should smoothly go down and be reliably kept in the lower
position by the upper lugs of the extractor levers. One of the extractor
levers may have a small gap, i.e. the wedge-type breechblock may be kept
by only one extractor lever, but the other must not spring off the cam.

13-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

When opening the breech mechanism, the following disturbances may be

found:

• The LBM catch plunger moves with difficulty and the tooth of the
slide valve does not spring behind the backstop lug (14); dents on the
backstop, lever or catch plunger may appear to be the cause of this
fault. Those devices may be also bent, or the spring of the catch
plunger may be loose;
• The lever (74) (Fig. 9) does not catch on (mesh) the crank actuating
shaft; the causes are dents on the lever or the catch plunger; or a
sagged or broken spring (76);
• The striker is not armed. This may happen because of collapse of
bearing areas of the inner cocking lever or release lever; this may
cause the striker’s self-triggering;
• The retaining pawl of the projectile stays recessed when the wedge-
type breechblock is open. This fault may take place if the recess in the
wedge for the retaining pawl is fouled, or its spring is broken;
• The wedge-type breechblock moves down with difficulty; this fault
may be caused by dints and dents on the pressing or stop hollow metal
cylinder of the semi-automatic breech closing mechanism; dents on the
bearing areas of the wedge-type breechblock and breech mortise;
flaring of the screw heads of the extractor lever cams; shaft bends of
the crank rollers;
• The wedge-type breechblock is not held in the lower position by the
extractor levers. This may occur because of the loose or broken
springs (53) (Fig. 15), fouling breech ring bushes, collapse or breakage
of upper lugs of the extractor levers;

2. Check the action of the mechanisms when the breech mechanism is closing.
Move the handle (62) back (Fig. 20). The extractor levers will release the
wedge-type breechblock and it will vigorously go up.
When closing the breech mechanism, the following disturbances may
take place:

• The extractor levers do not release the wedge-type breechblock;

this may occur because of a large clearance between the finger (50)
of the lever (Fig. 19) and the lever (19) (Fig. 15); With the open
breechblock and raised lever normal clearance is 6-8 mm, and it is
regulated by the length of the connecting rod. On the howitzers of
another type, the length of a steel rope may regulate clearance;

• The wedge-type breechblock moves up inertly. The causes are

dents on the bearing areas of the wedge and wedge socket of the
breech, under-compression or sag of the closing spring and shaft
bends of the crank rollers.

13-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

3. Check the operation capability of the mechanisms at the moment the striker
triggers off. Trigger the striker off with the starting handle (30) (Fig. 19)
The striker release should be precise and sharp; the starting handle should
vigorously come back to the initial position. If the striker does not release it
may happen because of the striker self-triggering or it may be an enlarged
clearance between the end (г) of the lever (68) (Fig. 19) and the release lever
(31) (Fig. 15); normal clearance is 1.5-3 mm.

If the striker release is inert (dull) this may be caused by:

• Fouling or consistent greasing of the striker and the wedge
Socket;
• Sag or breakage of the striker spring;
• Dents on the striker or in the wedge socket.

4. Check the action of the mechanisms when re-cocking.

• Re-cock the striker with the handle (31) (Fig. 19) and trigger off.
If the striker does not re-cock this may be caused by a big
clearance between the finger (6) of the lever (19) and the lever
(65) (Fig. 15); normal clearance is 2-3 mm.

5. Check the action of the locking mechanism. For this:

• Set the +22º angle of quadrant elevation for the barrel and direct
it such that the breech piece will be found on one of the trails
(the roller of the locking mechanism should be on the collar lug).
With such barrel position at the angles of quadrant elevation
+(22-70º) the finger (26) (Fig.19) of the locking lever (21) is at
the bearing surface (a) of the master cam (20); when the handle
moves back the spring (35) is compressed but the connecting rod
stays rigid, i.e. exertion not pass on the parts of the release
mechanism and the striker will not release. If the locking
mechanism does not hold the release this may be caused by bent
levers or bent connecting rods of the locking mechanism and a
big clearance between the finger (26) (Fig. 19) and the bearing
surface of the cam (20); normal clearance is 0.2-2.5 mm.

6. Check the action of the locking system above all trails, for this:
• Set such a position for the barrel that the breech piece will be
found between the trails (The roller of the locking mechanism
must be in the collar recess). The master cam (20) under the
action of the spring (44) will go up and will not impede the
striker release at all angles of quadrant elevation. If in such
position of the barrel at the angle of quadrant elevation over 22º
the release is locked it may be caused by bent levers or bent rods,
or by dents (or adhered dirt) in the recesses of the master cam on
which the roller of the locking mechanism runs;

13-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

• Set the 70º angle of quadrant elevation for the barrel (the breech
mechanism must be closed). Draw the barrel back by 500-600
mm with an air-hydraulic pump. Turn the rotating part of the
howitzer such that the clearance between the breech piece and
the trail will be 15 mm. Not changing the barrel direction, roll it
on and check if the striker releases.
• If no release follows the locking system operates right. In such
sequence, check the lock operation setting the breech on both
sides of each trail. A bent lever containing a locking-mechanism
roller may cause inadequate lock operation; a bent bracket (a) of
the saddle, or an enlarged backlash in the joints of the locking
parts under wear can also produce such negative effect. The
locking mechanism shall be inspected only after the rebuilding.

7. Check the firing pin protrusion, for this:

• Take out the wedge-type breech block from the breech ring bush
and release the striker;
• Take out the cover, the main spring and the striker; clean and
slightly lubricate the parts;
• Put the striker and the main spring into the mortise and secure
with a cover.
Check the firing pin protrusion by template gage A52415-1. If
the firing pin protrudes by less than 2 mm or by over 2.38 mm
beyond the breechblock surface it is required to replace the
striker.

D. INSPECTION OF THE CRADLE AND RECOIL SYSTEM

1. Examining the Cradle

When examining the cradle, check:

1. If the cradle has cracks on the casing. It is not allowed to fire from
the howitzer with cracks on the cradle casing.
2. If the sight mount is not bent, or the sight mount is safely secured.
The cradle with a bent mount should be sent for repair.
3. If the elevating gear sector is safely fastened.
4. Whether the spring is not sagged or the cam or the semi-automatic
breech mechanism is not broken. If the cam in the unconfined
position is loosely attached to the bearing surface the cam spring
should be replaced.
5. Condition and reliability of the rubber buffer. If it is damaged or
considerably weary it should be replaced.
6. If the head of the bolt serving as a support for the saddle-locking
device is skipped, the locking device confines the angle of
quadrant elevation of the barrel in the traveling position.

13-7
 TM01-01-2005-10

If the cradle guides, cogs of the elevating-gear section or the clinometer

plane have dents or dimples that impede setting a field clinometer; a scraper
or personal file should remove the bulged metal.

2. Inspection of Recoil System

When examining the recoil assembly, check:

1. If the cylinders of the recoil absorber and run-out speed controller
in the breech band and the rod in the cradle cover are safely
secured. Clearances between the cylinder collars are not allowed;
the strengthening nuts must be screwed on to the full and safely
stopped.
2. If there are dints on the cylinders. If the cylinders are in a dented
condition the recoil devices must be sent for repair.
3. The plunger of the valve of the balancing gear must move in the
operation condition within 9-11 mm. Check the plunger move in
the valve-closed position (the barrel is drawn back, the plunger
position is fixed by a ball) and in the full counter-recoil position of
the barrel. With the barrel run out, the plunger move must be at
least 5 mm marginally.
4. If the recoil devices “suffer” from leakage:
- Through the stuffing box seal of the recoil piston rod: The
stuffing-box (36) nut is under-screwed (Fig. 21), or the
stuffing box is worn out.
- Through the threading of the blank end cover (29) of the
recoil absorber: weak squeezing or damage of the sealing
ring (30);
- Through the union (40) of the recoil absorber: weak
squeezing or damage of the sealing ring (39);
- Through the sealing rings (9): the sealing rings (9) are worn
out or damaged; disassemble the valve of the balancing
gear and replace the rings;
- Through the union nuts: the nuts (42), (2) and (41) are
under-screwed, or the nipples are damaged;
- Through the thread of the plug (14): the plug is under-
screwed, or the sealing ring (15) is damaged;
- Through the rectifier of the recuperator: the rectifier (59) is
under-screwed (Fig. 22) or the parts of the rectifier are
damaged;
- Through the flange seal of the recuperator: the collars (42)
are damaged;
- Through the sealing ring (7) of the recuperator: the ring (7)
is not thoroughly squeezed or damaged;
- Through the hole of the blank end cover of the recuperator:
collars (24) are damaged;

13-8
 TM01-01-2005-10

- Through the thread of the plug (35): the plug is under-

screwed.

Remove the leak from the oil-seal packing of the brake and from
the sealing rings by squeezing.
5. Check the condition of the recoil piston rods and around-the-piston
section of the working cylinder of the recuperator; for this: Draw
the barrel back using an air-hydraulic pump or the barrel-drawing
device;
- Put a 130-150 mm blocking lumber between the flanks of
the cradle and breech piece; let the fluid out of the around-
the-piston space; separate the pump hose and the
recuperator cover;
- Unscrew the recuperator cover;
- Wipe the rods and around-the-piston part of the recuperator
cylinder with a soft cleaning cloth, examine them;
- Screw the recuperator cover onto the same place, join the
pump, draw the barrel back, put out the blocking lumber,
let the fluid out and unpipe the pump.
- Clean darkening on the chrome-plated parts with a clean
cloth. If the darkened stains are not removed leave them as
they are.
Do not use charcoal powder or abrasive materials for
cleaning chrome-plated parts.
If the chrome coating on the chrome-plated parts is
damaged turn the howitzer in for repair.

Check:

6. Fluid quantity and quality in the recoil absorber and recuperator.

7. Air (nitrogen) pressure in the recuperator.

When disassembling the recoil system, check the state of the chrome-plated
coating on the rods and the cylinder, serviceability of the stuffing boxes,
sealing rings and collars; check corrosion evidence on the non-chrome-
plated parts, their availability and condition. Replace the worn-out stuffing
boxes and sealing rings that do not ensure adequate sealing. Replace worn-
out, damaged rubber collars or those having lost elasticity. Smooth out small
nadirs on the piston jacket of the recoil absorber rod and on the moderator
jacket by a personal fine removing only the bulged metal.

13-9
 TM01-01-2005-10

E. INSPECTION OF SADDLE, BALANCING GEAR AND LAYING

MECHANISMS

1. Examining the Saddle

The examining of the saddle may reveal the following faults:
1. Nicks and dents. Smooth out, removing only the bulged metal, those
that do not affect the strength performance of the saddle and do not
impede the mechanisms operation.
2. Cracks on the saddle are not allowed. If such, the saddles are to be
repaired.
3. Break of the disc springs. The disc springs (30) (Fig. 25) having flaws
have to be replaced.
4. Wear of rubber gaskets. Worn-out rubber gaskets must be replaced.
5. Bent brackets. If the brackets (a) in which the handle of the deadlock is
secured are bent they should be straightened out in cold state.
6. The locking device (14) fails to turn on. It may be caused by fracture
evidence in the spring. Replace the spring.

2. Checking Elevating Gear Performance

At all angles of quadrant elevation, the elevating gear must work smoothly,
without jerks and jams. Handle force for the elevating hand-wheel in a steady
motion should not exceed 8 kgf. Examination of the elevating gear performance
may reveal stiff movement and an added backlash to the hand-wheel. If the
hand-wheel moves stiffly in both directions this disturbance may be caused by:
- Dents in the cradle section and on the shaft pinion of the
elevating gear;
- Fouling the elevating-gear section and shaft;
- Wrapping the elevating-gear casing due to the bent saddle
bracket;
- Tight squeeze of the thrust bearings (2) and (3) (Fig. 27) of the
worm (is regulated by the gasket seals (12));
- Tight squeeze of the taper roller bearings of the shaft (regulated
by the gasket seals (61)).
If stiff movement of the elevating gear is found in the process of one-direction
rotation of the hand-wheel this may be caused by abnormal air (nitrogen)
pressure in the balancing gear. The backlash value can be acquired at the angles
of quadrant elevation of 0, 30 and 70º.
The examination procedure:
1. Put the dial sight into the socket.
2. Lay the dial-sight graticule on an immovable object (point); this
procedure is established at one of the above-pointed angles when the
hand-wheel is rotated in one direction.
3. Draw graduation lines on the hand-wheel rim and the stationary
assembly.
4. Give two or three turns to the hand-wheel in one and the same direction.

13-10
 TM01-01-2005-10

5. Rotating the hand-wheel in the opposite direction lay the dial-sight

graticule on the same point.
6. Draw a graduation line on the hand-wheel against the line available on
the stationary assembly and measure the distance through the arc
between the marked graduation lines; this distance will show the
backlash value. The elevating-gear backlash shall be no more than one-
fourth turn of the hand-wheel.
The causes of the added backlash may be as follows:
- Wear of the key connection of the hand-wheel hub and drive roll;
- Wear of the worm bronze bearing sleeves.
- Wear of the worm-and-worm-wheel;
- Wear of cogs of the shaft pinion and the section.

After the backlash inspection has been completed, it is required to check an

overall vertical play of the barrel. To define the vertical play, the barrel has to
be raised by the muzzle brake with an exerted force of 20 kgf. Measure the
angle of quadrant elevation by a clinometer (quadrant). Press the muzzle brake
down with the same exerted force and measure the angle of quadrant elevation
again. The obtained angular difference will give the value of overall vertical
play of the barrel. The allowed play is to 0-08. The play is examined in the
firing position, with the angle from 0º to +2º.

3. Defining Pressure in the Balancing Gear; Inspection

Check pressure in the balancing gear for this:

- Set the 70º angle of quadrant elevation for the pendulous
howitzer piece;
- Screw out the plug (38) from the valve-body cage (Fig. 31);
- Screw T- joint Сб42-25 with a pressure gauge in the same cage;
- Carefully unfasten the valve (32) by a spanner turning the valve
by one revolution and read the pressure on the manometer scale
by the needle deflection.
+2
Normal pressure in the balancing gear must be 63 kgf /cm2.
−4
Abnormal pressure is the result of bad regulation, jump of temperature, or fluid
and air leak through the sealing device or valve; in addition, air can leak through
the thread of the upper trunnion ball if the sealing ring (29) is pressed loosely.
Tight squeezing of the collars (measure 57±1 mm is not observed) or damaged
collars might be a cause for leaking fluid and air through the sealing device of
the balancing gear. In case the collars (16) are faulty or damaged, it is required
to take away and disassemble the balancing gear, and replace the faulty collars.
Air leak through the valve device may be caused by an under-screwed valve or
damaged valve cone.

13-11
 TM01-01-2005-10

4. Traversing Gear Inspection

A traversing gear over the range of angles of deflection must operate smoothly,
without jerks and jams. A hand-wheel exerted force in a steady motion must not
exceed 7 kgf. Examination of the traversing dear performance may reveal a stiff
movement and an added backlash.

A stiff movement may be caused by:

a. Fouling the worm ring of the saddle support or of the traversing
worm;
b. Fouling bogie wheels of the saddle;
c. Nadirs on the worm turns or the teeth of the worm ring;
d. Lacking clearance between the bearing surfaces or the saddle and
saddle support;
e. Dents on the bearing surfaces or the saddle and saddle support;
f. Fouling the drive pinions;
g. Tight squeeze of the flat-thrust bearing (67) (Fig. 29) by the
cover (69) (is regulated by the gasket seals (68)).

Backlash of the traversing gear might be defined in all four positions each 90
degree interval at the horizontal position of the barrel.

The examination procedure:

a. Set the dial sight in the dial sight socket.
b. Rotating the traversing hand-wheel in one direction lay the dial-
sight graticule on an immovable object (point).
c. Draw graduation lines on the hand-wheel rim and the stationary
assembly.
d. Give two or three turns to the hand-wheel in one and the same
direction.
e. Rotating the hand-wheel in the opposite direction lay the dial-
sight graticule on the same point.
f. Draw a graduation line on the hand-wheel against the one
available on the stationary assembly and measure the distance
through the arc between the marked graduation lines; this
distance will show the value of the backlash. The traversing-gear
backlash shall be no more than half-turn of the hand-wheel.
The causes of the added backlash might be:
g. Wear of the key connection of the hand-wheel hub and drive
pinions;
h. Loose squeeze of the thrust bearing (67) by the cover (69);
i. Worm wear
An overall horizontal play of the barrel shall be no more than 0-10 and is
checked like a vertical play. Angles are measured by readings on the bearing
scale of the dial sight or on the tangent scale of the ОП4М-45-series sight.

13-12
 TM01-01-2005-10

5. Examining Parts of Disassembled Balancing Gear and Laying Mechanism

When disassembled, all parts of the mechanisms must be examined; they have
to be checked for completeness and state. Replace damaged or worn-out
parts. Rust on the parts is not acceptable. Smooth out the dents on the
finished parts removing only a bulged metal. Small nicks on the outer
balancing cylinder are allowable if they do not hamper an assembling
procedure and operation. The internal cylinders must be checked for the
purpose of examining the chrome-plated coating; do not smooth out the
coating. The hub and tooth ring of the worm wheel shall be reliably
interconnected. The worm wheel shall not have an axial or radial play on the
shaft splines. The traversing worm shaft must be straightened out when cold;
twist-off is not acceptable. Remove (when cold) nicks on the accessory box
of the traversing gear that hamper the mechanism performance.

F. EXAMINATION OF RUNNING GEARS, WHEELS, WHEEL-LIFTING

GEAR, GUN SHIELD, AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
1. Examining Running Gears
When examining wheels and axles, the following disturbances might
be revealed:
a. Break of the torsion shaft. The broken or cracked torsion shaft
shall be replaced.
b. Dents on the running-gear axle. Smooth out the dents.
c. Wear of brass bushings. Replace the worn-out bushings.
d. Cracks on the levers. The cracks are not acceptable. The
cracked levers are to be repaired.
e. Buffers wear. Replace the worn-out buffers.
f. Dents on the crank-pin threads. Smooth out the dents by a three-
square file. Finger twist-off is not allowable.
g. Break of racers. Replace the bearing with a broken racer by a
new one.
h. Wear of sealing rings. Replace the worn-out sealing rings (15)
(Fig. 34).

Note: Play of the levers (18) and (20) (Fig. 32) on the splined running-gear axle shall
be about 5 mm at the end of the lever. Clearances between the cranks and rubber
buffers shall be held within 0.5-6 mm.

2. Examining a Wheel-Lifting Gear

When examining such mechanism, the following faults may be found:
i. The clutch (29) (Fig. 35) does not enter into the mesh with the
toothed ring of the running-gear axle, or it moves over it with
difficulty. The causes of this fault are dents on the half-coupling
of the saddle or on the toothed ring of the running axle; dirt
between the stop block (p) and the one welded to the bracket (49)
(Fig. 25) of the saddle;

13-13
 TM01-01-2005-10

j. The stopper (4) (Fig. 35) is not turned on. This might be caused
by dents in the recess for a stopper, the recess fouling, or spring
(5) break;
k. The connecting rod (17) is bent; the bent rod should be
straightened cold.

3. Examining a Gun Shield

The lower shield must be fixedly fastened on the brackets of the saddle. The
detachable sections of the shield must be easily hinged out and reliably held
by latches in the on-position. Fragment and bullet marks on the shield are
allowable if they do not cause cracks or splits and if they do not hinder the
gear operations. With cracks or splits, or if the rivets loosen the shield
covering is to be repaired.

4. Electrical Equipment Inspection

The electrical equipment has to be examined when the howitzer is in a

traveling position. Prior to the plug connection move the plug-switch (5) to
the position of 12 or 24v as requires the on-board electric system of the gun
tractor. Connect the plug with the socket on the tractor; when the ignition
shall be switched on the clearance light flares up; when you press the foot-
brake pedal stop-light is on. Wrap around the wire sections with disrupted
insulation by an insulation tape.

G. EXAMINATION OF SADDLE SUPPORT, TRAILS AND LIFTING JACK

1. Examining a Saddle Support and Trails

The following faults might be discovered when inspecting the saddle

support and trails:
a. Cracks on the saddle support and trails (are not accessible).
b. Axletree locking gears fail to include. If the trails are not on
brake in the firing position this disturbance may be caused by
dents on the locking gears, or by bent locks. Smooth out the
dents on the bearing surface and cogs of the worm crown
removing only a bulged metal.
c. Bent traction or tightening-device lever. Straighten up when
cold those bent devices (27) and (2), respectively (Fig. 38);
cracks are not allowed.
d. Break of holders. Replace the holders of the entrenching tool.
e. Bent shovels. Those are to be straightened up when cold; replace
the exhaustingly worn-out shovels by new ones.

13-14
 TM01-01-2005-10

2. Examining a Lifting Jack

The following faults might be discovered when examining the jack:

a. Tight rotation of the drive pinions when the jack lifts the
howitzer or the howitzer is lowered onto the ground. The
probable causes are: an unadjusted gears engagement, a bent
screw (30) (Fig. 42) or a fouled jack. Toothing is adjusted by
selecting appropriate gaskets; the housing (43) with the gear ring
(49) is displaced axle due to varying thickness of the gaskets (37)
and (68); axle displacement of gears (22) and (100) is dependent
upon the gaskets (20) selection.
b. Tight rotation of the right handle when the howitzer is lowered
onto the ground. The cause is a fouled brake or complete lack of
lubricant on the brake parts. To clear the fault, disassemble the
brake, thoroughly clean all the parts, wipe them dry and, then, oil
the rollers (94), disc (95), and internal surface of the bush (19);
the coupling face (72) is reversed to the disc (95). Lubricate the
indicated parts by an oil-impregnate tissue paper; the lubricant
must correspond to the Table of Lubricants.
c. Spontaneous howitzer lowering (the brake is not engaged or does
not trig). If the brake is not applied you must set it, for this:
Holding the left handle rotate the right handle clockwise and
select freewheeling. Non-braking may take place due to thick-
film lubrication of the brake parts, sagged springs (92) or fouled
spring seats. To eliminate fault, disassemble the brake, remove
the excess oil and reassemble the brake. In case of spring sag,
replace the springs.
d. One or two jack balls are lost. Replace the whole set (use the
spare parts tools and accessories kit).
e. The firing platform is deformed. Set the platform right.
f. As a result of the jack long service, metal interferences can be
found on the borders of the spiral grooves of the housing (43)
and screws (30) and (46) due to the roll-on evidence. This may
cause wear of the guide bushes (28), (48) and (60). Examination
contributes to revealing metal interferences on the assembled
article, with the jackscrews fully extended. Revealed
interferences on the screws (30) and (46) are to be smoothed out;
for this:
l. Detach and dismount the jack;
m. By a personal file, smooth out the metal bulges outside the
screws (30) and (46) and the internal surfaces of the housing (43)
and screw (46);
n. Make bevel edges 1×45° on the outer borders of the spiral
grooves of the screws (30) and (46)

13-15
 TM01-01-2005-10

o. Prior to assembling, clean the screws and the housing by

benzene (gasoline), wipe dry with a cleaning cloth, and lubricate
them.

H. EXAMINATION AND CHECK OF SIGHTING DEVICES

Make out a complete check of sighting devices in the following sequence:

a. Prepare the howitzer for a check of sighting devices ∗
b. Check the field clinometer*;
c. Check the quadrant (gunner’s) clinometer
d. Define backlashes of the Д726-45-series sight mechanism and
ПГ-1М-series dial sight;
e. Identify an expendable longitudinal play and lateral play of the
Д726-45-series sight;
f. Check the deviation characteristic of the longitudinal level and
cross level of the Д726-45-series sight;
g. Check zero settings of the Д726-45-series sight *;
h. Check the zero line of the Д726-45-series ОП4М-45-series
sights*;
i. Check the setting of the Д726-45-series sight on the howitzer;
j. Determine corrections relating to mismatch of values of the
Д726-45-series sight settings and angles of barrel quadrant
elevation;
k. Determine corrections for shift of the line of sight;
l. Examine and check the ОП4М-45-series sight;
m. Examine the gun’s collimator.

1. Check of Quadrant (Gunner’s Clinometer)

The quadrant in use should be periodically checked. The elements to be

checked are quadrant zero settings and an angle between its areas of
bearing surfaces.

To check zero settings, complete the following steps:

p. Set angle zero settings on the quadrant’s scales; place the
quadrant on the (clinometer) plane of the breech piece in the
longitudinal direction;
q. By the howitzer’s elevating gear, place the tube (barrel) into the
position at which the level bubble would be centered;
r. Turn the quadrant by 180º, the bubble therewith must not be
displaced from the centered position by more than half the minor
division of the leveling vial; if the bubble displacement is greater
unscrew the control sleeve (11) (Fig. 61) and screwing out or

13-16
 TM01-01-2005-10

screwing in (screw 10) select the half value of the displacement;

by the howitzer’s elevating gear turn the tube to the position in
which the bubble will be centered, whereupon turn the quadrant
by 180º again; if the bubble cannot be centered repeat the
procedure.

Check the angle between the areas of the quadrant bearing surfaces in such order:
s. Set the 7-50 angle on the quadrant scale and put the quadrant by
its bearing surface on the (clinometer) plane of the breech piece
according to the longitudinal graduation line;
t. Turn the quadrant placing it on the howitzer’s clinometer plane
by the second bearing surface; the bubble therewith must
displace from the centered position not more than by two
divisions of the leveling vial; if the displacement is greater turn
the quadrant in for repair.

2. Defining Backlashes of Mechanisms of the Д726-45-series Sight and ПГ 1М-

series Dial Sight

To define the backlash of the mechanisms identifying angles of sight

(Д726-45-series sight), it is required:
a. Rotating the knob (38) (Fig. 49) in one direction center the
longitudinal leveling bubble and read the value of angles of sight
according to the scale readings;
b. Rotating the knob in the same direction change the scale setting
of angles of sight to 0-40 – 0-50;
c. Rotating the knob in the opposite direction return the bubble onto
the centered position and take the scale reading of the angles of
sight.

The difference in two angle indications will be the value of backlash of the
angle-of-sight mechanisms; it shall be no more than 0-01. A great backlash
value can be the result of fouling angle-of-sight mechanisms, a thickened
lubricant between the bolt (13) and the body of the mechanism, and sagged
or broken springs (10) or (43).

To eliminate the above-indicated faults, one should:

a. Disassemble the mechanism of angles of sight;
b. Clean all parts of dirt and old oil and apply a thin coat of
lubricant of ГОИ-54П-series, GOST * 3276-63; replace the failed
parts from among the spare ones.

If after the mechanism has been reassembled the backlash value will be
more than 0-01 the sighting device is to be repaired.

13-17
 TM01-01-2005-10

3. To attach the value to the backlash of the mechanism of the angles of tangent
elevation of the Д-726-45-series sight, it is required:
a. Rotating the hand-wheel (53) in one direction center the bubble
and take a scale reading of the angles of tangent elevation;
b. Rotating the hand-wheel in the same direction change the setting
of the angles of tangent elevation to 0-40 –0-50;
c. Rotating the hand-wheel in the opposite direction return the
longitudinal leveling bubble to the center and take the scale
readings of the angles of tangent elevation.

The difference in two angle indications will be the value of backlash of the
angle-of-tangent-elevation mechanisms; it shall be no more than 0-01. A
great backlash value may be caused by the fouling or a thickened lubricant
in the reservoir hole of the box (14) and in the recess of the eccentric axis
(3), poor reassembling of sight, and sagged or broken springs.

To eliminate a great backlash for the mechanism of angles of tangent

elevation, one should:
a. Disassemble the mechanism of angles of tangent elevation;
b. Carefully clean the parts of sight of dirt and old oil and, then,
apply a thin coat of lubricant of ГОИ-54П-series, GOST 3276-
63; replace the failed parts from among the spare ones;
c. Reassemble the mechanism of angles of tangent elevation.

When assembling, screw in the bolt (2) such that the swinging part of the
sight will smoothly rotate and will not have endplay and great lateral
motion. If after the sight has been reassembled the backlash value will be
more than 0-01 the sighting device is to be repaired. In addition to defining
the backlash of the angles-of-tangent-elevation mechanism, it is required to
determine the backlash value in the range-drum drive. For this, adjust
setting on one of the distance-drum scales and pinning the arms to the drum
turn it one side (then, let it off and mark the setting on the drum scale); then,
turn the drum the other side, let it off again and mark the setting. The
difference in two settings will be a backlash value of the distance-drum
drive. To express the value in mils: rotating the knob of the angles-of-
tangent-elevation mechanism displace the distance-drum scale setting; then,
rotating the range drum (53) match the nearest scale mark with the pointer
and take the mils-scale reading. Rotating the knob in the same direction
match the second mark with the pointer and take the mils-scale reading.
Difference of readings must not exceed the value of 0-00.5. If the backlash
value in the distance-drum drive is more than 0-00.5 replace the spring (64).

13-18
 TM01-01-2005-10

4. To determine the backlash value on the bearing scale of the ПГ-1М-series

dial sight, one should:
a. Set in and secure the dial sight in the socket;
b. Rotating the clinometer’s adjusting knob in one direction set the
graticule or the dial-sight set square onto the fixed clear-cut point
and read the clinometer’s settings;
c. Rotating the knob in the same direction adjust the setting to 0-40
–0-50;
d. Rotating the clinometer’s adjusting knob in the opposite
direction matches anew the graticule or the dial-sight set square
with the aiming point and read the clinometer’s setting.

The difference of two clinometer settings will be just the value of backlash
of the dial-sight bearing scale; it shall be no more than 0-02. The backlash of
the reflector of the ПГ-1М-series dial sight is defined likewise. However,
this time, the reflector knob rotates to lay the dial-sight graticule on the
fixed point and readings ate taken from the reflector’s scale. Backlash of the
dial-sight reflector shall be no more than 0-02; if such values of the bearing
scale and the reflector’s scale are greater the dial sight is to be repaired.

5. Expendable Longitudinal and Lateral Play of Д726-45-Series Sight

a. To define expendable longitudinal play of the sight, one

should:
• Center the longitudinal leveling bubble operating by the
mechanisms of sights or by the elevating gear of the
howitzer. Press by hand the dial-sight socket away from
you with the exerted force of 7-8 kgf, then, let it off and
note the bubble position in reference to the leveling-vial’s
graduation lines;
• Press by hand the dial-sight socket with the exerted
backward force of 7-8 kgf, and letting it off note afresh the
bubble position relative to the leveling-vial’s graduation
lines.

The value of expendable longitudinal play must be no more than 0-01. Read
the value according to the graduation lines of the leveling vial; one division
approximates to one mil. The causes of a high-level expendable longitudinal
play are similar to those resulting in a great backlash of the mechanism of
the angles of tangent elevation. To eliminate a high-level longitudinal play
of the sight, the operations should be similar to the ones contributing to
elimination of a great backlash of the angles-of-tangent-elevation
mechanism.

13-19
 TM01-01-2005-10

b. To define expendable lateral play of the sight, one should:

• Center the cross-leveling bubble operating by the sight
swinging mechanism;
• Press by hand the dial-sight socket to the left with the
exerted force of 7-8 kgf, then, let it off and note the cross
leveling bubble position;
• Press by hand the dial-sight socket to the right with the
exerted force of 7-8 kgf, and letting it off note afresh the
cross-leveling bubble position.

The value of expendable lateral play must be no more than 0-02. Read the
value according to the graduation lines of the cross leveling vial, one
division approximates to one mil. A heavy expendable lateral play of the
sight may be caused by the fouling of the leveling screw (23) (Fig. 49) with
the housing (22), break or sag (looseness) of the spring (24), incomplete
screwing of the bolt (2), or play of the axis (20). To eliminate the fault, the
mechanism of cross swinging should be disassembled. Carefully clean all
parts of dirt and thickened oil and, then, apply a thin coat of lubricant of
ГОИ-54П-series, GOST 3276-63; replace the failed parts from among the
spare ones; In case the bolt (2) is not fully screwed in, unfasten the nut (16)
with a cotter pin and fasten it by two or three turns; screw in the bolt such
that the swinging part of the sight will smoothly rotate and will not have an
axial play and a heavy lateral play; then, screw the nut on and secure it with
a cotter pin. If after reassembling the sight lateral play is more than 0-02,
turn the sight in for repair.

6. Checking the Д726-45-Series Sight Adjustability Relating to Longitudinal

and Cross Levels

Establish the following order to check a longitudinal level deviation

attribute of the leveling bubble:
a. Set a horizontal position for the howitzer tube using a field
clinometer and center the longitudinal leveling bubble;
b. Rotating the setscrew of the sight lateral swing mechanism point
the sight to the right as far as it will go and then, point the sight
fully to the left. The longitudinal leveling bubble therewith
should remain centered. If the bubble moves off the center
adjust the leveling vial position by the leveling screws (105)
(Fig. 49).

Check the cross level deviation attribute of the leveling bubble

completing the following steps:
a. Set zero settings of the sight;

13-20
 TM01-01-2005-10

b. Set the dial-sight socket in the transverse direction using the field
clinometer; the cross leveling bubble therewith should remain
centered;
c. Rotating the hand-wheel of the tangent-elevation mechanism
adjust the angle of tangent elevation from 0-00 to 2-00; the cross
leveling bubble therewith should remain centered. The leveling
screws should adjust if the leveling bubble moves out of the
center ring the leveling vial.

7. Check of Д726-45-Series Sight Setting on the Howitzer

Sight setting is checked after the zero line of sight and zero settings are
checked. The following procedures are used for setting a sight:
a. Lay the howitzer bore (by aligning through the hole in the
wedge-type breech block for the firing pin to be protruded and by
aligning through the center of the cross-wires secured on the
muzzled face of the tube) on the aiming point at least 1,000 m
away from the howitzer; with zero sight settings, the dial sight
graticule should also coincide with the aiming point;
b. Rotating the setscrew of the sight lateral swing mechanism point
the sight to the right and then to the left as far as it will go.

If the sight is set accurately (the axis of the lateral swing is parallel to the
axis of the bore) then, the line of sight should be displaced from the aiming
point by no more than 0-02. Determine the line-of-sight deviation value by
the reflector scale and the bearing scale of the dial sight; for this, sight anew
the dial-sight graticule onto the selected aiming point. If the line of sight
deviates from the aiming point by more than 0-02 the sight is to be turned in
for repair in the workshop.

8. Determining Corrections for Discrepancies between Д726-45-Series Sight

Settings and Angles of Quadrant Elevation

Such corrections shall be determined after the sight zero settings have
been inspected. The correction procedure is as follows:
a. Set a horizontal position for the howitzer tube according to the
field clinometer’s longitudinal and transverse settings;
b. Set up zero settings on the sight (sight 0-00, elevation 30-00); as
this takes place, longitudinal and cross leveling air bubbles
should be centered;
c. Set up subsequent angles of quadrant elevation from 0-00 to 11-
70 (forward trace) every 1-00-division interval; then, set up the
same angles from 11-70 to 0-00 (reverse trace); set up angles by
readings on the mils scales of the sight setting mechanism.

13-21
 TM01-01-2005-10

At setting each angle of quadrant elevation, the cross level should be turned
to a mean position; this operation shall be performed by sight swing
mechanism. Measure the angle of quadrant elevation for the tube each 1-00-
division interval by a gun quadrant.
The maximum difference of the values gained from quadrant and sight-
readings must be no more than 0-02 for the angles of 3-50 and 0-04 for the
angles of at least 3-50. When measuring one and the same angle of quadrant
elevation with both direct and reverse tracings, small difference in quadrant
readings should be no more than 0- 01.5. If the inspection reveals excess
errors the sight should be turned in for repair. The appropriate
measurements should be made three times in order to identify the mean
value. The difference in sight-setting and mean values measured shows the
angle-discrepancy correction. This correction should be registered in the
table entered to calculate firing corrections.

TABLE OF CORRECTIONS FOR DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN ANGLES OF QUADRANT

ELEVATION MEASURED BY THE SIGHT OF Д726-45-SERIES AND THE QUADRANT
(EXAMPLE)

Sight-Scale Settings
Measureme

Gun Number (In mils)

Readings & Corrections 0 100 200 300 400,
etc.
nts

Quadrant Readings
Д-30-series howitzer 1 0 100 199 297 398
2 0 98 200 299 395
3 0 99 198 298 398
Mean values measured by a quadrant ─ 0 99 199 298 397
Discrepancy correction (in mils) ─ 0 +1 +1 +2 +3

Check adequacy of the angles set for the tube and those set by the angle-of-
sight mechanism, with zero setting by the sight-setting mechanism. When
firing, insert the discrepancy corrections in the longitudinal leveling gear.
Concurrent with determining discrepancy corrections, define deviation
corrections and make up one unified table of corrections.

9. Determining a Correction Factor for Line-of-Sight Deviations

The correction (corr) factor is applied to the line of sight at different angles
of quadrant elevation. A theodolite is used to determine such corrections;
the process takes place after zero and zero line-of-sight settings are checked.

Complete the following steps:

a. Stretch the lines against the crosshairs plotted on the muzzle face
and draw a white axial line on the lower generatrix, which would

13-22
 TM01-01-2005-10

be a continuation of the vertical line of graticules and would

serve for laying the theodolite at large angles of quadrant
elevation;
b. Extract the striker mechanism;
c. Set up the theodolite 30-40 cm from the muzzle face (with the
circle on the right) and level the divided circle;
d. Lay the tube aligning through the hole in the wedge and graticule
on the muzzle face into the theodolite telescope (the angle of
elevation or the angle of descent is allowed no more than 0-30;
e. Set the tube into the initial position; for this, observing through
the telescope and announcing the layer which side to turn raise or
lower the tube and try to achieve that the hole in the wedge
coincides with the graticules on the muzzle face;
f. Secure the divided circle by a clamp and match the reticules of
the theodolite telescope and the graticules on the muzzle face; to
get the theodolite direction laying out of adjustment is not
allowed;
g. At sighting-device zero settings, center the leveling bubbles and
identify the aiming point; record the obtained deflection to the
data sheet (which registers corrections);
h. Sequentially set angles of quadrant elevation from 0-00 to 11-70
(direct trace) every 1-00-division interval and, then, the same
angles from 11-70 to 0-00 (reverse trace);
i. At each angle of quadrant elevation, while using direct and
reverse traces and watching in the telescope turn the tube until
the graticules on the muzzle face (or the white line on the muzzle
brake) and the theodolite reticules coincide; after they match
check the longitudinal and cross leveling bubbles position (if
required, adjust by the sight mechanisms) and identify the aiming
point by the dial sight; the obtained deflection for each angle-of-
sight setting is to be recorded in the data sheet;
j. Being over with measurements when the theodolite is set with
the circle on the right, move the telescope through the zenith and
turning the limb (graduated circle) by 180º repeat the
measurements (first, the tube is set into the initial position and
the circle is on the left). After the limb has been turned by 180º
do not level the theodolite).

The table of corrections for the line-of-sight deviations is to be used when

firing; corrections are introduced in the deflection readings.

10. Inspection and Check of the ОП4М-45-Series Sight

For examining the sight, complete the following steps:

a. Check the sight for completeness.
b. Check the sight securing in the sight mount.

13-23
 TM01-01-2005-10

c. Make a visual check of the sight.

d. Watching in the sight (from the ocular side) confirm whether any
film, thin hair, large points or other defects that hinder the
watching procedure are visible on the glassy parallel-sided plate,
or whether ocular and objective lens got unstuck. The sights
with unstuck lens or with defects on the plate, or with other
hindering defects have to be turned in for repair.
e. Check the aim-off (lead) unit and sighting gear performances; for
this, by rotating the knobs move the scales correcting direction
and range scales for the whole operation amplitude. The sight
scales should move smoothly, without jerks.
f. Check the adjustment mechanisms. They should allow the sight
height and direction regulation.
g. Check the sight mechanisms of lighting. In military units, the
sight is not to be disassembled. In troops, it is allowed to mend
only the socket of the electric bulb, electric wiring and packing
box. The sight with the faults elimination of which is not
allowed in troops is to be turned in for repair.

11. Inspection of the Gun’s Collimator

To keep the collimator in full readiness, it is required to inspect the

collimator systematically and thoroughly and timely repair it. Inspection
should be performed for all the collimators delivered to the unit (in the
process of acceptance) and those that are available in the units.

The sequence of the collimator inspection:

a. Check the collimator set for completeness.
b. Perform the visual inspection of the collimator.
c. Observing through the collimator (from the objective lens side)
check whether the lens have slugs, damages or other defects that
hinder observation and whether the lenses of the objective and
the grid are not unstuck.

The collimators with defects that hinder observation should be repaired.

d. Check electric illumination of the collimator. The collimator in

troops should not be disassembled.

In troops, it is allowed eliminating only the defects of the bulb holder, wiring, the packing
box, and the mirror. If the mirror is broken, a spare mirror should replace it. If the cell
(31) (Figure 62) of the mirror is not kept in the required position in staples of the clip
(27), then, it is required to tight up the screw (30). To replace a burnt out bulb it is
required to unscrew the reflector (39) after the bulb is replaced screw it again.

13-24
 TM01-01-2005-10

I. INSPECTION OF SPARE PARTS, INSTRUMENTS, AND ACCESSORIES.

POSSIBLE MALFUNCTIONS OF THE AIR HYDRAULIC PUMP

When inspecting the equipment simultaneously inspect kits of spare

parts, tools, and accessories paying attention to the following:
- Availability and serviceability of packing boxes;
- Availability and compliance of ЗИП-kit with layouts and
descriptions of stacking;
- Serviceability of all ЗИП-kit;
- Correctness of storage and care of individual ЗИП-kit.
- Space parts should be serviceable and suitable to replace
corresponding parts of the howitzer.

The instruments should be serviceable and suitable for use. The wear of the
spanner mouth is allowed going down to the value not causing the
smoothing of edges of unscrewed parts. Accessories should always be
completely serviceable. When inspecting the manometer, compare it with
the reference manometer. Apart from the general inspection, the air
hydraulic pump should be tested in action. Operation indicators of the pump
should comply with its passport data. Storage batteries of the illumination
instrument and the storage lamp should be normally charged. The
illumination instrument should be operable and ready for use. The voltage
of storage batteries of the illumination instrument should be at least 2 V.
Check contacts of holders and storage batteries; contacts should not have
oxidation, dust, and dirt.
Check the operation of all bulbs.

POSSIBLE MALFUNCTIONS OF THE AIR HYDRAULIC PUMP DURING ITS

OPERATION AND METHODS OF CURE
Malfunction Cause of malfunction
1. When air is pumped
The pump does not 1. The tap of the pump is set on
achieve the pressure “Liquid”.
specified in the passport.
2. The lack of lubricant on rubbing
surfaces of cylinders and plungers.
3. Plunger rings are improperly
installed or worn out.
Method of cure
1. Set the tap of the pump on “Air”.
2. Perform partial disassembling of the
pump, wipe with a clean rag and lubricate
rubbing surfaces of the pump
3. Perform partial disassembling of the
pump, set piston rings with cuts on
opposite sides and if they are worn out
replace them with the new ones from ZIP

4. Valves are loosely fit to saddle 4. Perform the disassembling of the

due to their clogging or damage.
pump, clean and grind valves to seats
lubricating them with a thin layer of the
lubricant GOI-54P, assemble the pump.
If the malfunction is not remedied,
replace the valves by new ones from ZIP
and grind to seats before installation.

13-25

Leakage of air between
the cover and the body of
the pump
Leakage of air through
the tap of the pump.
Leakage of air through
joints of the joining tube.
2. When liquid is pumped.
After the first stroke, the
big piston stopped in the
extreme position.
Leakage of the liquid
from cylinders of the
pump.
Leakage of the liquid
through joints of the
joining tube.
Nuts of studs fixing the cover of the
body are not screwed tightly or the
leather-sealing ring is damaged.
The nut of the tap is not screwed
tightly or the tap is clogged.
Special nuts are not screwed tightly
or leather gaskets are damaged.
The tap of the pump is set on “Air”
Wrong setup or wearing of piston
rings.
Special nuts are not screwed tightly
or leather gaskets are damaged.
13-26
TM01-01-2005-10
Evenly tighten nuts of studs fixing the
cover; if the leakage is not stopped,
replace the leather-sealing ring.
Tighten the nut of the tap; if the leakage
is not stopped, disassemble the tap, clean
it, grind to the seat having lubricating the
tap by a thin layer of the lubricant GOI-
54P, assemble the tap
Tighten special nuts; if the leakage is not
stopped, replace leather gaskets under
special nuts
Set the tap of the pump on “Liquid”.
Perform partial disassembling of the
pump and set rings with cuts on opposite
sides; if they are worn out replace them
with new rings from ZIP.
Tighten special nuts; if the leakage is not
stopped, replace leather gaskets under
special nuts.
 TM01-01-2005-10

CHAPTER XIV

CARE, STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE HOWITZER

A. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Duration and reliability of operation of equipment of the howitzer to a
considerable extent depend on its proper storage, efficient handling, care and
constant observation, as well as timely elimination of malfunctions and repair..
Ordnance of the howitzer is maintained in operable condition due to the system of
scheduled maintenance. The howitzer equipment is subject to current
maintenance, maintenance No. 1, and seasonal maintenance.

1. Current Maintenance

Current maintenance is performed:

- During the time of machinery cure;
- When preparing for fire and march;
- After exercises;
- After strong and long rains;
- After sharp fluctuations of temperature;
- Once in two weeks, if the equipment was not used;
- Once in half a year, if stored on open sites;
- Once in a year if stored in storehouses.

Current maintenance is performed by the battle crew under the direction of the
platoon commander and includes the operations listed in Table 1.

LIST OF HOWITZER CURRENT MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS

Table 1

Description of operations Technical Requirements Devices, Instruments &

and methods of Materials Used
performing

1. Remove dirt, dust, rust, Surfaces should be clean; the Cleaning rags, wooden
moisture and snow from presence of rust and dirt is scrapers. To remove rust
all surfaces of the howitzer not allowed. – kerosene or diesel fuel.
and ZIP (chapter XIV)

2. Perform superficial In compliance with technical

inspection of all requirements for a given
mechanisms of the mechanism specified in

14-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

howitzer and ZIP as pertinent sections.

specified in chapter X and
chapter XIII. Before a
march, perform an
inspection in compliance
with chapter XII.
3. Restore the disturbed Lubricate in accordance with Cleaning rags, brushes,
lubrication the Lubrication Table lubricant, lever-plunger
(Chapter XIV) injector
4. Check the condition of the A thin even layer should Stake Sb-41-54, rod
bore lubrication. For this lubricate the bore and Sb41-12, swab A72927-
purpose open the breech chamber over the entire 52
mechanism and inspect the surface.
lubrication condition in the
bore (before fire, remove
lubricant from the bore).
5. Clean and lubricate the Lubricate the breech Wrench A52840-36,
breech mechanism mechanism with an even thin cleaning rags, lubricant.
(Chapter XIV) and test the layer in compliance with the Stick to extract the
operation of its gears as Lubrication Table (Chapter wedge A71519-1.
specified in Chapter X and XIV). Mechanisms should Gauge A52415-1
Chapter XIII. not fail in operation.
6. Check recoil systems for Leakage of the liquid and the T-connector Sb42-25.
no leakage of the liquid bleeding of air are not Wrenches A52840-65,
and bleeding of air. For allowed. Sb41-13, A72930-53.
fire preparation check the The amount of the liquid in Bore pull-back device
amount of the liquid and the recoil absorber 10,3 l. Sb42-29 or the air-
the air pressure in the The amount of the liquid in hydraulic pump 52-I-035
recuperator (Chapter X) the recuperator 9,77+0,2 l.
The pressure in the
recuperator 46+2 kg-
force/cm2
7. Check the operation of Work should be smooth,
elevating and traversing without jerks and jams.
mechanisms and the jack.
8. Clean, lubricate (Chapter All mechanisms of sights
XIV) and partially check should work smoothly with
sighting devices to the great efforts applied to hand
extent specified in Chapter wheels
X.
9. Check the fastening of the Unsteadiness in axial and
muzzle brake radial directions is not
allowed
10. Check four holes on the Plugging of holes is not
upper mount and three allowed
holes on the lower mount

14-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

for water flow

11. Check the condition of Seals should have distinct
seals imprints
12. Clean and dry covers Torn covers are not allowed
13. Check storage of the In compliance with
howitzer, sighting devices requirements of relevant
and ZIP (Chapter XIV) sections

2. Maintenance No. 1

Maintenance No. 1 is performed in the following cases:

- After march;
- After each firing;
- After the ordnance is adopted by the unit;
- Not rarely than once in six months, if the ordnance was not used;
- Once in three years when storing in storehouses.

Maintenance No. 1 is performed by the battle crew with involving, when

needed, specialists of a repair shop and includes the operations given in Table
2.
List of Maintenance No. 1 Operations
Table 2

Nos. Description of operations Specifications Devices,

and methods of Instruments &
implementation Materials Used
1 Inspect howitzer after the According to
march as indicated in Ch. XII specifications of the
stated section
2 Inspect, check and, if According to
necessary, adjust units & specifications of the
mechanisms as stated in Ch. stated chapter
XIII
3 Check the recoil system According to
according to Ch. X & Ch. specifications of stated
XIII sections
4 Check pressure of he According to
balancing gear according to specifications of stated
Ch. XIII section
5 Clean and grease the barrel According to Wooden poles,
bore as indicated in Ch. XIV specifications of stated wads, spatulas,
sections cleaning rods,
grease, BCS
6 Dress available dents, metal File 200
raised places on operating GOST 1465-59
surface of components.

14-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

Replace worn out parts from

spare instruments and
appliances of repair complex
7 Check the state of grease
howitzer mechanisms, replace
grease, if necessary
8 Lubricate the running gear
(running axle, bosses) &
cradle
9 Remove paint unfit for use
and restore coloration
10 Check technical conditions of
howitzer, indicated in Annex
2
11 Check the ЗИП-kit for
completeness
Lubricate the howitzer
according to Table of
Lubricating, Ch. XIV
Running gear should be
lubricated after 200-300
km run or in case of boss
warming up during march
Painting tool
Complete set according
to spare instruments and
appliances list

3. Maintenance No. 2

Maintenance No. 2 is to be performed in repair shops of the unit or

formation by specialists of repair shops with personnel of the weapon
team attracted in the following cases:

- When turning the materiel for long-term storage;

- After the six-year storage in a warehouse;
- After a two-year service or keeping in a shed or on open platforms.

At maintenance No. 2 operations indicated in table 3 are to be done.

LIST OF MAINTENANCE NO. 2 OPERATIONS

Table 3
Nos. Content of Work & Specifications Devices, Instruments &
Methods of Realisation Materials Used
1 Dismantling of howitzer According to ЗИП-kit. Cotton waste,
to extent and order Technical Description trestles, shelving, instruments,
stipulated by present and appliances of special
Technical Description purpose made in repair shops

2 Examination of technical Parts must not have

state of parts and units. corrosion, tears, burrs
Removal of faults and other defects
revealed

14-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

3 Assembly and According to methods ЗИП-kit

adjustment of of present Technical
mechanisms and units of Description. Prior to
howitzer to the extent assembly all parts of
and order stipulated by mechanisms must be
present Technical lubricated according
Description to Table of
Lubrication
4 Inspect technical state of According to Table 4 ЗИП-kit
assembled howitzer

5 Painting of howitzer According to Washing materials, cotton

Instructions on waste, wooden scrapers,
Storage and Care of instruments and material for
Artillery Weapons in painting
Troops
6 Stand-by storage of All unpainted unit &
howitzer, Ch. XIV mechanism surfaces
of howitzer should be
profusely lubricated
with lubricant
corresponding to
Table of Lubrication

4. List of Inspections of the Howitzer Technical State

Technical state of the howitzer is to be inspected:

- At entering service;
- At turning the howitzer for long-term storage;
- At maintenance.
Table 4

Nos. Points of Inspection Specifications

1 Welding seams, fastening elements, tightening of Cracks on welding seams,
nuts, screws & correctness of their locking unlocking and weakening
of screws, bolts, nuts is
not allowed
2 Clearance between dashboard Сб23 (Fig. 19) 13.5-15.5 mm
and breech ring 1 (Fig. 3)
3 Clearance between push lever 68 (Fig. 19) and 1.5-3 mm
sear lever 31 (Fig. 15)
4 Protrusion of striker to the cotter reflector 2-2.38 mm, checked with
stencil A52415-1

14-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

Nos. Points of Inspection Specifications

5 Clearance between cam 20 with slide and pin 20 Not less than 0.5 mm
with the roller being between arcs (trigger crank
drawn back to the full)
6 Clearance between cam 20 with slide (Fig. 19) 0.2-2.5 mm
and pin 26 at angles of elevation 22 degrees and
more (arc roller)
7 Possibility of cotter self-closing of striker self- Not allowed (Ch. XIII)
release
8 Lever travel 50 (Fig. 19) after drop of extractors 3 mm or more
21 & 22 (Fig. 15) against the stop
9 Reserve of trigger crank travel 30 (Fig. 19) after 3 mm or more
drop against the stop
10 Round clearance between rods of the recoil 0.3 mm or more
system and apertures in cradle cover
11 Clearance between brake rod nut and surface of 0.5-0.15 mm
cradle cover
12 Clearance between cranks and lower bumpers 31 0.5-6 mm. Absence of
(Fig. 32) clearance is possible on
condition the lever gets
removed without effort
13 Clearance between sliding and lower mounts:
- At angle 00 left from the front and from right Not less than 0.3 mm
- At angle of 700 left and right from the rear Not less than 0.2 mm
14 Clearance between lever of recurring cocking 65 2-3 mm
(Fig. 15) and lever pin
15 Work of barrel blocking at angle of elevation Barrel lifting must be
300 limited by lock 14 (Fig.
25) stopping at edge of
the bolt head 84 (Fig. 20)

Clearance between lock butt 14 (Fig. 25) and 2-3 mm

sector 69 (Fig. 20)
16 Clearance between nut 2 of the rod (Fig. 22) and Not allowed
cradle cover
17 Clearance between pivot 67 (Fig. 15) and lever 1-3.5 mm
19 with cotter and lever 19 fully pressed down
18 Clearance between cam plate 43 (Fig. 20) and Not less than 1mm
starting lever 2 (Fig. 15) at vertical recoil and
counter-recoil in two places (see diagram of
clearances check up Fig. 20)

19 Clearance between lower plane of cam plate 43 0.5-2 mm

(Fig. 20) and starting lever 2 (Fig. 15) with cotter
pressed down to the full

14-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

Nos. Points of Inspection Specifications

20 Clearance between cam plate 20 with slide (Fig. 1+1 mm
19) and butt of lever pin 21 of blocking with
lever pin pressed to the left (towards left web of
sliding mount)
21 Clearance between lever pin 50 (Fig. 19) and 6-8 mm
lever of clearing toes of extractor 19 (Fig. 15)
with cotter being open

5. Seasonal Maintenance

Seasonal maintenance is done twice a year to make the howitzer ready for
autumnal-and- winter or spring-and summer use. At seasonal maintenance
checked is the quality of steol M and done are operations stipulated for
regular planned maintenance ensuring reliable operation of the howitzer
mechanisms in the spring-and-summer and autumn-and-winter periods of
use.

Notice. It is forbidden to clean the howitzer during rain and snowfall.

Cleaning and lubrication of the howitzer is to be done under the
supervision of officers and sergeants. When lubricating and cleaning the
howitzer continuous contact of the stem of the cleaning rod with the
barrel walls is not to be allowed. Rust film should be removed without
delay, the affected spot wiped clean with rags and lubricated.

B. MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES USED FOR CLEANING AND

GREASING

When servicing the materiel the following materials and accessories shall be
applied: Lubricant ГОИ-54П GOST 3276-63 is a homogeneous grease of light
yellow to dark brown colour and is intended:

- For lubricating the howitzer mechanisms operating within the

temperature of -50 to +50 0C;
- For stand-by storage of the howitzer mechanisms when
turning for long-term keeping.

a. The lubricant may be applied both cold and hot. Heating the
lubricant to over +90 0C is forbidden. Lubricant ЦИАТИМ-201
constitutes a homogeneous grease of light yellow to dark brown colour
and is designed for lubricating mechanisms operating at small loads
and high speeds within the temperature of -60 to +90 0C. It is applied
as a substitute to grease ГОИ-54П.

b. The lubricant should be applied cold. Anti-friction lubricant (95%

of ПКВ GOST 10586- 63; 4.5% of red lead GOST 1787-50 or zinc

14-7
 TM01-01-2005-10

white/НКТП 8190/1187; 0.5% of colloidal graphite GOST 5262-50).

It is applied to lubricate the breech ring thread and the muzzle brake.
The lubricant does not evaporate; neither does it become charred at the
barrel heating. The anti-friction lubricant should be applied only for
direct purpose. When unavailable liner lubricant is allowed to be used.

1. Solid oil is used to fill in wheel bosses. It constitutes a

homogeneous grease of light yellow to dark brown colour.

2. Pump grease is applied to lubricate (in different temperatures) the

air-hydraulic pump.

3. АГМ oil or spindle oil AУ is used to oil the barrel bore after
thorough removal of lubricant ГОИ-54П or lubricant ЦИАТИМ-
201 prior to field gunnery.

4. Steol M, transparent oil of yellow to green colour, is used to fill in

recoil systems.

5. BCS solution is applied for chemical cleaning of the barrel bore at

temperature of -10 0C or higher. The solution is made ready
directly before cleaning the barrel.

6. Kerosene or diesel fuel is used to lubricate the barrel bore in

winter time (at low temperature), for softening and removal of the
lubricant from small rifled parts, cavities and apertures, as well as
for rust.

7. Flax and cotton waste. The waste must be dry and clean; thick
seams should be cut off.

8. Flannel is used to clean optical parts of the rear-sight.

9. Wooden poles of hard non-resinous timber of 6m long and 5-7 cm

wide, one for a howitzer.

10. Wooden wads of 25 cm in length and 11 cm in diameter are made

of hard species timber, two for a howitzer. The side surface of the
wad must have extracting groves for the wad not to slip out of the
waste reeled on it when piercing the barrel bore. The required
quantity of wooden poles and wads are made directly by the
military units.

14-8
 TM01-01-2005-10

11. Cleaning rods. The cleaning rods available in the howitzer

battery, depending on the kinds of cleaning and greasing, are
intended:

- Cleaning rod No. 1 for greasing the barrel on powder residue;

- Cleaning rod No. 2 for washing the barrel bore with solution
for barrel cleaning or kerosene;
- Cleaning rod No. 3 for greasing clean barrel canals with
grease;
- Cleaning rod No. 4, spare.

Not to muddle up the cleaning rods they must be numerated or marked

with distinctive signs. All cleaning rods should be kept clean, after
application, their brushes should be washed in warm water and soap
and dry them. The stick set is applied to clean slots, backlashes,
apertures and cavities (made of dry hard timber by sub-units). Tooth
type brushes are designed for cleaning the howitzer rear-sight and
mechanisms. Timber spatulas are used to apply grease (made in
military units). Lubricants used to grease the materiel must be clean
(no sand, no moisture etc). They should be kept in clean, trig and
tightly closed churns or tin boxes; the grease taken from the churn or
the tin box should not be put back. Taking grease and lubricating parts
with naked hands is not allowed. Steol M should be kept in clean
closed utensil, as keeping it in open utensil results in its impurity.
Before poured steol must be checked for quality; previously used steol
must be thoroughly filtered through several coatings of clean gauze.
Steol M must always have only alkali reaction. Its quality should be
checked with the help of cresol- red flimsy (application rules are
indicated on the flimsy).

C. CLEANING AND GREASING OF THE BARREL

The crew under supervision of the gun commander shall do cleaning and greasing
of the barrel. The outer surface of the barrel should be cleaned of dust and dirt
with cotton waste, and in case of bad impurity it should be washed with water and
wiped dry with rags. Cavities, notches and all places difficult of access should be
cleaned with the help of sticks with waste twisted round them. Apertures may be
cleaned by repeatedly letting a rag pass through them or by sticks with waste
twisted round them. The howitzer barrel bore must be cleaned until old grease,
dirt and powder residue are completely removed.

1. Chemical Cleaning of the Barrel Bore

14-9
 TM01-01-2005-10

For chemical cleaning they use BCS (barrel cleaning solution). Cleaning
the barrel bore with BCS is done to remove copper fouling, to soften
powder residue and to prevent corrosion of the barrel bore at howitzer
storage. Cleaning with BCS solution can be done at air temperatures of
+50 to -10 0C; at lower temperatures BCS solution gets frozen. Therefore
at temperatures lower than -10 0C the barrel bore should be cleaned with
kerosene. The barrel bore cleaned with kerosene must be cleaned again at
the first opportunity with BCS. Chemical cleaning is done with established
accessories.

IN THE PRESENCE OF AIR BCS SOLUTION DISSOLVES PART OF

THE SCALE; THE SCALE LOOSENS, THE UNSOLVED PART IS TO BE
REMOVED MECHANICALLY WITH THE BRUSH OF THE CLEANING
ROD. IMPURE SOLUTION IS REMOVED BY DRYING THE BORE
WITH WASTE. THE LEAVINGS OF BCS SOLUTION DO NOT AROUSE
CORROSION OF BORE.

a. Preparation of BCS solution requires:

- Ammonium carbonate - white crystalline potassium, volatile,

especially at high temperature. During evaporation ammonium
carbonate resolves into carbon dioxide, water and ammonia and for
this reason it smells of spirit of ammonia. After cylinders and
barrels are opened, unused ammonium carbonate must be on the
same day replaced into tightly closing containers (tin boxes, clean
lubricant cans with screw up lids etc). Ammonia carbonate should
be kept in dry and cool storage facilities;

- Dichromate, which constitutes crystals of orange and red colour

(toxic), is supplied in glass jars or tins; it must be kept dry;
- River, melted snow, well, tap, fresh lake, rainwater, steam
condensate.

1. The following is used to clean the barrel:

- Wiping waste;
- Napkin fabric;
- Cleaning rods with bristling brushes;
- Buckets or other vessels: (not zinc-plated) for preparation
of BCS solution and collection of impure solution and tin
mugs for pouring water on the cleaning rod brush and other
operations.

2. BCS solution is prepared in the following proportion:

14-10
 TM01-01-2005-10

Water - 1 litre
Ammonium carbonate - 100 gr;
dichromate 5-10 gr.

Water should not be warmed. Ammonium carbonate must be reduced to

fine particles and poured into water gradually as it dilutes. Then
fragmented bichromate should be poured; the solution should be
intermingled until complete dilution of salts. Warmed up water can be
used at temperature not higher than 50 0C. Heating the solution is
prohibited, as ammonium carbonate breaks down at this. BCS solution is
recommended to be prepared only in quantities necessary for cleaning
during one day. In case the solution was not fully used, it can be kept not
longer than 5-7 days in leaky containers; during this time it breaks down
partially and loses its activity, yet remains fit for cleaning. The barrel bore
is usually cleaned on the gunnery day after the bore gets cool. If within 1-
2 hours after the gunnery the barrel bore is chemically cleaned, the barrel
bore should not be greased after it. Nevertheless, if the bore was
greased, then prior to the chemical cleaning the grease should be removed
with sodden waste, and the cleaning rod brush profusely moistened with
kerosene or diesel fuel; then the barrel bore should be wiped dry.

3. Chemical cleaning of the barrel bore when the howitzer is in

the combat and march formation should be done in the
following order:

a. The angle of depression must be 2-30.

b. Moisten profusely the cleaning rod brush with BCS
solution and introduce it into the barrel bore from the
breech end or chase; wipe the bore by swings (forward and
backward) of the cleaning rod at a section of one metre
making 15-20 movements.
c. Pull out the cleaning rod, wet the brush with fresh solution
and go on with cleaning on the next section of the bore.
Collect the impure solution (dark green colour) into a
bucket placed under the barrel muzzle end; it is not fit for
further use and must be poured off into a special small
ditch.
d. Sectional cleaning of the bore being completed, moisten the
brush of the cleaning rod with the solution and make some
5-10 reciprocating motions along the whole of the bore. At
this the rather well cleaned bore will discharge solution of
light yellow colour.

e. Take out the cleaning rod, wash its brush with water, and
wipe it and the pole of the cleaning rod with waste. Wind
waste or napkin round the brush and remove the solution

14-11
 TM01-01-2005-10

from the barrel bore so that you can check the barrel bore to
see whether it is clean.

If copper in the muzzle section of the barrel bore has not dissolved and the
napkin has signs of powder residue, clean again until copper and powder
residue are completely removed. When the bore has light yellow solution
emitting, wipe the bore dry with cotton waste and then the entire then bore
with a clean control napkin. If the napkin has no traces of powder residue
and no copper fouling is seen in the bore, the cleaning is over. Grease the
clean bore at once. Cleaning of howitzers with BCS solution must be done
outdoors or in premises with good natural ventilation. When doing the
work protect the eyes from BCS solution. After the work is done, make
sure and wash your hands and face with water and soap before taking a
meal. Impure napkins and waste can be used for cleaning bores after
washing and drying.

D. CLEANING OF THE BARREL BORE WITH KEROSENE AND DIESEL

FUEL APPLIED

1. To make the cleaning easier it is advisable to grease profusely the

barrel bore after the end of gunnery, before the bore got cool.
Greasing softens the powder residue and makes its removal easier.
To grease the bore it is necessary to put a thick coat of grease on
the cleaning rod brush with a spatula, then to introduce the
cleaning rod into the breech end of the barrel bore, placed
approximately into a horizontal position.

2. Then with small swings to and fro move it in series along the entire
bore. This done, the cleaning rod should be extracted. If the bore
walls prove to be insufficiently greased, the greasing process
should be repeated. Within 2-3 hours after the gunnery start
washing the bore with kerosene, the breechblock wedge should be
withdrawn. If for one reason or another the howitzer cannot be
cleaned on the day of gunnery, then on coming back from the field
the barrel bore and the breech-block should be wiped dry and
thickly greased again.

3. To decrease kerosene consumption dirt and grease should be

removed from the barrel bore with the help of a wad, tightly
wrapped round with dry or kerosene soaked waste.

4. To wash the barrel bore with kerosene it is necessary in fire or

travelling position of the howitzer to place the barrel
approximately in horizontal position; moisten profusely the
cleaning rod brush with kerosene, introduce it into the bore from

14-12
 TM01-01-2005-10

the breech end and wipe the bore with short swings forward and
backward for 3-5 minutes along the entire length of the bore.

5. Then the cleaning rod brush must be removed from the barrel bore
and cleaned from kerosene dirtied with the grease leavings and
powder residue. Then the barrel bore should be again washed two-
three times in the same sequence.

6. After the barrel bore is washed, it should be wiped to withdraw

kerosene leavings with the help of wad, with tightly wound round
clean waste. The waste folded in a strip of 7-10 cm should be
reeled on the wad so that it takes a barrel-like shape. At the end of
the wad, which is the end of its reeling, the waste should be
fastened with a thread or narrow tape and then inserted with the
same end into the bore from the breech end and thrust with the
help of the pole through the whole of the barrel bore.

7. After the barrel bore is cleaned from kerosene leavings, it is

necessary to thrust through it in the same sequence the wad with a
band made of cloth reeled on it. The band at this should be
rewound every time it goes through the bore. The fabric winding
must be thick enough for the wad to tightly enter the chamber and
force through the bore with the efforts of four-five men.

8. After the bore is wadded with a band made of cloth a control wad
should be pulled through the bore with tightly reeled dry (white)
waste. If there are dark strips left on the surface of the control
wad, the bore cleaning with a wad should be continued until the
control wad becomes absolutely clean (without traces of kerosene,
grease and powder residue).

9. Attention should be given to wholeness of the control wad waste

after its having been used. If the waste gets slightly torn or cut and
the run of the control wad in some sections of the barrel bore
becomes tight and light, the gun mechanic must be called to
examine the barrel bore and reveal the cause of the abnormal run
of the wad (burrs, rib damage, swelling or constriction of the barrel
bore).

NOTE: At the first opportunity the kerosene- or diesel fuel-cleaned bore should
be cleaned with BCS solution.

E. BORE LUBRICATION

14-13
 TM01-01-2005-10

After being cleaned the barrel bore should be lubricated. This is done as follows.
The brush of the cleaning rod, intended for greasing clean barrel bores, should be
supplied with clean thin waste soaked with lubricant or grease and be put with a
wooden spatula directly on the brush and pulled four-five times through the barrel
bore from the breech end to the chase and back. The grease should be spread with
an even coat on the whole surface of the barrel bore. If the grease is not laid on
the entire surface of the barrel bore or unevenly, lubrication should be done again.
Unpainted parts of the barrel, the muzzle brake, the control ground, places with
obliterated paint, the wedge groove, grooves, apertures and pockets for the breech
mechanism should be rubbed clean with cotton waste soaked with lubricant.

F. CLEANING AND GREASING OF BREECHBLOCK

Cleaning of the breechblock is done simultaneously with the bore cleaning, also
after every lesson concerned with dismantling and assembling of the breechblock.
For cleaning the breechblock it is necessary to have partially dismantled parts
rubbed clean with dry waste. Parts of the firing mechanism, housing for it in the
cotter and the cotter mirror should be cleaned after gunnery with clean waste
soaked in kerosene. When much dirtied, parts of the breechblock should be
washed in kerosene and then wiped dry with clean rags. Slots, notches and
grooves should be thoroughly cleaned with waste reeled on sharp ends of
spatulas. The cleaning being over, parts of the breech mechanism should be
greased with rags soaked in grease. To grease the orifices of the breechblock it is
necessary to run through them rags soaked in grease. Slots, notches and grooves
should be greased with the help of spatulas with grease-soaked waste reeled on
them. When assembled and placed on the howitzer, surface the breechblock
should be wiped with waste soaked in grease.

G. CLEANING AND GREASING OF THE GUN CARRIAGE AND BARREL

GUIDE

The cradle, guard rail, traversing and hoisting mechanisms, as well as the sliding
mount and bottom carriage, balancing gear, jack, wheel hoisting mechanism, trails
and gun layer’s shield should be wiped with dry waste without having them
dismantled. Slots, notches, grooves, as well as the sector teeth and hoist
mechanism gear must be thoroughly wiped with waste reeled on sharp ends of
wooden spatulas. When much dirtied, the above mechanisms should be cleaned
with kerosene-moistened rags. Care should be taken for kerosene not to get into
mechanisms interior. After washing, the parts of mechanisms should be rubbed
dry with waste. Wiping the unpainted sections with clean cotton waste soaked in
grease does greasing of mechanisms. Greasing of units supplied lubricators
should be done with the help of a grease gun. When turning from one grease to
another or its change, the old grease should be thoroughly removed with kerosene,
then to prevent rust all parts should be wiped dry with clean waste and greased.
Greasing all parts of the howitzer is to be done in accordance with Table of
Greasing. Gun covers should be cleaned from dust and dirt, while much dirtied

14-14
 TM01-01-2005-10

covers should be washed in lukewarm water and dried. Covers soaked in the rain
should be dried.

H. INSTRUCTIONS ON GREASING OF HINGED PARTS OF TRAILS

To grease hinged parts of trails it is necessary to do the following:

- To change the howitzer from travel position to fire position (Ch. XI):
- To put the angle of elevation at 65-700;
- Through the slit of gun layer’s shield to remove with a screwdriver screw
74 (Fig. 25) with spring washers 75 and to take off cap 76 with gasket 77;
- With the traversing mechanism of howitzer to match the port on the
sliding mount base with the pin of hinged part (left, right) of trails and to
grease them with pressure lubricator 54 (Fig. 38) until grease appears in
planes of trails joint with bottom carriage;
- To place cap 76 (Fig. 25) with gasket 77 and to fix them with screws with
washers 75;
- To change howitzer from fire position to travel position.

I. CLEANING AND GREASING OF SIGHTING SYSTEM

The mechanical part of rear-sights shall be wiped from outside with soft and clean
waste. Notches and slots shall be wiped with waste reeled on wooden spatulas,
taking care not to scratch optical devices. Optical devices of the sight shall be
wiped with clean flannel. When cleaning, dust and hard particles must be blown
off, then dimming the glasses by breathing, wipe them with circular motions of
flannel from centre to brims. Prior to cleaning the flannel and waste must be
shaken off to remove dust and hard particles. When cleaning the sights it is
forbidden to remove the sealing cement. Adhesive compound is used to fill in
joints and gaps with the aim of protecting the sight from moisture penetration.
When cleaning, patrol and kerosene are forbidden to be used, as they dissolve the
adhesive compound. It is also forbidden to touch optical devices with fingers.
Unpainted surfaces of rear-sights after the cleaning shall be wiped with soft rags
slightly moistened with grease. It is necessary at this to see that the grease does
not smear optical devices. Rubber parts shall not be greased.

14-15
 TM01-01-2005-10

J. LUBRICATION TABLE
(Fig. 86)

Places to Be Grease Greasing Greasing

Pos. in Fig.
Greased Description Technique Periodicity
(used in winter

86
and summer)

Barrel bore 1 ГОИ-54П Bore brush After gun fire,

GOST 3276-63 intended for march, military
greasing or rags exercise and during
soaked and reeled periodical cleanings
on bore brush & checks

Directing clip 2 ГОИ-54П Lever action Before gun fire,

bushings plunger grease gun march military
through lubricator. exercise, during gun
Brush or grease- fire, periodical
soaked rags cleanings and checks

Breech piece & - ГОИ-54П Grease-soaked rags After gun fire march,
cradle platform exercise, after check
for control up of sighting
level system & periodical
cleanings &
inspections
Thread of - Anti-friction Grease-soaked rags Prior to assembly
muzzle brake lubricant

Thread of - Same Same Same

breech ring,
socket, pipe

Wedge slot & - ГОИ-54П Grease-soaked rags After gun fire,

breech ring march, exercise,
parts during periodical
cleanings &
inspections
Bottom - Same Grease-soaked rags During periodical
carriage cleanings,
(unpainted inspections and
surface) assembly

Wheel axle 7 Same Lever-action Before march &

plunger grease gun during assembly
through lubricator

14-16
 TM01-01-2005-10

Knuckle pins 9 Same Fill in pin cavities During periodical

with grease with a cleanings and
wooden spatula inspections
when assembling &
assembled system
with lever plunger
grease gun through
lubricator. Cavity
pins should always
be filled in with
lubricant
Wheel boss 11 Cup grease Fill in cavities of Prior to march, 200-
GOST 1033-51 wheel bosses with 300 km run, also at
cup grease using boss heating &
wooden spatulas. periodical cleanings
Bosses must always & inspection
be full of solid oil
External - ГОИ 54П Grease-soaked rags After gunnery,
surface of march, military
internal exercise & when
cylinder of cleaning
balancing gear
Binding parts - Same Same After gunnery,
of sighting march, exercise &
telescope during periodical
cleaning and
inspections
On other 13 Same Lever-action During periodical
version plunger injector cleaning, inspection,
howitzers - through lubricator assemblies
axle & lock of
draw-bar
Cradle trunnion 5 Same Same After gunnery,
march, exercise &
during periodical
cleaning &
inspections
Cradle sector - Same Grease-soaked rags After march, gun fire
& pinion of exercise, periodical
elevating cleaning & checks
mechanism
Elevating - Same Fill it with grease When assembling
mechanism using wooden
housing spatulas
Bearing sleeve 3 Same Lever-action Prior to gun fire,

14-17
 TM01-01-2005-10

of elevating plunger injector periodical cleaning

screw through lubricator & inspections

Driving gear of - Same Fill in places of When assembling

elevating screw conic couple of
gears and bearings
Shaft bearings - Same Fill in pockets of When assembling
of elevating bearings with
mechanism wooden spatula
Traversing - ГОИ54П Fill in cavities of When assembling
mechanism cases & reduction
gear with wooden
spatula
Cross-head & 6&8 Same Lever-action Prior to gun fire &
axle of traverse plunger grease gun during periodical
gear box through lubricator cleaning and
inspections
Sliding mount - Same Grease-soaked rags During periodical
(unpainted cleaning &
surfaces) inspections
Mechanical 4 Same Grease-soaked rags External - after gun
sight Д726-45 (when assembling), fire, march exercise,
lever-action during periodical
plunger grease gun cleaning &
through lubricator inspection, and
mechanisms when
assembling
All external - Same Grease-soaked rags During cleaning &
unpainted inspections
surfaces of
howitzer metal
parts
Roller shaft - Same Lever-action During cleaning &
plunger grease gun inspections
through lubricator
Jack 10 Same Lever-action After gunfire, march,
plunger grease gun exercise & During
through lubricator; periodical cleaning
also parts 15-154 and inspections
& 15-63A (screws)
to be profusely
greased with
howitzer being
fully hoisted with
jack

14-18
 TM01-01-2005-10

Note. Parts and assemblies that are not mentioned in the Table shall be greased
during overhauls in summer and winter.

K. HOWITZER STORAGE (SAFE KEEPING)

• Howitzers in everyday operation and howitzers in reserve are kept in

assembled form, completely replenished with all pare parts, instruments
and accessories according to established norms in closed stocks or in shed.

• When in camps, howitzers are allowed to be kept in open stocks. Special

attention at this should be given to opportune cleaning and lubricating, the
state of paint, cleanness and intactness of covers.

• Howitzers in everyday operation are mounted on wooden supports with

notches having the form of wheels circle. Length of the notch on supports
should be not less than 1/3 of the wheel diameter.

• The swinging part of the howitzer must be fastened as if for march, trails
are brought together and fastened with the tightening device.

• The pintle beam is supplied with a wooden post. On howitzers of another

version the pintle beam is fastened in march position with a wooden post
placed under it.
•
When howitzers are kept in shed and in open stocks, rubber tires of wheels
in summer time should be protected from the impact of sunrays with straw
mats, tarpaulin, bast matting or other materials on hand.

• In wintertime under any conditions of howitzer storage it is necessary to

avoid blows on rubber tires at temperature bellow -30 0C. Special
attention to it should be given when sliding howitzers down from supports.

• When keeping howitzers in storage, breechblocks must be closed, strikers

released. The brake of recoil and counter-recoil must have normal
quantity of liquid, while the counter-recoil and balancing gear must have
normal pressure.

• Lids, covering nests of ventilation device of counter-recoil, must be

stopped with wire and sealed together with the plug covering the drain
orifice; also sealed must be the plug of recoil brake the valve with the lid
of balancing gear.

• Sight Д726-45 must have zero setting. Sight must be removed and kept in
the box together with collimator.

14-19
 TM01-01-2005-10

• Optical sight ОП4М-45 is not taken off in summer. It should be verified,

cleaned and covered. Boxes for the sight and the lighting appliance are to
be kept separately from the howitzer.

• In winter, and at the time when howitzers not in everyday operation are
kept long, the sight with collimator and optical sight should be kept in
their packing boxes indoors.

• Lighting appliance Luch should be kept so that the box lid is on top, as,
when it is overturned, electrolyte may flow out.

• When howitzers are kept in areas of hot climate (or in a sandy desert), as
well as in winter during snow storms the following parts of the howitzer
should be covered with grease-saturated paper:
- Muzzle brake;
- Breech end of the barrel (including control grounds);
- Balancing gear;
- Aiming mechanisms and places of mechanisms where sand, dust
and snow can penetrate.

• The muzzle brake, aiming mechanisms and the breech end of the barrel
should be covered with established jackets and the general jacket. When
the materiel is in open stocks, jackets after rain should be removed, dried,
examined and then put on again. On taking off the jackets, make sure and
check aggregates and places that were covered with jackets see to it that
there is no rust there.

• Note. Jackets for muzzle brakes of other versions are not interchangeable.

• Howitzers that are not in operation for over two months should be
steadfastly placed on supports or trestles to relief springs and wheels.
Supports (trestles) are placed under the bottom carriage. The supports
must be high enough for the wheels to be at a distance not less than 10 cm
from the floor or ground.

• The plate of fixed trail should have a support of 15 cm high.

L. STORAGE OF ОП4М-45-SERIES SIGHT, ПГ-1М-SERIES DIAL SIGHT

AND K1-SERIES COLLIMATOR
When kept in packing boxes, the sight, dial sight and collimator must be placed
clean in heated storage facilities, where there are no accumulators, acids, patrol
and photo-chemicals placed. The storeroom temperature must be not less than +8
0
C, constant if possible. Sharp temperature fluctuations and especially dampness
are inadmissible, as they further the appearance of residue and moistening on
optical parts, which put the devices out of order.

14-20
 TM01-01-2005-10

M. STORAGE OF SPARE PARTS, INSTRUMENTS AND ACCESSORIES

Spare parts, instruments and accessories should be kept in special packing boxes in one
storage compartment with howitzers, or in premises specially assigned for this purpose.
Metal parts should be covered with grease ГОИ-54П, articles of tarpaulin and hemp
should be dried, while wooden parts painted; objects of glass and non-ferrous metals
should not be greased, but only rubbed clean to remove dirt and dust. Instruments and
accessories must be serviceable.

N. SAFE-KEEPING AND MAINTENANCE OF AIR-AND-HYDRAULIC PUMP

The air-and-hydraulic pump from spare instruments and appliances should be kept and
transported in a special packing box. The pump in constant use is fully dismantled and
assembled during scheduled maintenance of weapons. When dismantled, all parts of the
pump should be thoroughly cleaned and lubricated with ГОИ-54П, except for surfaces of
plungers and cylinders, which are lubricated with pump grease, available in the pump
spare instruments and appliances. Pump grease should be kept in a tightly closed vessel,
preventing its getting dry. Prior to being turned for long-term storage it is necessary to
have the pump dismantled, all parts cleaned from dirt and old grease and greased again
with ГОИ-54П (including surfaces of plungers and cylinders). Then the pump should be
assembled, placed into the box and turned for storage. For long-term keeping the pump
should be partially dismantled for examination, but not rarer than once a year. For
utilisation of the pump after long storage it is necessary to dismantle it, remove the thick
grease from the parts, grease surfaces of cylinders and plungers with pump grease and
assemble. After the liquid is pumped up, it is necessary to thoroughly bleed the pump to
make sure it is free from liquid, putting the cock on Air.

O. SLUSHING AND DESLUSHING OF HOWITZER

1. General Guidelines

Slushing and deslushing must be done in areas protected from penetration of

dust, water, vapours of acids and alkali.

a. To carry out slushing and deslushing operations there must be special

personnel trained, working places established and fitted out, equipment,
instruments, accessories, shelves, brushes, rags, lubricants and tanks for
washing parts made ready. Degreasing and greasing operations should be
done in clean cotton gloves. To remove grease from places difficult of
access wooden scrapers are advisable to use.

14-21
 TM01-01-2005-10

b. External surfaces of not dismantled phosphate and oxidised units, as well

as all unpainted surfaces of the howitzer should be thoroughly wiped with
napkins, moistened in oil АУП warmed up to temperature of 40-50 0C.
Dismantled parts should be plunged into the tub of oil АУП warmed up to
temperature of 40-50 0C and kept there for 3-5 minutes (until foam on the
oil surface disappears). Surfaces coming into contact with steol in the
process of operation should be moistened with it after being degreased.
When washed, all parts should be thoroughly wiped dry with clean waste.

c. Prior to slushing it is necessary to degrease and inspect the barrel bore,

chamber, parts of the breech-block, trigger, locking device, as well as all
external unpainted surfaces of the howitzer: rust is inadmissible. When
slushing grease should be put in thick even coat along all surfaces in
accordance with Table of Greasing.

2. Sequence of Howitzer Deslushing

a. Remove jackets of the muzzle brake, general cover, breech end and sights.

b. Take off waxed paper from parts, units, spare instruments and appliances
of the howitzer.

c. Partly dismantle the breechblock (Ch. VIII).

d. Remove slushing grease:

- From spare parts, instruments and accessories;

- From barrel bore and chamber;
- From parts of breech-block;
- From apertures of groove and control grounds;
- From slushed surfaces of cradle, guardrail, trails, and wheel
elevating mechanism, balancing gear, elevating and traversing
mechanisms.

e. Wash and wipe dry mechanism and parts of howitzer.

f. Assemble and check up the operation of howitzer mechanisms.

3. Sequence of Howitzer Slushing

When turning the howitzer for long-tern storage after its operation, it is
necessary to make Technical Inspection No. 2.

14-22
 TM01-01-2005-10

During slushing do the following:

1. Remove covers from muzzle brake, general cover, breech end

and sights.

2. Remove dirt, sand, and dust from all external surfaces of

howitzer.

3. Partly dismantle breech-lock (Ch. VIII).

4. Clean and degrease barrel. Sequence of cleaning of barrel is

given in Ch. XIV.

5. Wash, degrease and wipe dry all parts of units, mechanisms and
spare instruments and appliances.

6. Profusely grease all unpainted surfaces of units and mechanisms

in accordance with Table of Greasing. Apart from greasing,
cover control grounds with waxed paper. The barrel bore and
parts and mechanisms of howitzer must be greased with ГОИ-
54П warmed up to temperature not higher than +90 0C.

7. Assemble breechblock (Ch. VIII).

8. Separate counter-recoil mechanism, wash grease and wipe dry

the clip of breech end and counter-recoil mechanisms. Grease
mounting faces and the counter-recoil mechanism.

9. Effect recoil of recoil mechanisms, check up and clean the rods

of counter-recoil mechanisms and piston part of recuperator
cylinder (Ch. XIII).

Grease the piston cavity of running-up gear and rod ends of

recoil system and places of their fit to the gasket; place recoil
mechanisms to their initial position.

10. Grease spare instruments and appliances.

11. Close the front face of pipe in the muzzle brake with waxed
paper:
- Wrap up sight Д726-45 in waxed paper;
- Wrap up all external unpainted surfaces, mechanisms and
spare instruments and appliances in waxed paper.

12. Put covers on the breech end, sight, muzzle brake and then put
on a general cover.

14-23
 TM01-01-2005-10

Chapter XV

ARTILLERY ROUNDS GENERAL INFORMATION

A. Purpose and design of artillery rounds

Ammunition is a wide range of elements of armament necessary for shooting using artillery,
mortars and launching equipment.

1. The three principle elements an artillery (missile) system consists of:

a. gun or launching equipment;
b. the shell;
c. full charge.
Gun (launching equipment) is purposed for providing throwing (launching) of the
shell and guiding it the right flies in desired direction. The shell is used for particular
target destroy. Full charge (powder) impact to the shell demanded velocity, which
provides required distance of shooting. Artillery round, avoiding to mix with a round
as an action, is a complex of elements necessary for providing of one shot from a gun
(mortar).

2. The combat artillery round can carry the following compounds in different
combinations:
a. the shell with relevant filling;
b. the fuze or pipe;
c. full charge (powder);
d. cartridge or BL cartridge;
e. warhead igniter;
f. warhead auxiliary elements (igniter, flash inhibitor, dicoppering agent,
desensitizer and distance piece).
The first five elements are obligatory for the most of artillery rounds. Exclusion is
only the rounds with armour-piercing without bursting charge, having no pipe or
fuze. Usage of auxiliary elements of full charge is determined by caliber, purpose,
type of round and firing conditions. As a rule, most of them are only the compounds
of full charges of artillery rounds.

B. Artillery rounds classification

Artillery rounds are distinguished according with their purpose, mode of charge and
preparedness for combat usage.

For purpose of use, the rounds are subdivided on service, practice, blank, drill and
special rounds.

1. Service Rounds are used for field firing. Particular set of rounds form the battle scale
of ammunition for guns.

2. Practice Rounds are used for training shooting, when destroying and casualty-
producing element of rounds is not of much importance. They are different from the
service rounds in use of simpler and cheaper to built shells. The rounds with armour-
piercing shells are more frequently used due to carrying neither bursting charge, no

15-1
 TM01-01-2005-10
fuze. They provide necessary effect of target destroy. In the practical rounds with
fragmentation and HE fragmentation shells, the shells filled with any dummy load or
small bursting charge. It allows compares shell weight with chart weight, providing
fair observation of their bursting at target.

3. Blank Rounds are used for service imitation during exercises, for signals and salut.
Blank round consists of powder charge, BL cartridge, wad and igniter. Depending on
powder the round may carry black powder igniter in BL cartridge as an auxiliary
element. The shortened cartridge cases are used in blank round production.

4. Drill Rounds are used for training of gun crew to act beside a gun, handling of
rounds, comprising full charges, modes of gun loading/unloading and produce of a
shot.

5. Special Rounds are designed for test firing on a range. They differ from service
rounds by shells and full charges design.

According to mode of loading, the artillery service rounds are subdivided to rounds of
QF fixed ammunition, QF separate loading round and separate BL loading rounds.

1. QF fixed ammunition - all elements are unified as a whole – a QF fixed round. This
kind of round normally includes the shell 2 with pipe or fuze 1, full charge 9 in
cartridge case 3 and igniter 11. Depending on design and size of a full charge, the
round can also carry the auxiliary elements igniter, flash inhibitor, and desensitizer).
Powder for such rounds could be placed directly in cartridge or in BL cartridge which
is inserted in cartridge case. An empty space of a shell normally is filled with distance
piece (cartoon two lid cylinder). A shortage of this kind of rounds is constancy of full
charge which cause scoring of bore and deprive of varying of trajectory. A credit side
of rounds of QF fixed ammunition is high rate of fire. High fire rate can be reached
due to one touch charging which is significantly important for such guns as: all
automatic, semi-automatic, AA guns, anti-tank, aircraft and some of tank guns.
Besides, use of this kind of rounds eliminates delivery of incomplete rounds to front
line; safe link of the shell and cartridge case provides high tightness of warhead.

Pos. 1. QF fixed ammunition rounds

1. - fuze or pipe 6. - washer
2. - the shell 7. – dicoppering agent
3. – cartridge case 8. - desensitize
4. - obturator 9. - full charge
5. – small cylinder 10. – igniter

2. QF separate loading round - the shell is not linked with full charge in cartridge
case. The round consists of the shell 1 with fuze (pipe) 2, full charge 3 in cartridge
case 4, igniter 5 and auxiliary elements – igniter 6, regular lid 7, desensitizer 8 and
reinforced lid 9. Full charges of such rounds are variable and consist of several
powder layers, put in BL cartridges. An advantage of QF separate loading round is an
ability to vary weight of full charge at fire point relating to the task. Use of lower
weight charges decrease scoring of bore. The disadvantages are low rate of fire due to
two touch charging, complicating automation of charging, and low air-tightness of
full charge. Primarily, the QF separate loading rounds are used by medium caliber
surface-to-surface and tank artillery (122 and 152mm).

15-2
 TM01-01-2005-10
3. BL ammunition rounds - differ from the QF separate loading rounds with no
cartridge case. The full charges 3 for such rounds are placed in BL cartridges made of
special cloth and the igniter 5 (stroke or electrical pipe) - separately. The full charges
for BL ammunition rounds could be full or reduced. Depending on type of full
charge, caliber and type of weapon, a set of round may carry dicoppering agent and
igniter. Charging a weapon with this type of round is done in three phases. First a
shell is loaded in a chamber, then full charge, after this breech mechanism is being
locked and finally igniting agent placed in breech bushing. BL ammunition rounds
have the same advantages as the QF separate loading rounds moreover, no cartridge
cases makes them simple and production cheaper. However, the three step procedure
of loading decrease fire rate of weapon and need of air-tight casing for storage makes
them expensive. Besides, separate igniting part and absence of cartridge case
significantly complicates the breech mechanism design and charging methods. Thus,
the rounds described are tending to be used exceptionally with heavy caliber surface-
to-surface artillery.

Regarding their combat preparedness, artillery rounds are subdivided to ready and
full charged.

a. Ready artillery rounds are all the rounds assembled with complete rounds of
installed elements and, therefore ready to shoot. They could be in filling and
fuzzing, when the fuze or pipe is screwed in the fuze hole and in filling but not
fuzzing, when plastic plug is screwed in the fuzzing hole.

b. Full Charged artillery rounds are all complete rounds but not assembled, which
elements are being stored separately at the same storage facility. Preparation of
such rounds for shooting can only be maintained by the artillery supply bases and
by the arsenals. In army units artillery rounds are being stored only as ready, with
shells in filling and fuzzing or in filling but not fuzzing

• to wrap the front cover A piece the barrel and get hook 2 fasten loop 2a;
• get the hook 3 by the loop 3a under the barrel;
• get the hook 4 by the loop 4a;
• to wrap the cradle from below left by cloth Г and get the hook 5 by the loop
5a;
• to close the right and left lift lugs of hinged piece and get the hook 6 by the
loop 6a on the belt upon arranging the following steps:
• to pull back lower piece of the cover under the pins of trials and jack handle
over the sabot;
• to guide the looped belt 6a under gear axis and wrap round the axis, and the
cover end piece with hook 6 guide under gear axis from front to back until it
meet the loop 6a;
• the sheet Д guide backwards under the gear axis and get hook 7 by the loop 7a
of the belt, pressing cover pieces E and Д, closing the left and right lift lugs of
hinged piece of trials; and the end piece E of cover with loop 7a run under
gear axis, the looped belt 7a lay round the cover from the back, pressing it to
howitzer;
• get the hook 8 by the loop 8a guiding it under the gear axis.

c. Put cover on the muzzle brake. The fastener length on the hooks can be
adjusted, varying the length of ropes, to provide cover tightness around the gun.

15-3
 TM01-01-2005-10
C. Artillery Full Charges

1. Classification of Full Charges and Requirements

A part of the artillery round, consisting of a powder portion of one or several marks
and of auxiliary elements assembled in a definite order and intended for giving a
required initial velocity to a projectile under certain pressure of powder gases in a
bore is known as a full charge. Artillery full charges are classified according to the
types of shots in which they are employed, to their design and according to the
quantity of powder marks.

a. According to the types of shots charges are subdivided into:

- charges for the shots of fixed loading
- charges for the shots of separate loading
- charges for the shots of breech loading

b. According to their design full charges can be constant and variable charges.

1. Constant full charges contain a portion of powder, the quantity of which

is strictly determined. It is impossible or prohibited to change this
quantity before loading. It allows obtaining only one tabular initial
velocity, and therefore, predetermining the character of projectile
trajectory.

2. Variable full charges consist of several separate powder portions (the

main packet and incremental charges). When firing, this allows to change
the weight of the charge and, thus, to change initial velocity of the
projectile, the trajectory and the range of projectile flight. Above all,
design of a full charge depends on the type of shot for which it is
designed.

3. Full charges for the shots of fixed loading are constant charges. They are
used for firing from guns and may be complete and reduced. Full charges
have extremely large powder portion for a given type of guns, the latter
have a smaller powder portion. Reduced charges applied at medium
ranges of firing contribute to increase of the gun barrel life and ensure a
higher trajectory. Separate QF rounds are mainly loaded with variable full
charges and much less frequently with constant charges.
c. Variable full charges are used in two variants: complete variable charges
and reduced variable charges.

A complete variable full charge is the charge consisting of the main

charge packet and incremental charges; the complete variable full charge
contributes to the highest initial velocity for a given type of the gun.
Intermediate full charges obtained by means of extracting definite number
of incremental charges from the shell case have their own number and are
reduced as compared with complete charges. To widen the scale of
velocities for certain guns both complete variable and reduced variable
full charges are used. Numerical designation of charges in complete and
reduced full charge is common. Separate BL rounds are loaded only with
variable full charges. They can be both complete variable charges and
reduced variable charges.

15-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

d. According to the quantity of powder marks full charges may be

manufactured by using powder of one or several marks. Full charges filled
with powder of two or more marks are known as composite charges. For full
charges, the following primary technical specification requirements are
established: monotony of action when firing, a lower bore scoring effect,
flashlessness of a shot, simple methods of compiling of full charges and
stability during extended storage. Monotony of firing action of full charges is
assessed by dispersion of initial velocities. To meet this requirement, for each
gun model the nature and composition of powder, shape and size of powder
elements, quantity and design of igniter are thoroughly selected. To provide
monotony of powder burning and therefore monotony of initial projective
velocities, strict observation of the quantity of a powder packet within the
established standards is required. The design of the charge (i.e. a certain
position of a powder portion and auxiliary elements providing more or less
favorable condition for ignition and burning of powder) produce a great effect
on the monotony of initial velocities.

Experimentally proved that for normal action of a full charge a powder packet
should occupy at least 2/3 of the chamber or shell case length and should be
somewhat rigidly fixed. When firing, monotony of action of full charges also
depends on strict observation of charge handling regulations in both storing
and firing processes. The requirement of producing the least effect of powder
gases on the bore scoring is applied to increase the bore life. This requirement
is met by employing in full charges the powder with relatively low calorific
value. In case when employing low caloric powder is irrational a desensitizer
is placed in the full charge for reducing a thermal effect of powder gases on
the barrel metal. The requirement of the shot flashlessness is met by using
flashless powder or special agents for the charge known as flash reducing
charges. Simplicity and monotony of methods of loading full charges
contribute to the increase of gun rate of fire and lack of errors in the process
of firing. Stability of full charges during extended storage is provided by
secured sealing of full charges and by using stable powders while storing.

2. General Principles of Full Charge Arrangement

A full charge consists of a powder packet and auxiliary elements. The powder packet
is a source of a certain quantity of energy which produces a desirable propellant
effect. However, to meet a number of technical specification and exploitation
requirements some auxiliary elements may be placed into full charges in addition to
powder. They are: igniter, de-coppering agent, desensitizer, flash reducing charge
and distance piece (an obturating piece). Availability in the full charge of all above-
mentioned auxiliary elements is not obligatory. Using of each element depends on
the characteristics of powder properties, mission of the full charge and firing
conditions.

a. Portion of powder is the main element of any full charge. The portion
and mark of powder are defined by ballistics provided that the most
profitable use of the full charge energy is gained for achieving the
required initial velocity under the assigned powder gases pressure.
Quantity of the powder packet for each lot of powder is established during
check firing on the artillery range. Powders of even one and the same

15-5
 TM01-01-2005-10
mark, but of different manufacture lots often differ in their characteristics.
The packet of powder of both complete constant and complete variable
full charges must provide the highest initial projectile velocity under the
pressure of powder gases that does not exceed the endurance of the gun
barrel. While defining a powder portion of reduced charges conditions of
obtaining a given initial velocity is taken into consideration. Maximum
permissible smallest powder weight of the main packet of variable charges
and also of reduced constant charges is estimated from the conditions of
obtained given minimum initial velocity under the powder gas pressure on
the projectile bottom. It is sufficient for cocking the fuse mechanisms.
Two powder marks are very often used when designing variable full
charges: for main packets – with less thickness of a web, for incremental
charges – with greater thickness of a web. Such choice of powder marks
allows providing cocking of the fuse mechanisms, reliable ignition and
complete combustion of a full charge when the main powder packet
weight is smaller.

Contradictoriness of requirements laid to reduced and complete charges sometimes

cannot be properly solved in the system of one variable charge. In such case two
variable charges are manufactured:

a) Reduced variable consisting of thin powder and allowing to obtain a number

of initial velocity values from the lowest and higher (according to the scale)
b) Complete variable, consisting of more thick powder and allowing obtaining a
number of initial velocity values from the highest and lower.

When firing on complete and reduced variable charges the requirement for the whole
velocity scale is met. The scale is established for a given arty system. Depending on
the shape of powder elements, types of shots and also the design of charge chamber
this or that shape is attached to a full charge. Powder may be placed in a cartridge
scattered or in a cloth cartridge bag made of cotton (calico) in shots of fixed and
separate loading or only in cloth cartridge bag in shots of breech loading. In this case
bags are made of silk fabric. When firing silk fabric is completely burnt down
leaving no shoulder remains in a gun chamber. They can cause untimely ignition of
the next charge in the process of loading.

3. Igniter. Ballistic monotony of shots greatly depends on the monotony of powder

ignition in a full charge. Monotony of initial projectile velocities and maximum
pressure of powder gases may be available when all powder elements of charge are
ignited simultaneously and momentarily. Ignition means of shots themselves don’t
possess sufficient power for charge ignition. Hence to reinforce an ignition impulse
an igniter is used. An igniter is a powder packet placed in a calico cloth cartridge bag.
Igniter’s weight is reckoned on the basis of trouble free and quick ignition of a full
charge. When the weight of igniter is increased besides power increasing of ignition
impulse an initial pressure is raised. It causes the growth of ignition speed and
charge burning as a whole. Some minimum pressure developed by gas means of
ignition and the igniter equal to 50-125kg/sm2 is required for reliable and quick
ignition of a full charge. Experimental data confirm that under the pressure less than
50 kg/sm2 it is difficult to obtain ignition of the charge. Failures in charge ignition
and hang fires are possible if the power of the ignition impulse is not sufficient and
the pressure is small. The weight of igniter causing reliable ignition is calculated
experimentally and depends on a gun caliber. It is equal approximately to 0.5-3%

15-6
 TM01-01-2005-10
from a powder portion. According to their design igniters can be pinned, sewer and
tied. They are usually placed between means of ignition and a charge base. If
dimensions of a full charge can not afford simultaneous ignition of the whole powder
charge by one igniter they use the second igniter which is accommodated in the
middle of a charge. In the process of firing by projectiles with copper driving bands
coppering of a bore (accumulation of copper on rifling) takes place. It reduces
diameter dimensions of a bore and may cause charging of charge ballistics and even
barred bulge. To remove coppering of a bore in charges de-coppering agents are used.
De-coppering agent is a coil of wire made of lead or an alloy of lead with tin. When
firing, the lead under high temperature of powder gases melts and combines with
copper forming a fusible alloy. This alloy is mechanically carried out by a flow of
powder gases and a driving band when the next firing occurs. As a rule de-coppering
agent is placed above a full charge in some cases it is tied in the middle of it. The
weight of de-coppering agent is equal to one per cent of a powder portion.

4. Desensitizer is mainly used when firing by full charges for cannons and is intended
for reducing of wear out (scoring) of bore. In the process of firing by reduced full
charge desensitizer is not used. Desensitizer is a sheet of paper covered on both
sides with a layer of high molecular organic substances (ceresin, paraffin, petrolatum
and their alloys). According to its mechanism desensitizer can be of sheet- or
channel-type. Sheet desensitizer consists of one or two sheets and is used in full
charges of grain nitrocellulose powder when firing from the cannons of small and
medium calibers. A channeled desensitizer is used in full charges manufactured out
of the ballistic-type powder for arty guns of caliber 100 mm and more. For more
effective action desensitizer is placed around the upper part of full charge at the sides
of a shell case. The effect of desensitizer while firing is as follows: in the process of
charge burning a warmth is partially lost for sublimation of desensitizer organic
substances; therefore temperature of gases in the bore is somewhat reduced. In
addition, when the desensitizer has been worked out the steams of organic substances
having high viscosity and low thermal conductivity envelop powder gases. A
protective layer formed in this process makes difficult to transmit warmth from gases
to the barrel sides. This made possible to increase barrel life of medium caliber guns
approximately twice, and of small caliber guns more that fire times. However, use of
desensitizer increases the fouling in a barrel and deteriorates shell case extraction due
to fouling of the charge chamber.

5. Flash reducing charges. At the moment of fire when powder gases leave the bore
flame is formed in front of the gun. The flame can reach very large dimensions. It
discloses the gun especially at night. Sometimes when the tempo of firing from the
guns of medium and large caliber is high except muzzle flash the so-called back flash
is formed. It appears while opening breech mechanism which can cause the burns of
the crew. A back flash is extremely dangerous when firing from tank and self-
propelled guns. One of the causes of flame formation is the compound of burning hot
powder gases, containing CO, H2, CH4, and other highly inflammable agents with the
air oxygen.

a. There are two ways of shot flame elimination:

• reduction of powder gas temperature by lowering powder calorific
value. It is achieved by introducing in powder composition so-called
cooling agent. However this way is not always acceptable as it will
obligatory cause the lowering of full charge ballistics;

15-7
 TM01-01-2005-10
• rise of the temperature of combustible gas ignition when mixing
gases with the air oxygen. It is provided by using flashless powder
and flash reducing charges.

Flash reducing charges present a portion of flash reducing salt or flash reducing
powder, placed into a ring shaped cloth cartridge bag. Powdery potassium sulphate
(K2SO4) potassium chloride (KCl) or their mixture is used as flash reducing salts.
They are used only at night firing as in the day time they produce a smoke cloud
which discloses the gun. Powders containing potassium salts (K2SO4, KCl) or
chloride organic compounds (extinguishers of the type X-10, X-20, D-25) are known
as flash reducing powders. Flash reducing powders containing chloride organic
compounds are the most effective. They do not form a smoke, operate in a charge as
usual cooling agent and are used mainly for blanking of back flash in shots of both
fixed loading and separate loading. The effect of extinguishers of the type X-10, X-20
and D-25 is as follows: chloride organic compounds located in a lower part of a
charge around the igniter in the process of joint burning form salt KCl. This salt is an
anticatalyst of powder gas ignition when powder gases leave the bore. The weight of
a flash reducing charge is equal to 0.5 – 1 % from a powder portion of a full charge.

6. Distance (obturating) piece presents cardboard elements of a full charge. It serves

for preventing a charge from movements in a shell case during transporting and shot
operations. It also serves for elimination of powder gas break till full fitting of a
charge driving band into barrel rifling. Distance piece of fixed loading shots (Fig.
71) consists of a washer placed directly on powder of cylinder and obturator.
Depending on the charge design and the degree of its filling the shell case distance
piece may be absent, may have all three elements, one obturator or a washer or a
cylinder. It case when a projectile e is equipped with a tracing device a hole is made
in a washer or an obturator. Distance piece in separate loading shots consists of two
cardboard lids. A lower lid equipped with a loop made of tape is named normal. It
serves as an obturator when firing and eliminates the fall and shifting of bundles of
cordite in a charge when loading. An upper lid with a tape is named amplified and is
designed for fixing and sealing of a full charge in a shell box. A loop and tape are
served for taking the lid off the shell case. To make a full charge sealing more
reliable all the surface of the amplified lid is primed with a layer of lubrication PP-
95/5 (95% - petrolatum and 5 % paraffin).

7. Full Charges for QF Rounds

a. Nitrocellulose powders and the powders on nonvolatile solvent of tube shape are
used in full charges QF rounds. Nitrocellulose powder charges may be of one-
grain powder mark or combined, consisting of grain and a bundle of single
perforated tube propellant. A bundle of single perforated tube propellant
provides monotony of charges ignition and more rigid fastening of it in reduced
charge shell cases. Full charge grain powders may be placed in shell cases
scattered or in a cloth cartridge bag, and in reduced charges - in a cloth cartridge
bags. Charges from powders on nonvolatile solvent consist of one powder mark
placed in a shell case in the form of a bundle with a small scattered part. If a
shell case is rather long a charge may consist of two bundles of equally long
tubes, arranged one above another.

15-8
 TM01-01-2005-10
b. Full charges of fixed loading shots.
(a): complete grain powder charge without a cloth bag; (б): complete grain
powder charge in a cloth bag; (в): complete tube propellant charge; (г): reduced
charge of grain and tube powders (combined). (1): powder; (2): cloth cartridge
bag; (3): igniter; (4): flash reducing charge; (5): obturator; (6): washer; (7):
cylinder; (8): de-coppering agent ;( 9): desensitizer.
c. A full charge is fixed in a shell case by a distance piece. An igniter depending on
the design of a charge may be sewn to a cloth cartridge bag tied to a bundle of
tube propellant or glued to a shell case nipple. Desensitizer may be put into shell
case and if there is a cloth cartridge bag - sewn to its outside surface. Flash
reducing charge from flash reducing powder in a ring shaped cloth bag is located
around the igniter and fixed by sewing to a cloth bag or by tying to a bundle of
tube propellant.

8. Full Charges for Separate QF Fixed Rounds

For variable full charges for separate QF fixed rounds both nitrocellulose grain or
tube powders and double base tube powders are used.

Complete variable charge to 122 mm Separate elements of variable charge to 122 mm

howitzer, model 1938. howitzer model 1938.
(1): main packet; (a): main packet with igniter (1) and flash
(2): two lower incremental charges; reducing charge (2)
(3): four upper incremental charges; (б): lower incremental charge of equal weight
(4): igniter;
(5): flash reducing charge;
(6): de-coppering agent;
(7): normal lid;
(8): amplified lid.

On a complete variable charge is given for a 122 mm howitzer, model of the year
1938. A charge consists of the main packet of powder 4/1 and six incremental
charges of powder 9/7. Incremental charges are located in two rows: two incremental
charges are located in the lower row and four are located in the upper row.
Incremental charges in each row are of the same weight but have different weights in
lower and upper rows. Cloth cartridge bag of the main packet presents a right-angled
bag with a central opening. To increase its stiffness the bag is divided into four equal
sections by sewing. A booster charge and flash reducing charge of back flash from
flash reducing powder of the mark BTX – 10 are sewn to the base of a packet cloth
bag. Two lower incremental charges, manufactured in the shape of half-rings when
stowaging on the main packet in the shell case form an opening 20 mm diameter. On
top of incremental charges of the upper row a de-coppering agent, normal and
amplified lids are packed.

15-9
 TM01-01-2005-10
Full charges of separate loading shots:
(a) Complete variable charge; (б):reduced variable charge; (1): main packet (2):
equal weight incremental charges; (3): different weight incremental charges; (4):
igniter; (5): tape (6): lugs for tape. (7): cover.
The design of a given charge with an opening along the axis of the main packet
and incremental charges of lower row provides synchronous power ignition of
all the charge elements. The firing is executed both by a complete charge and by
six intermediate charges.
They are obtained at firing position by elimination of a certain quantity of
incremental charges in accordance with range tables. The numbers of
intermediate charges correspond to the quantity of incremental charges extracted
from a shell case.

9. Full Charges for BL Rounds

Full charges for BL rounds are manufactures from nitrocellulose grain powders
placed into cloth cartridge bag of amiantin fabric. On Fig. 74 complete variable and
reduced variable charges to 203 mm howitzer model 1931 are presented. Complete
variable charge consists of a packet with igniter and six incremental equal weight
charges, reduced variable charge consists of a packet with igniter and four different
weight incremental charges. In a complete charge powder 17/7 is used, in a reduced
charge the mark of the powder is 4/1. Incremental charges and igniter are fastened
with a packet by tapes. Power portion of reduced variable charge is less that the
weight of complete variable charge packet and when kitting out numbered charges a
reduced variable charge presents charge №7. It is possible to kit out eleven
intermediate numbered charges out of complete and reduced variable charges by
eliminating of incremental charges. Kitted out charges, a complete variable and
reduced variable are placed into separate covers. Such charges are stored and
transported in hermetically sealed galvanizers, boxes, which are packed in wooden
containers.

D. CARTRIDGE CASES

A cartridge case is a part of fixed and separate loading arty round and is designed for
packing into it a full charge auxiliary element to the charge and ignition means. It is also
designed for safety of full charge from the influence of the environment and from
mechanical damages while handling. A cartridge case is used for powder gas obturation
when firing, for joint of full charge with a projectile in fixed loading shots.

There are the following elements in a cartridge case to a fixed loading shot: (1): mouth of
cartridge case, (2): shoulder, (3): walls of cartridge case, (4): cartridge case flange, (5): base, (6):
primer hole.
Cartridge cases.
a: of a fixed loading shot
Mouth of cartridge case is designed for joining of a б: of a separate loading shots
cartridge case with a projectile. Shoulder is a (1): mouth of cartridge case (2): shoulder
transient element from mouth of cartridge case to (3): walls of cartridge case (4): cartridge
walls of cartridge case. case flange (5): base (6): primer hole with
thread for primer cap.

15-10
 TM01-01-2005-10
Walls of cartridge case are of conical shape. Diameter dimensions of walls of
cartridge case are somewhat smaller (0.3-0.7mm) than of charge chamber. It
causes free loading. Conical shape of walls of cartridge case and a gap make
easier the extraction of a case after firing. The thickness of walls of cartridge
case is variable and increases to the base. On the outside the base of a cartridge
case has a ring cartridge stop (cartridge case flange) and inside it has convexity
(nipple). Cartridge case flange in the majority of cartridge cases serves for a lug
in ring boring of breech mechanism socket of barrel. It fixes the cartridge case in
a loading chamber and also serves for seizing by arms of the extractor when they
are thrown away. There is a socket with thread (primer hole) for ignition means
on the cartridge case bas

15-11
 TM01-01-2005-10

15-12
 TM01-01-2005-10

CHAPTER XVI

KITTING OUT AND EXPLOITATION OF ARTILLERY ROUNDS.

A. KITTING OUT OF ARTY SYSTEMS WITH ROUNDS AND ITS ESSENCE.

To make use of a great number of ammunition employed in up-to-date arty

properly it is necessary not only to know their design, effect and combat
characteristics but also to kit out and exploit them properly. Kitting out is
conventionally divided into two types: quantitative and qualitative.

1. Quantitative kitting out is an established ratio between different operational

ammunition employed to a given model of armament. It is reflected in a battle scale
of ammunition to a unit of armament. Establishment of a battle scale of armament is
made up on the basis of scientific data which include experimental analysis of wars,
battle exercises and maneuvers. Battle scale of ammunition must correspond to battle
purpose of a gun and provide effective hitting of the aim. Thus for example battle
scale of ammunition of 122 mm howitzer D – 30 consist of various shots. Taking into
consideration that 122 mm howitzer is used for solving fire missions for motorized
infantry units and sub-units; its battle scale of ammunition includes shots of
fragmentation shell with complete charge, shots of fragmentation shell with reduced
variable charge and shots of hollow charge. Such composition of battle scale of
ammunition allows destroying hostile manpower and firing means and at the same
time to exploit howitzer against enemy tanks and other armored targets. Battle scale
of ammunition is a unit of supply and it is put into action by order of Minister of
Defense of the USSR. Strictly definite composition of battle scale of ammunition
makes possible to plan properly production of different purpose ammunition and
properly equip the troops with ammunition necessary for solving multiform missions
in various types of combat.

2. Qualitative kitting out presents a list of all shots, which can be employed for firing
from each gun model. A list of shots is reflected in Instructions on battle kitting-out
of shots of Soviet Army arty systems. These Instructions are worked out and
approved by Chief Directorate of Missile Troops and Artillery (CDMTA). It defines
shot kitting out of all arty and mortar systems, kitting out with missiles and anti-tank
guided missiles of combat vehicles which are either on armament or obsolete but
stored on bases and arsenals of CDMFA. It Instructions on battle kitting out a shot
designation and its index with indication of main elements and their characteristics
are given.

B. STEINCILLING, PAINTING, INDEXATION AND MARKETING OF

AMMUNITION

Stenciling, painting and marking of ammunition are used for quick and unmistakable
estimation of their purpose, caliber and other main characteristics necessary for proper
kitting out and exploitation. Data about manufacturing of projectile body, shell case,
igniter, and ignition means are sealed in the form of stamp and data about projectile type
and equipment are impressed in the form of marking and distinguished painting.

16-1
 TM01-01-2005-10
1. Stenciling.

a. Sings (letters, Figures) squeezed out or marked on the outside surface of

projectiles, igniters or tubes, shell cases and ignition means are called stamps.

b. Arty projectiles have main and duplicated stamps.

c. The main stamps are signs indicating a plant number (3), a lot numbers (4), a year
of manufacturing of projectile body (base)(5), metal melting number (1), stamp of
military representative of CDMTA (8) and a print of Brinel’s sample (2).

d. Outside surface is sealed by a manufacturing plant in accordance with drawing.

The location of stamps may be various and depend on projectile caliber, metal
and design of its covering.

e. If a projectile has a screwed head or screwed base then a plant number, a lot
number and a year of manufacturing of these elements are sealed on them too.

f. On armor-piercing projectiles with tracer a lot number, stamp of TCD and stamp
of military representative are impressed on driving band. It is explained by the
fact that given stamps are impressed after heat treatment of projectile body.

g. Duplicated stamps are impressed at the plant manufacturing projectile equipment

and serve in case of marking loss. They are: cipher of explosive (smoke) agent
(7) equipping the projectile and weight (ballistic) signs (9).

h. The meaning of stamps on mines is the same as on arty projectiles. They are
located on the base and on the tube of a mine stabilizer.

i. Stamps on combat and rocket parts and pyrotechnic candles of missiles do not
differ in content and meaning from generally established stamps on projectile and
mine coverings.

Stamps on fuser and tubes indicate:

(1): fuse mark (established abridged name)

(2): plant manufacturing cipher (number or initial letters)
(3): number of manufacturing lot
(4): manufacturing year.

Besides, on rings of pyrotechnic remote fuser and tubes they indicate a lot number of time fuse
composition (5).
On head fuses stamps are impressed on a body side surface. On base fuser having tracer
compound stamps are located along the circle of body flange, and if there is no tracer they are
put just on the base cut of body.
On remote fuses and tubes similar stamps are located on the outside surface of body jack
footplate in such a way as it can be seen when sealed cap is screwed.
Stamps on shell cases and primers are impressed only on base.

16-2
 TM01-01-2005-10
2. Painting of Ammunition

Ammo painting is classified into safety and distinguished.

a. Safety painting serves for protection of metal from corrosion. In peaceful time
outside surface of all projectiles and mines caliber more than 37 mm are
painted in gray or other color stipulated by technical condition. Exception is
made for practice projectiles painted in black color and for propaganda shell
and mines painted in red color. The projectiles caliber37 mm and less and
also a band and driving bands of all shells are not painted. Besides the place
of joining of a projectile with a shell case is not painted when projectiles are
intended for shots of unitary loading. All unpainted projectile and mine
elements are covered with colorless lacquer. At war time safety paint as a rule
is not applied to projectiles and mines of caliber up to 203 mm. Lubrication is
used as rust preventing coating. It must be removed before firing at fire
position.

b. Distinguished painting is applied to some projectiles, mines, shell boxes

igniters and primers. As a rule projectiles and mines are coated with
distinguished painting in the form of colored ring stripes. Distinguished
stripes placed on head parts of projectiles (mines) or under upper bang denote
projectiles type and make easier to recognize their purpose. Colors,
disposition and meaning of distinguished painting on projectiles and mines are
given in table 7. To distinguish sub-caliber shots of streamlined shape from
other armor-piercing projectiles with tracer their head part is painted in red
color for 35 mm.

Stamp on shell case base.

(1): lot number; (2): cipher of manufacturing year; (3): plant number; (4): cipher of
DTC (depart of technical control); (5): stamp of military representative; (6): number
of furnace charge; (7): special stamp material marking, predestination etc; (8): a
number of fired shots
Stamps on primers.
(1): mark of primer; (2): cipher of manufacturing plant; (3): lot number; (4): cipher of
manufacturing year

Distinguished Projectiles and Mines Painting

Table 7
Type of projectile and mine Color of ring stripe
Smoke Black
Concrete-piercing Dark blue
Incendiary Red
Illuminating White
Propaganda Red (on the whole surface)*
Practice Black (on the whole surface)*
Ranging-target indicating Two continuous or dotted
stripes of black or white colors
*The distinguished painting of these projectiles is at the same time safety.

16-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

On fragmentation and smoke projectiles the bodies of which are made of

refined cast iron, over lower band and leading band a continuous ring stripe of
black color is impressed. Thus smoke shell of refined cast iron will have two
black stripes, one will be on a head part, and another will be over lower band.
All the rest projectiles can be easily recognized from their appearance and
they have no distinguished painting. Continuous ring black stripe is
impressed above marking on shell cases of unitary loading shots assembled
with reduced charge. The same stripe impressed on a shell case to separate
loading shot designates that a special charge assembled in a shell case is
intended for firing by amour piercing projectile with tracer. Fuses and tubes
are coated with distinguished painting in case if there are several samples
similar by appearance but different by purpose. Distinguished painting is
applied to primers only after their restoration. One white stripe 5 mm
wide is applied to the chord of primer base cut after the first restoration,
after the second-two while parallel stripes 5 mm wide each.

3. Ammunition (ammo) indexation.

All articles of arty armament including ammo are divided into ten types.
Types have two digit numbers and begin with Figure 5. If at the beginning of
a type number there will be another Figure it means that a given article is not
listed in Chief. Directorate of Missile Troops and Artillery (CDMTA). Shots,
shells, mines, fuses, tubes and their packaging are referred to 53rd type,
charges, shell cases, ignition means, auxiliary elements of shots and their
packaging are referred to 54th type; ammo of small arms and hand grenades –
to 57th type. Each article is given brief conventional sign i.e. Index. In ammo
indexes are applied to arty shots (rounds), their element and packaging.
Indexes can be complete and brief.

a. Complete index consists of two Figures standing in front, from one to tree
letters standing in the middle and of three Figures which are to the right of
the letters. e.g. 53 –УОФ-412. The first two Figures indicate type of
armament to which a sample belongs, letters stand for a sample type (in
majority of cases they are initial letters of sample designation), and the last
three letters stand for sample number. If a shot or its element (projectile,
charge) is taken into service for firing from a certain gun (mortar) it has
same number as gun (mortar). If a shot element is used for firing from
different guns of one caliber then instead of the last index Figure they put
zero. e.g.53-Г-530.

Meanings of letters in ammo indexes are listed below in table 8.

16-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

Table 8.
Armament type Letters Names of articles
number
53 У Унитарный патрон – Unitary shell
В Выстрел раздельного заряжения – Separate
loading shot
Ф Фугасная граната –Fused grenade
О Осколочная граната – Fragmentation shell
ОФ Осколочно-фугасная граната – High-explosive
fragmentation shell
ОР Осколочно-трассирующий снаряд – Tracer-fitted
fragmentation shell
ОЗР Осколочно-зажигательно-трассирующий снаряд -
Fragmentation incendiary tracer-fitted shell
БР Бронебойно-трассирующий снаряд – Armor-
piercing projectile with tracer
БП Кумултивный вращающийся снаряд – Hollow-
charge shell (rotating)
БК Кумултивный невращающийся снаряд – Hollow-
charge shell (non rotating)
Г Бетонобойный снаряд – Concrete-piercing shell
Д Дымовой снаряд – Smoke shell
З Зажигательный снаряд – Incendiary shell
С Осветительный снаряд – Illuminating shell
А Агитационный снаряд – Propaganda shell
ПБР Практический бронебойный трассирующий
снаряд – Practice armor piercing projectile with
tracer
54 ДЦ Дымовой целеуказательный снаряд – Smoke
target indication shell
А Заряд в мешке для засыпки в гильзу – Charge in a
bag for patting into shell case
Б Заряд в картузе для вкладывания в гильзу –
Charge in a cloth cartridge bag for putting into
cartridge case
Ж Заряд в гильзе – Charge in a shell case
ЖН Заряд в гильзе из нитроглицеринового пороха –
Charge in a shell case from double base powder
ЖК Заряд в гильзе из нитроксилитанового пороха –
Charge in a shell case from nitroxylitane powder
З Заряд в картузе к выстрелу раздельного
картузного заряжания – Charge in a cloth cartridge
bag to separate loading shot

16-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

In case when a new ammo sample is taken into service and is similar by
purpose and designation to the existing sample of a given gun but having
its peculiarities which influence ballistics or operational characteristics at
the end of index from one to three letters are written. e.g. 100 mm field
gun model 1944 was armed with sharp-pointed armor-piercing projectile
with tracer, index 53-БР-412. 100 mm armor-piercing projectile with
tracer and with a blunt nose and a ballistic cap is being taken into service.
To differ it from the first one it is given the index 53-БР-412Б. Later on
this gun obtain armor-piercing projectile with tracer of improved armor
penetration (projectile with armor piercing and ballistic caps). This
projectile gets index 53-БР-412Д.

b. Brief index differs from complete. It has no the first two digital number
e.g. БР-412Д; УОФ-412У. Shots, projectiles, mines, shell cases and
packaging are marked with brief index, cloth cartridge bags and covers as
well as technical documents are marked with complete index. In 1955
CDMTA introduced a new indexation according to which new samples of
armament, ammo and equipment get shorter indexes, enciphering caliber
and sample type of armament and ammo.

In accordance with this indexation complete index includes:

- conventional number of armament type;
- designation of an article category;
- the dial number of an article within the given category;

Armament type is marked by one digit beginning with zero, article

category is marked by the letter of Russian alphabet, and the dial number
is marked as the next number when putting this article down in a “key
list”. As an example we shall analyze complete index 3БК6. In a given
index digit 3 denotes armament type; БК stand for non-rotating hollow
charge shell; six stands for projectile sample number. Or 2A7, 2 indicates
armament type; A stands for article category (arty system); 7 is the dial
sample number in a “key list”. Brief index of this article has no first digit,
e.g. БК6 and A7. This index is used when designating the articles in
technical documents and in service correspondence. In the letter case
before brief index the name of an article is written, e.g. “Gun A7”. If an
article is modernized at the end of index the letter M and a digit showing
model number are written.

4. Marking

Inscriptions and conventional signs painted on ammo and their packaging are
known as marking. Marking coats projectiles, mines, shell cases, cloth
cartridge bags and their packaging with special paint of black color. On
practice projectiles painted in black color marking is coated with white color.

16-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

a. Projectile marking. Marking is coated on head and cylindrical parts of a

projectile. Data about projectile equipment are located on head part. They
are: cipher of projectile explosive agent (6), number of manufacturing
plant (1), lot (2), and production year (3). On cylindrical part the marking
is as follows: brief designation (index) (8), projectile caliber (4) and
ballistic (weight) signs (5). On armor piercing projectiles except above
mentioned data the mark of base fuse (9) is impressed. The base fuse
completes full equipment of the projectile; the mark of it is given under
the cipher of an explosive agent.

For abbreviated designation of explosive agents and dust-type gases

the ciphers are used.
The most widely used explosive agents equipping projectiles have the
following ciphers
- trinitrotoluene – T;
- trinitrotoluene with smoke brilliance increasing generator – ТДУ;
- trinitrotoluene with dinitronaphthalene – ТД – 50, ТД – 58;
- trinitrotoluene with hexogen – ТГ – 50;
- trinitrotoluene, hexogen, aluminium, golowax – ТГАГ – 5;
- ammotol – A-40. A-50, A-60, A-80, A-90 (Figure indicates
percentage of ammonium nitrate);
- ammotol with trinitrotoluene stopper – AT-40, AT-50 and so on;
- hexogen desensitized – A-IX-1;
- hexogen desensitized with aluminium powder – A-IX-2.

Distinguished painting and marking on projectiles:

(a): fragmentation grenade of refined cast iron; (б): smoke shell; (в): armor piercing
projectile with tracer. (1): number of equipping plant; (2): a lot number of
equipment; (3): a year of equipment; (4): projectile caliber; (5): weight (ballistic)
sign; (6): cipher of smoke agent; (8): projectile index; (9): fuse mark. On smoke
shells they impress cipher of smoke agent (7) instead of cipher BB.

Weight (ballistic) sign on a projectile indicates deflection of a given

projectile weight from standard weight. If a projectile has a standard
weight or defects from it not more that 1/3 % then a letter H is impressed,
it means that the weight is normal. If a projectile weight deflects from
standard more that 1/3 %, it is reflected by signs “plus” or “minus”. For
each sign weight deflection is given from2/3% to standard (table 9).

Table 9
Weight signs Weight deflection from standard

ЛГ lighter more that 3 %

---- lighter from 2 1/3 to 3%
--- lighter from 1 1/3 to 2 1/3%
-- lighter from 1 to 1 2/3%

16-7
 TM01-01-2005-10

- lighter from 1/3 to 1%

H lighter or heavier to 1/3%
+ heavier from 1/3 to 1%
++ heavier from 1 to1 2/3%
+++ heavier from 1 2/3 to 2 1/3%
++++ heavier from 2 1/3 to 3%
ТЖ heavier more than 3%

Note. Projectiles marked ЛГ и ТЖ are admitted only at war time by special CDMTA
permission. For 82-mm mines every sign corresponds to weight deflection to 1%
from standard.

b. Shell case marking. Shell case body with charge is marked by an arty
base assembled unitary loading shell or shot charge of separate loading.
Marking indicates abbreviated index of shot (2) and abbreviated
designation of arty system for which a shot is designed (3), powder mark
(4), lot number (5) and a year of powder production (6), cipher of powder
plant (7), lot number(8), assembly year (9) and number of base (arsenal)
where a shot was assembled.

On a shell case to separate loading shot charge index is impressed instead

of shot index. If a charge is assembled with desensitizer then below the
data about shot assembly the letter “Ф” is impressed.

Distinguished painting and marking on shot shell cases.

In some cases marking may be supplemented with signs (1): “Full
variable”, “Reduced”, “Special” and so on.
Marking on cloth cartridge bags and covers of full charges:(a): on cloth
cartridge bags of separate loading charges; (б): on covers and bags of
breech loading. (1): charge index; (2): caliber and system of a gun; (3):
charge type; (4): charge composition; (5): powder mark, lot number, a
year of production and cipher of powder manufacturing plant; (6): lot
number of powder weighing, year and cipher of powder weighing plant;
(7): powder weight

c. Marking on the packing container

On the packing container with rounds, the marking indicates the

following:
- On the front wall of the container: reduced designation of
the cannon (1) to fire which the rounds are designated, type of the
propellant charge (2), type of the projectile (3), weight symbol (4),
number of rounds in the container (5), lot of assembled rounds,
year of assembling and the number of the base that assembled the
rounds (6), the type of nose fuses

16-8
 TM01-01-2005-10

(7) screwed into projectiles, number of the plant, lot, and year of
manufacturing the fuses (8), month, year, and the number of the
base (9) that made the rounds completely filled. If rounds are
stored not completely filled, then the marking about the fuse is not
put on the front wall of the container.
- On the end wall of the container: index of projectiles (10),
number of the filling factory (11), lot (12), and the year projectiles
were filled (13), code of the explosive (14). If the container has
rounds with armor-piercing projectiles with tracers, then the code
of the explosive is followed by the type of the bottom fuse that
makes the projectile completely filled.
- On the cover of the container: danger symbol and the cargo
category (15).

C. Storage and Care of Ammunition in Troops

Ammunition in troops should be stored in specially equipped covered non-heated

storehouses separately from other types of artillery weapons. Storage of
ammunition on open sites is allowed only when troops are located in field
conditions and temporarily near a railroad line and when the ammunition is being
prepared to be loaded or when unloaded from cars before delivering to
storehouses. In all cases, ammunition should be sheltered from direct effect of
precipitation and solar rays. Signal and illumination equipment, battle-noise
simulators, and safety fuses are stored in individual storehouses or cellars located
not closer than 40 m from ammunition storehouses. In troops, all ammunition is
stored only in sets. Artillery rounds are stored ready in completely or
incompletely filled form, and rocket rounds are also stored ready but incompletely
filled. Mortar rounds in peacetime are generally stored complete. Artillery depots
of units should store only ammunition of categories 1 and 2. Storage of
ammunition of categories 3 and 4 is allowed temporarily until their dispatch to the
district ammunition depot. Ammunition dangerous for storage and transportation
are distinguished for separate storage and are destroyed in accordance with the
prescribed procedure.

Marking of rocket projectiles 1 – index; 2 – number of the filling factory; 3 – the number
of the filling lot; 4 – code of the filling year; 5 – code of the explosive; 6 – type of the
pyrotechnic cartridge; 7 – type of the powder; 8 – number of the lot, code of the year, and
code of the factory that produced the powder; 9 – number of the lot of powder charge,
code of the year and code of the factory that produced the charge; 10 – ballistic index; 11
– number of the lot, year and number of the base that assembled the projectile; 12 –
number of the lot of bodies of rocket parts, year and number of the mechanical factory.

Boxes with ammunition are put in storehouses in piles with covers up and
marking toward the passageway. The lower row of boxes is put on wooden
supports. The height of piles depends on the strength of boxes, allowable load per

16-9
 TM01-01-2005-10

square meter of the floor and on the danger extent of ammunition. So, all
completely filled artillery and mortar rounds, fuses and tubes, hand grenades in
sets with primers and projectiles of 203 mm and greater in caliber are put in piles
of up to 2 m in height. All incompletely filled artillery and mortar rounds of less
than 203 mm in caliber, charges in cases and cartridges, bullets to small arms,
hand grenades without primers and pyrotechnical equipment are put in piles of up
to 3 m in height. Only the rounds of one nomenclature and one lot are put in each
pile. Storage of one lot of rounds in different piles or storehouses is allowed only
for the case, if the lot is great and should be put in storehouses by units. Rocket
rounds are put in storehouses so as to aim their nose parts away from ammunition
storehouses, nearby populated localities, railway trunks, and industrial facilities.
Rounds with ignition, smoke and illumination projectiles in first line storehouses
are stored only temporarily and separately from other types of ammunition in
fireproof storehouses or under awnings on earth floors. To secure permanent
readiness of ammunition for combat use, it is required to timely perform technical
inspections and repair of the ammunition. Technical inspections are generally
performed once a year, predominantly in the warm and dry period of the year.
Inspection covers 2% of ammunition in each lot, but not less than two boxes.
Boxes are taken from different places of the pile. If defects are revealed during
the technical inspection, then the number of inspected ammunition is doubled. If
in the course of the repeated inspection defects are revealed, then all ammunition
of this lot is 100% inspected and repaired. Technical inspection does not cover the
ammunition subject to repair or repaired in the year as well as the ammunition and
pyrotechnical equipment hermetically packed which are inspected only to verify
the intactness of the boxes by their appearance.

1. Repair of ammunition is performed in compliance with the schedule and is

based on data of technical inspections. When repairing ammunition on artillery
storehouses of units, it is allowed performing the following operations:
a. Removal of corrosion products from surfaces of projectiles, bombs, and
cases.
b. Lubrication and painting of ammunition;
c. Minor repair of the packing;
d. Replacement of blank plugs screwed into the fuse well (tube, primer);
e. Restoration of the marking on ammunition and the packing;
f. Replacement of primary (ignition) charges of mortar bombs;
g. Replacement of primer cups;
h. Restoration of disturbed packaging for charges of QF separate loading,
joints of case mouths and the driving band of the projectile, and fuses;
i. Cleanup of dents on driving bands of projectiles and on cases;
j. Straightening of dents for case mouths of separate-loading rounds;
k. Replacement of defective nose fuses and tubes in projectiles and mortar
bombs;
l. Replacement of defective (failed) pyrotechnic cartridges in projectiles.
Necessary studies and safety instruction are arranged for the personnel
assigned to work with ammunition. To perform operations of ammunition

16-10
 TM01-01-2005-10

repair on the territory of an artillery storehouse in spare rooms, tents, or

under an awning, a special point (permanent or temporary) is equipped at
a distance of at least 30-40 m from storehouses or ammunition piles. It
should have a telephone communication, fire alarm, and firefighting
facilities. A firefighting crew is appointed out the personnel working at
the point. Technical inspections and repair are performed in compliance
with the requirements of the Artillery Weapons and Ammunition Storage
and Care in Troops Manual, Technical Inspection and Repair of
Ammunition in Troops Manual, Ammunition Categorization Manual,
Prohibited Ammunition List, Manual of Battle Ammunition Scaling,
Manual of Munitions Accounting in Military Units and Formations. In the
course of storing ammunition, in all operations with ammunition, and
when transporting ammunition, it is required to strictly adhere to the
established safety rules.

While working with ammunition, it is prohibited:

- To set projectiles, mortar bombs, charges in cases and fast-firing
fixed round upright;
- To strike on fuses and ignition facilities as well as strike
ammunition on each other;
- Carry by hand more than one unpacked round or projectile (mortar
bomb) of over 57 mm in caliber;
- To carry ammunition in defective packing, in boxes with covers
down, on the shoulder or back;
- To turn over, drag, drop, and throw boxes with ammunition;
- Extract main cartridges from mortar bombs with pincers,
screwdriver, and other auxiliary tools. Extraction of main
cartridges should be performed with a special extractor.
- To clean the well of hollow-charge projectiles and mortar bombs
with a card, metallic brushes, abrasive and other solid materials;
- To check the condition of the chain of pyrotechnic cartridges and
plugs in assembled rocket projectiles by any electric devices;
- To bury ammunition in the ground or throw them into rivers or
lakes;
- To disassemble and make blank ammunition;
- To punch fuses and tubes in projectiles and mortar bombs by hand,
hammering the core.

When operations are arranged, it is required to exclude the possibility of

ammunition falling. Dangerous in handling ammunition are carried carefully by
hand, on the stretcher or sprung carts. The bottom of the stretcher or carts should
be provided with sawdust or soft bedding. The loading and unloading of
ammunition should be performed only in prescribed places. Cars being loaded
(unloaded) should be fixed with drags or beams. To carry ammunition by railway
transport, only operable boxcars are used. Before loading, hatches of boxcars
should be closed. Ammunition is stowed in cars in such a manner that the

16-11
 TM01-01-2005-10

longitudinal axis of a round, projectile, mortar bomb is perpendicular to the

movement of the boxcar. When ammunition is transported by motor transport,
vehicles and trailers should be loaded so as to use them as much as possible but
not exceed the carrying capacity of vehicles taking into account the condition of
roads. Ammunition is allowed to be laid on transport both lengthwise and
widthwise. It is prohibited to lay ammunition containers above the boards, more
than half the height of the container in the upper row. In all cases, containers with
ammunition are stacked closely with covers, fixed against shifts and falls
throughout the journey. For this purpose, free spaces between containers are
filled with empty containers or boards. Transportation of ammunition without
packing or in defective packing is prohibited. Vehicles assigned to transport
ammunition should be provided with fire extinguishers and felt mats and have a
red flag on the left side.

D. Handling Rounds at the Fire Position

For the firing position, rounds are supplied completely filled and packed in
wooden crates. Before firing, they should be inspected, sorted, and prepared for
fire. The objective of inspecting rounds is to determine their compatibility with
the given cannon and purposes of fire, and its quality condition. Compatibility of
rounds with the cannon is determined by the caliber and marking on cases and
projectiles. To reduce dispersion of projectiles, rounds are sorted by lots of
charges and weight signs. After sorting, the data of rounds marking are recorded
in forms of use and action of ammunition fired. Preparation of rounds for fire
consists of the cleaning of their surface from the lubricant and dirt traces, the
inspection of the ammunition, and its stowage near guns. Fire is allowed for
operable, clean and not prohibited by the CDMTA (Chief Directorate of Missile
Troops and Artillery) artillery and mortar rounds and their elements as well as
rounds and elements having defects that do not hinder the use of the rounds in
battle. Identified in the course of inspection, rounds with under screwed fuses or
tubes and salient primer caps should be repaired under the guidance of the
artillery technician in a safe distance from the firing position.++Screwing up fuses
and tubes in projectiles should be made with a standard wrench at a distance of
20-30 m from the battery, and primer caps – at a distance of 10-15 m.
To avoid premature action of ammunition when fired as well as misfires
and shorts of projectiles to the target, it is prohibited to fire rounds
having:
- damaged membranes of rounds (perforation, crack, breakdown, etc.);
- mechanical damages of fuses (dented condition of the body or cap,
traces of strikes);
- fuses KTD delivered to the fire position with the tap set at O or Z;
- misfit of gauge marks on bottom fuses and the projectile bottom;
- projectiles insufficiently fixed in the case, cracks on the body and
bottom of the projectile, deformation and swinging of ballistic caps;
- warped cartridges preventing the loading;

16-12
 TM01-01-2005-10

- cracks on the mouth of cases extending beyond the cylindrical base of

the projectile on fast-firing fixed rounds and beyond the obturating
system on cases with charges for separate-loading rounds and cracks
on the bottom and body of cases at a distance of 50 mm from the
flange;
- charges in cases to separate-loading rounds with damp propellant or
torn cartridge bags without igniters and other required elements;
- projection of primer caps;
- leakage of the explosive at the place where the fuse is joined with the
projectile.

Ammunition with the above listed defects should be returned to the ammunition depot of
the unit. Projectiles with KTD fuses delivered to the fire position with the screw set on O
or Z should be destroyed by demolition in compliance with the rules established for the
demolition of blind projectiles. Inspected and sorted projectiles should be laid in a dry
place on a bedding (support) from the material at hand (boards, poles, brushwood,
tarpaulin), sheltered from rain, snow, sun rays, sand, dust and thoroughly camouflaged
from ground and air hostile observation. Storage of battery and cannon ammunition
reserves is organized in dry cellars, niches, or weapon pits. Cellars, niches, and pits
should be made so as to protect the ammunition from hits by bullets and fragments. To
avoid the dampening of rounds, cellars, pits, and niches are equipped with drains for
water. To monitor the temperature of charges, a battery thermometer is put into the
propellant charge in one of middle boxes (casings). When mortar rounds are prepared,
charges should not be opened prematurely. It may lead to the damping of powder, its
incomplete burning, shorts and bursts of mortar bombs within the disposition of friendly
troops. Before opening fire, it is required to check whether the muzzle cover is put off the
cannon, make sure that the bore is clear and that there are no objects before the gun that
hinder firing. Neglecting these requirements can cause a premature burst of the projectile
or the swelling of the bore. When preparing and loading the cannon, projectiles should be
handled with care: do not let them fall, do not strike them on the breech face or on the
carriage, do not put shells or charges in cases on the bottom of cases. Projectiles that fell
or bumped by its nose part are considered dangerous for handling and are not allowed for
firing. Immediately before loading the cannon, fuses and tubes are set for the commanded
action. When fuses and tubes have sealing caps, the latter are unscrewed. When ignition
means fail, the breech mechanism should be opened not earlier than in one minute after
triggering. If when the quick-firing fixed round is extracted, the projectile and the case
disjoin and the projectile remains in the bore, then in this event the unloading of the
cannon is performed only by firing the cannon with a clearing charge or a charge made at
the fire position in a case shortened by 20-30 mm. The shortened case is filled with about
¾ of the propellant charge extracted from the cannon after a misfire. Unloading the gun
by a blank round is strictly prohibited, since it inevitably causes the burst of the gun
barrel. The distinctive feature of preparation of rocket projectiles is that they are supplied
to fire positions in the incompletely filled form with a set of fuses hermetically packed.
Hence, their complete filling is performed before loading or on launching rails of the
fighting vehicle. After the end of firing, all rounds not used, unused additional bundles of
charges, fired cases, and caps of fuses and tubes, primer cups and percussion tubes that

16-13
 TM01-01-2005-10

produced misfires and empty carry boxes should be returned to the ammunition depot of
the unit. In rounds which were prepared for firing, it is required to inspect fuses and tubes
and make sure that they all have factory settings provided for by manuals, strongly fix
safety caps and safety fuse caps, screw on sealing caps, and lubricate joints.

16-14
 TM01-01-2005-10

ANNEX 1
PRIMARY SPECIFICATIONS
OF THE 122-MM D-30 HOWITZER

1. BALLISTIC
Caliber 122 mm
Initial velocity
Fragmentation HE projectile (full charge) 690 m/s
Fragmentation HE projectile (reduced charge, variable) 276-565 m/s
Hollow-charge projectile BP1 740 m/s
Maximum pressure of powder gases 2500 kg-
force/cm2
Maximum fire range 15 300 m
Weight of the fragmentation HE projectile 21,76 kg
Weight of the hollow-charge projectile BP1 14,08 kg
Weight of the charge (full) 3,800 kg
2. DESIGN
Length of the barrel with the muzzle brake 4785 mm (39,5
gauges)
Length of the barrel without the muzzle brake 4270 mm (35,5
gauges)
Length of the rifling 3400 mm
Number of grooves 36
Progressive angle of rifling
At the beginning of grooves 45 gauges
(3°57´)
At the end of grooves 25 gauges
(7°10´)
Width of grooves 6,6 mm
Depth of grooves 1,0 mm
Width of the land 4,0 mm
Length of the breech chamber from the breech face to the beginning of grooves 594 mm
Maximum quadrant elevation 70°
Maximum angle of depression -7°
Horizontal traverse:
With the quadrant elevation of the barrel from –5 to +18° 360°
With the quadrant elevation from +(18-70°) and barrel positions:
Between movable trails 66°
Between the immovable trail and movable trails ±29°
Amount of Steol M (glycerin and ethyl-alcohol mixture used as hydraulic fluid 10,3 l
– the translator’s note) in the recoil absorber
Amount of Steol M in the recuperator 9,77+0,2 l
Initial pressure in the recuperator 46+2 kg-
force/cm2
Normal length of recoil 740-930 mm

A1-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

Ultimate length of recoil 940 mm

Pressure in the balancing gear if the quadrant elevation is 70° 59-65 kg-
force/cm2
Amount of Steol M in the balancing gear 0,45 l
3. DIMENSIONS
Length of the howitzer in the traveling position 5400 mm
Width of the howitzer in the traveling position 1950 mm
Height of the howitzer in the traveling position 1660 mm
Height of the howitzer in the battle position with the quadrant elevation of 0°
(shield)
Height of the fire line 900 mm
Length of the howitzer in the battle position with the quadrant elevation of 0° 7800 mm
Distance between fulcrums of the carriage in the battle position 5600 mm
Clearance About 325-345
mm
Width of running 1850 mm
Diameter of the wheel 1035 mm
Width of the wheel tire 270 mm
Distance from the axis of wheels to the gravity center of the howitzer fixed for About 230 mm
traveling
4. WEIGHT
Weight:
Howitzer in the firing position 3200 kg
Howitzer in the traveling position 3290 kg
Bore 1050 kg
Breech mechanism 61 kg
Rocking parts 1500 kg
Recoiling parts 1230 kg
Cradle 200 kg
Recoil absorber assembled 75 kg
Recuperator assembled 73 kg
Balancing gear 34 kg
Upper mounting 190 kg
Lower mounting with a fixed trail 320 kg
Trails (two) 300 kg
Wheel with the boss 190 kg
Ski mounting 270 kg
5. OPERATION
Rate of fire 6-8 shots per
minute
Time to transfer from the traveling to the firing position 1,5-2,5 minutes
Maximum speed for movement along good roads Up to 60 km/h
Pressure of the carriage trail on the ground (when fixed in the traveling 200 kg
position)
Pressure of the drawbar loose on the hook of the hauler 180 kg

A1-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

ANNEX 2
ILLUSTRATED REGISTER OF SPARE PARTS, TOOLS AND FIXING
(Register is reference. Howitzers are completed ZIP in accordance with registers attached to them)
Types of ZIP sets

Quantity in the ware

Special
Solitary Group instrument for 12
for 4 wares wares
Notation Name Where used

Quantity

Quantity

Quantity
Packing Packing Packing

2А18.02-2 Main Spring 2А18.Сб 02-1А 1 In crate 1

2А18.02-6 Spring 2А18.Сб 02 2 Crate #1 1
2А18.02-10 Striker 2А18.Сб 02-1А 1 In crate 1
2А18.02-25 Closing 2А18.Сб 02-6 1 Crate #2 1
spring
2А18.02-85 Spring 2А18.Сб 02-1A 1 In crate 1
2А18.02-101 Spring 2А18.Сб 02-1A 1 Crate #1 1
2А18.07-48 Ring 2А18.Сб 07 1 Crate #2 4
2А18.09-60A Stopper bolt 2А18.Сб 10 1 Crate #1 1
52-Ц-012.Сб Mandrel with 2А18.Сб 12-212 2 In crate 2
12-10 ampoule
2А18.Сб 13-18 Ready 2А18.Сб 13-14 2 In crate 1
assembled 2А18.Сб 13-15
rope
2А18.Сб 29-1 Wheel 2А18.M.Сб 125-1 2 Individual place 1
2А18.128-52 Spring 2А18.Сб 128 2 Crate #1 1
2А18.128-83 Spring 2А18.Сб 128 4 In crate 1
А1230-7 Spring 2А18.Сб 02-4 1 Crate #1 1
А1230-12 Spring 2А18.Сб 02 1 Crate #2 1
А1232-8 Spring 2А18.Сб 02-1A 1 Crate #1 1
Lamp A12-21 2А18.Сб 130-6 2 Crate #1 4

A2-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

GOST 2023- 2А18.Сб 130-7

75
Lamp A12- 2А18.Сб 130-6 2 Crate #1 4
21-6
GOST 2023- 2А18.Сб 130-7
75
Bearing 8209 2А18.Сб 21-7 2 Crate #1 1
GOST 6874-
75
Washer 2А18.Сб 02 1 Crate #2 4
6.01.05
GOST 13463-
68
1. Instrument
2А18.Сб 42-6 Eyebolt 2А18.24-11 Crate #1 1
2А18.Сб 42-7A Sledge- For hammering spades On the trail 1
hammer 8 and general purpose
2А18.Сб 42-8 Device for 2А18.Сб 07-5 Crate #1 1
withdrawing
the stuffing
box
2А18.Сб 42-11 Device for 2А18.Сб 08 Crate #2 1
assembling of
the recoil
buffer piston
2А18.Сб 42-13 Spanner 65 2А18.07-27; 2А18.09- Crate #1 1 Crate #1 1
26; 2А18.Сб 42-28

A2-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

2A18.Cб 42-16 Device for 2A18.01-51; 2A18.17- Crate #1 1

withdrawal of 17; 2A18.24-11
the torsion
shaft, muzzle
break dowel
and wheel
housing
2A18.Cб 42-17 Device for 2A18.Сб 07; 2A18.Cб Crate #1 1
drawing the 08
recuperator
and the break
2A18.Сб 42-18 Basis 2A18M.125-1 Crate #2 1
2A18.Cб 42-21 Special screw 2A18.07-42; Crate #1 1 Crate #1 1
driver 2A18.13-34
2A18.Cб 42-23 Pile-driver for 2A18.Сб 19-28 Individual place 2
piling the
spades
2A18.Cб 42-25 T-joint 2A18.Сб 07; Crate #2 1 Crate #2 1
2A18.Сб 23A
2A18.Cб 42-29 Device for 2А18.07-34 Crate #2 1
weighing
down the
barrel
2A18.Cб 42-30 Box spanner 2А18.Сб 12-213; Crate #1 1
52-Ц-01212-88
2A18.Cб 42-40 Frame For checking sight line Crate #1 1
withdrawal
2A18.Cб 42-45 Device 2А18.Сб 13-14; Crate #1 1
2А18.Сб 13-15
2A18.Cб 42-46 Round-nose 2А18.21-63; 2А18.22- Crate #1 1
pliers 78; 2А18.23-60;
А51243-90

A2-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

2A18.42-21 Tip for recoil 2А18.Сб 08-6 Crate #2 1

piston rod
2A18 42-22 Bracket 2А18.Сб 23А Crate #1 1 Crate #1 1
2A18.42-24 Tip for 2А18.Сб 07-12 Crate #1 1
recuperator
piston rod
2A 18.42-25 Ring 2А18.Сб 07-11 Crate #1 1
2A18.42-27 Spanner blank 2А18. 07-31; 2А18.07- Crate #1 1 Crate #1 1
17 38; 2А18.08-80;
2А18.23-26
2A18.42-34 Spanner blank 2А18.23-18 Crate #1 1
46
2A18.42-48 Spanner blank 2А18.08-22; 2А18.08- Crate #1 1 Crate #1 1
36 23; 2А18.17-14;
2А18.17-102
2A18.42-56 Side spanner 2А18.08-5 Crate #2 1 Crate #1 1
85
2A 18.42-57 Male screw 2А18.Сб 42-18 Crate #2 1
2A18.42-77 Gasket 2А18.Сб 42-25 Crate #2 4 Crate #2 2
2A18.42-78 Spanner for B-90; T-7 In crate 1
safety caps
2A18.42-120 Special 2А18. 117-17; 2А18. Crate #2 1
spanner 48-3
2AI8.42-123 Snap ring 2А18.Сб 13-38 Crate #3 1
2A18.42-124 Snap ring 2А18.Сб 13-38; Crate #3 2
2А18.Сб 13-10
2A18.42-125 Snap ring 2А18.Сб 13-38 Crate #3 1
2A18.42-126 Snap ring 2А18.Сб 13-10 Crate #3 1
2A18.42-127 Snap ring 2А18.Сб 13-10 Crate #3 1
2A18.42-128 Roughing 2А18.Сб 13-38 Crate #3 1
bush
2A18.42-129 Roughing 2А18.Сб 13-38; Crate #3 1
bush 2А18.Сб 13-10
A2-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

2A18.42-130 Roughing 2А18.Сб 13-38 Crate #3 1

bush
2A18.42-131 Roughing 2А18.Сб 13-10 Crate #3 1
bush
2A18.42-132 Roughing 2А18.Сб 13-10 Crate #3 1
bush
2A18.42-133 Mandrel 2А18.Сб 13-38; Crate #3 1
2А18.Сб 13-10
52-И-035 Air-hydraulic 2А18.Сб 07; 2А18.Сб Individual slot 1 Individual 1
pump in 23A slot
packing 52-Я-
035
52-ИТ-412.Сб Tube 2А18. 42-34; 2А18. Crate #1 1
42-49 42-48; A52833-14
52-ЮТ-412.Сб Universal For extraction of case Crate #2 1
41-530 extractor
52-ЮТ-412.41- Hook for 2А18.Сб 07; 2А18.Сб Crate #1 1
602 removal of 08
packings
52-ИЦ-012.Сб Box spanner 52-Ц-012.12-57 Crate #1 1
64-1
52-ИЦ-012.Сб Screw driver 52-Ц-012.12-56 Crate #1 1
64-2
52-ИЦ-012. 64- Box spanner 52-Ц-012.12-83 and Crate #1 1
6 11x14 general purpose
52-ИЦ-012. 64- Stud-bolt 52-Ц-012.Сб 12-6; Crate #1 1
7 52-Ц-012. Сб 12-7
53-И-85 Spanner #3 Д-1-У In crate 1
53-И-001 Fuze setter for Т-7 In crate 1
tubes
ЗИ14 Spanner #1 GPV-2; RGM-2; GKN In crate 1
B-90

A2-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

ЗИ36 Spanner-setter B-90 In crate 1

B-90 with
scale
ЗИ 37 Spanner-setter B-90 In crate 1
B-90 without
scale
А71519-1 Handle for 2A18.Cб 02-1А In crate 1
removal of
wedge
А72276-13 Oil bottle general purpose Crate #1 1

А72930-53 Spanner 52-LT-412.07-33 Crate #2 1 Crate #1 1

(Variant 2)
А72930-56 Tongs RGM-2 In crate 1
А72931-10 Side spanner 2A18.02-93; 2A18.21- Crate #2 1 Crate #2 1
40 9
А72931-18 Side spanner 2A18.19-71; 2A18.23- Crate #1 1
70 15
А72932-22 Three-edged general purpose In crate 1
file 200 #3
А72936-4 Drift 25x250 2A18.24-11 and Crate #1 1
general purpose
А72937-11 Ratchet 17 2A18.Cб 42-29 Crate #2 1
А51331-2 Lifting eye 2A18.08-13; 2A18.08- Crate #1 1
14;
А51641-2 Crowbar 2A18.Cб 01-15; On trail 1
2A18.Cб 49 and
general purpose
А52321-33 Gasket 8 2A18.Cб 42-25 Crate #2 4 Crate #2 3
А52415-1 Gauge 2A18.02-10 Crate #1 1 Crate #1 1

A2-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

А52830-2 Spanner 11- 2A18.09-48; 2A18.17- Crate #2 1 Crate #1 1

14 133; 2A18.21-58A1;
2A18.21-59; 2A18.22-
84; 2A18.42-16;
2A18.42-26; 2A18.42-
40;
52-Ц-012.12-11; 52-Ц-
012.12-37 and general
purpose
А52830-5 Spanner 22- 2A18.Сб 13-11; Crate #1 1 Crate #1 1
27 2A18.13-13; 2A18.13-
67; 2A18.13-97;
2A18.02-27; 2A18.02-
28; 2A18.08-20;
2A18.08-42A;
2A18.08-55; 2A18.09-
31; 2A18.09-32;
2A18.09-216;
2A18.16-11; 2A18.17-
109; 2A18.19-102;
2A18.19-150;
2A18.21-46; 2A18.22-
73; 2A18.22-74;
2A18.42-23; 2A18.42-
52; 2A18.42-57; 52-Ц-
012.12-90 and general
purpose
А52832-22 Spanner 78- 2A18.13-46; 2A18.13- Crate #1 1
85 47; 2A18.22-39
А52833-14 Spanner blank 2A18.07-34; 2A18.08- Crate #2 1
9
А52840-36 Spanner 2A18.02-58A In crate 1
А52840-42 Spanner A51015-7; A51015-8 Crate #1 1

A2-7
 TM01-01-2005-10

А52840-65 Spanner A51970-170; A51973- Crate #2 1 Crate #1 1

11; A52131-100
А52844-30 Drift general purpose In crate 1
Tap wrench 2A18.Сб 23-5; Crate #1 1
ЛП529-4 2A18.Сб 42-30
ОСТ 3-1134 – 52-ИЦ-012.64-6
72
Tap wrench LP515-6 Crate #1 1
ЛП529-5
ОСТ 3-1134 –
72
Tap wrench 2A18.09-218; Crate #1 1 Crate #2 1
ЛП529-10 2A18.42-100; A52840-
ОСТ 3-1134 – 42
72
Piercer 7851- general purpose In crate 1
0160
(Chemical
industry)
ГОСТ (State
Standard)
7214 – 72
Piercer 7851- general purpose In crate 1
0176
(Chemical
industry)
ГОСТ 7214 –
72

A2-8
 TM01-01-2005-10

Chisel 2810- general purpose Crate #1 1

0187
(Chemical
industry)
ГОСТ 7211 –
72
Center punch general purpose In crate 1
7843-0036
(Chemical
industry)
ГОСТ 7213 –
72
Mechanical 2A18.Сб 01; 2A18.Сб Crate #1 1 Crate #2 1
clinometer 10;
with level 2A18. 12-227
(ГОСТ
10908-75) in
case
Spanner 2A18.02-84; Crate #1 1 Crate #1 1
7811- 2A18.42-53;
0003.C.1ц15. Oil bottle 1.1.Ц.6
хр. (ГОСТ 19853-74) and
ГОСТ 2839- general purpose
71
Spanner general purpose Crate #1 1
7811-
0007.C.1ц15.
хр.
ГОСТ 2839-
71

A2-9
 TM01-01-2005-10

Spanner 2A18.Сб 13-13; Crate #1 1 Crate #1 1

7811- 2A18.13-113;
0023.C.1ц15. 2A18.13-28; 2A18.02-
хр. 34; 2A18.116-8;
ГОСТ 2839- 2A18.13-153;
71 2A18.21-27; 2A18.21-
37 and general purpose
Spanner Coupling nut 12-22 Crate #1 1
7811- (ГОСТ 13957-74) and
0025.C.1ц15. general purpose
хр.
ГОСТ 2839-
71
Spanner 2A18.13-64; 2A18.01- Crate #1 1
7811- 70; 2A18.07-29;
0043.C.1ц15. 2A18.07-30; 2A18.08-
хр. 17; 2A18. 08-23;
ГОСТ 2839- 2A18.08-24; 2A18.08-
71 36; 2A18.08-56A;
2A18.13-64; 2A18.17-
135; 2A18.23-24;
2A18.23-25; 2A18.25-
15; 2A18.42-76 and
general purpose
Spanner 2A18.07-67; 2A18.07- Crate #2 1
7811- 63; 2A18.08-21;
0048.C.ц15.х 2A18.21-6;
р. 2A18.21-29; 2A18.21-
ГОСТ 2839- 34; A51011-56
71

A2-10
 TM01-01-2005-10

Spanner 2A18.16-63; 2A18.21- Crate #1 1

7811- 55; 2A18.22-80;
0317.ц15.хр. 2A18.41-72
ГОСТ 16984-
71
Spanner 2A18.01-53; 2A18.07- Crate #2 1
7811- 35; 2A18.08-10;
03532.ц15.хр. 2A18.Сб 13-12
ГОСТ 16985-
71
Spanner 2A18.08-8А Crate #2 1
7812-
0347.ц15.хр.
ГОСТ 6394-
73
Spanner 2A18.09-141 and In crate 1
7813-0036 2 general purpose
Chem.ind.
ГОСТ 7275-
75
Box spanner 2A18.Сб 42-25 Crate #1 1
ЛП515-6 52-Ц-012.12-23 and
ОСТ 3-1120- general purpose
72
One sided 2A18.09-61A Crate #1 1 Crate #1 1
spanner
ЛП513-7
ОСТ 3-1118-
72

A2-11
 TM01-01-2005-10

Hammer General purpose In crate 1

7850-0053
Chem.
Phos.ind.
ГОСТ 2310-
70
Manometer 2A18.Cб 07; 2A18.Cб Crate #2 1 Crate #2 1
MCA1-100 in 23A
case
Screw driver General purpose In crate 1
7810-0306
Гр.2кд21.хр.
ГОСТ 17199-
71
Screw driver General purpose In crate 1
7810-0319
Гр.2кд21.хр.
ГОСТ 17199-
71
Bull-nose General purpose In crate 1
pliers
7814-0098
кд21.хр.
ГОСТ 5547-
75
Control level 2A18.12-227; 2A18.Cб Crate #1 1 Crate #2 1
(gauge) 01; 2A18.Cб 10
(ГОСТ 3059-
75) in case
2. Fixings
2А18М.Сб 42- General cover 2A18M.Cб 00 On the 1
1 product

A2-12
 TM01-01-2005-10

2А18.Сб 41-6 Cover for the 2A18.01-2 On the 1

breech part product
2А18.Сб 41-7 Lanyard 2A18.Cб 128 In crate 1
2А18.Сб 41-9 Cover for sights 2A18.Cб 12 On the 1
OP4M-45 product
2А18.Сб 41-12 Bar 2000 2A18.Cб 41-4 On trail 2
2А18.Сб 41-45 Roller in set for rolling the gun Individual 1
slot
2А18.Сб 41-50 Cover for 2A18.Cб 01-15 On the 1
muzzle part product
2А18.Сб 41-55 Package for 2A18.Cб 01-15 In crate 1
tools of the gun
set
2А18.Сб 41-64 Hose for pumping the In crate 1
wheels
2A18.Cб 29-1
2А18.Сб 41-68 Pull device for loading and On trail *
unloading
2A18M.Cб 00
52-Г-463М.Сб Aiming post 2A18.Cб 41-4 On trail 1
41-54 1805
2А18.41-4 Rammer for reforwarding the On trail 1
shells
52-Ю-021.Сб Normalized for rolling the gun In crate 2
strap
А72277-16 Syringe 2A18.Cб 07; Crate #2 1
2A18.Cб 08;
А72927-52 Bore cleaner 2A18.Cб 41-4 On shield 1
130
А72930-46 Fuze setter RGM-2 In crate 1 1
А72930-49 Fuze setter D-1 D-1-U In crate 1 1
А72932-40 Spade General purpose On trail 2

A2-13
 TM01-01-2005-10

А72950-30 Mug 1 For measuring liquids Crate #1 1

ГОСТ 2417-75
А72950-51 Cone for pouring liquids Crate #2 1
into 2A18.Cб 07;
2A18.Cб 08;
2A18.Cб 23A
А72957-2 Tin for liquid – for pouring in liquids In crate 2
0,5 kg
А72957-4 Tin for liquid – With 1 l. oil МGЕ- Crate #1 1
1 kg 10А for 2A18.Cб 13
А72957-15 Tin for thick for thick lubricant In crate 1
lubricants – 1
kg
А52840-39 Box spanner for primer cups In crate 1
Hand tire To measure pressure In crate (in
pressure gauge in a 2A18.Cб 29-1 pocket
with limits of wheel 2A18. Сб
measuring of 41-55)
P=2÷7 kgc/cm²
ГОСТ 9921-68
Battery light general purpose Crate #1 2
АМF-8M
Lever-plunger for greasing the oil Crate #2 1
syringe for bottle 1.1 Ц6 ГОСТ
greasing Sh1- 19853-74 and 1.2Ц6
3911010-A ГОСТ 19853-74
9Ф 371.07.000 Combined cast DTM-75 In crate 1
spanner
ЗИ124 Spanner for DTM-75 In crate 1
screwing in
ЗИ32 Spanner-setter 67 In crate 1
ЗИ133 Spanner-setter AR-5 In crate 1

A2-14
 TM01-01-2005-10

3. Set of packings
2А18М.Сб 45- Crate for 1
1 individual set
2А18М.Сб 45- Crate #1 for 1
5 group set
2А18М.Сб 45- Crate #2 for 1
8 group set
2А18М.Сб 45- Crate #1 for 1
11 special tools
2А18М.Сб 45- Crate #2 for 1
14 special tools
2А18М.Сб 45- Crate #3 for 1
17 special tools
2А18.Сб 46 Crate for 1
spanners-setters

ГОСТ – State standard

OСТ – General standard

Other abbreviations (like ones contained in serial numbers) are very specific Soviet system abbreviations.

A2-15
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 1
D-30, 122mm Towed Howitzer

A3-1
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 2
D-30 Howitzer in Traveling Position

A3-2
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 3

A3-3
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 3a

A3-4
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 3b

A3-5
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 4

A3-6
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 5 Figure 6

A3-7
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 7

A3-8
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 8 Figure 9

A3-9
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 10 Figure 11

A3-10
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 12 Figure 13

A3-11
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 14

A3-12
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 15

A3-13
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 16

A3-14
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 17

A3-15
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 18

A3-16
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 18a

A3-17
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 19

A3-18
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 20

A3-19
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 20a

A3-20
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 21

A3-21
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 22

A3-22
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 23

A3-23
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 24

A3-24
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 25 Figure 25a

A3-25
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 26

A3-26
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 27

A3-27
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 27a

A3-28
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 28

A3-29
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 29

A3-30
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 30

A3-31
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 31

A3-32
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 32

A3-33
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 32a

A3-34
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 33

A3-35
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 34

A3-36
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 35

A3-37
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 36

A3-38
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 36a

A3-39
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 37

A3-40
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 38

A3-41
 TM01-01-2005-10

A3-42
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 40

A3-43
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 41

A3-44
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 42

A3-45
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 42a

A3-46
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 43

A3-47
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 43a

A3-48
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 44a Figure 44b

Figure 44c

A3-49
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 45

A3-50
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 46

A3-51
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 47 Figure 48

A3-52
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 49

A3-53
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 49a

A3-54
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 50

A3-55
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 51 Figure 52

A3-56
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 53

A3-57
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 54

A3-58
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 55

A3-59
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 56 Figure 57

A3-60
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 58

A3-61
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 59

A3-62
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 60

A3-63
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 61

A3-64
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 62

A3-65
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 63 Figure 64

A3-66
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 65

A3-67
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 66

A3-68
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 67

A3-69
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 68

A3-70
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 69

A3-71
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 70

A3-72
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 71

A3-73
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 72

A3-74
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 73

A3-75
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 74

A3-76
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 75 Figure 76

A3-77
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figures 77 thru 80

A3-78
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 81

A3-79
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 82 Figure 83

Figure 84 Figure 85

A3-80
 TM01-01-2005-10

Figure 86

A3-81